Home

176461 User Manual.book

1. Connecting the System oc tf __ y 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL PM02 Ei Length Connections from to External Power AIC Power Selection Supply Switch Setting Required 45cm 17 7 in SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors channel 0 port2 yes externa Sues MicroLogix 1000 or 1500 porti yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter port2 yes externa DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port2 yes external PC COM port port2 yes external 1 Series B or hi gher cables are required for hardware handshaking 2 External power supply required unless the AlC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 4 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 CBL PM02 Series B or later Cable ded 3 j 7 105112 6 TC 8 Mini Din 9 D shell 6 78 3 3 5 4 12 1761 CBL PM02 Series B or equivalent Cable Wiring Diagram Programming Controller Device 9 Pin D Shell 8 Pin Mini Din 9 RI 24V 1 8 CTS GND 2 7 RTS RTS 3 6 DSR le RXD 4 5 GND DCD 9 4 DTR CTS 6 3 TXD TX
2. Description of Error Condition 02H Target node is busy NAK No Memory retries by link layer exhausted O3H Target node cannot respond because message is too large 04 Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvertently modified 05 Local processor is off line possible duplicate node situation O6H Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available 07 Target node does not respond 08H Target node cannot respond 09H Local modem connection has been lost OBH Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction OCH Received a master link reset one possible source is from the DF1 master 10H Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported command 12H Local channel configuration protocol error exists 13H Local MSG configuration error in the Remote MSG parameters 15H Local channel configuration parameter error exists 16H Target or Local Bridge address is higher than the maximum node address 17H Local service is not supported 18H Broadcast is not supported 30H PCCC Description Remote station host is not there disconnected or shutdown 37H Message timed out in local processor 39H Local communication channel reconfigured while MSG active 3AH STS in the reply from target is invalid 40H PCCC Description Host cou
3. Sub ElementDescripion Address Data Range Type UserProgram ForMore Format Access Information OUT Output PTO 0 OUT word INT 20r3 control read only 10 8 DN Done PTO 0 DN bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 8 DS Decelerating Status 0 05 bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 9 RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 9 AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 10 RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP fbit 0 or 1 control read write 10 10 IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 11 ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 11 NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS fbit 0 or 1 status read only 10 17 JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 17 JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0JCS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 18 JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP 0 or 1 control read write 10 16 JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit 0 or 1 control read write 10 12 EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH bit 0 or 1 control read write 10 12 EN Enable Status follows rung PTO 0 EN bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 13 state ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 2 to 7 status read only 0 18 OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 OF word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write 0 13 OFS Operating Frequency Status 0 word INT 0 to 20 000 status read only Hz JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT
4. Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address 5 Level E Parameter z E 2 E z RE 2 788 e o 5 _ FEK lz R lo 9 5t leo leo f fe 1 2 2 NE 555 EIS EIS SEIS IES IS S 5 Source A elelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelele ele Source B oelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelelele ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 14 2 EQU Equal Compare Instructions Not Equal EQU Equal Source A Source B NEG Not Equal Source A Source B I 0 I Instruction Type input Table 14 2 Execution Time for the EQU and NEQ Instructions Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False EQU word 1 30 us 0 94 us long word 2 27 us 141 us NEQ word 1 30 us 0 94 us long word 1 80 us 2 20 us The EQU instruction is used to test whether one value is equal to a second value The NEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is not equal to a second value Table 14 3 EQU and NEQ Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State EQU A B true A B false NEQ A B false A B true 14 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual GRT Greater Than LES Less Than Instr
5. Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Mode Level E Parameter E 2 E z ER zs e lm EIS IS I5 leo leo Ju S IS IE 555 IS E18 SE 525 2 S lo Operand Bit ejej o 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 12 6 Relay Type Bit Instructions ONS One Shot Instruction Type input N7 1 LT ONS Table 12 8 Execution Time for the ONS Instructions 0 When Rung Is True False 1 38 us 1 85 us The ONS instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time After the false to true rung transition the ONS instruction remains true for one program scan The output then turns OFF and remains OFF until the logic preceding the ONS instruction is false this re activates the ONS instruction The ONS Storage Bit is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan This bit is used to remember the false to true rung transition Table 12 9 ONS Instruction Operation Rung Transition Storage Bit Rung State after Execution false to true one scan storage bit is set true true to true storage bit remains set false true to false false to false storage bit is cleared false
6. For example when the DN or ER bit is set MSG 0000 Read Write Message MSG File 11 0 Setup Screen MSG Done Bit MSG Enable Bit MG11 0 MG11 0 0001 JE UT DN EN MSG Error Bit MG11 0 ER 0002 CEND gt Enabling the MSG Instruction Via User Supplied Input 0000 0001 0002 As long as input 1 1 0 is set or anytime it becomes set the MSG instruction in the next rung will be enabled This program is an example of controlling when the MSG instruction operates Input 1 1 0 could be any user supplied bit to control when MSGs areisent MSG Enable Bit I1 MG11 0 B3 0 q E Mt CL 0 EN 0 The MSG instruction will be enabled with each false to true transition of bit B3 0 0 B3 0 MSG Read Write Message 0 MSG File 11 0 Setup Screen MSG Done Bit MG11 0 B3 0 J E UOH DN 0 MSG Error Bit MG11 0 CER CEND gt 0003 25 27 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Local Messaging Example 1 Local Read from a 500CPU 25 28 2 MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 General This Controller Communication Command Data Table Address Size in Elements Channel Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Node Addr Local Remote Error Description No errors BEE Control Bits 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out T0 0 N7 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Error
7. Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address a Mode Level E Parameter z 5 g E E 9E rr SSIS _ l lS 9 5 5 S 2 5 5 5 5 52 9 Ela 2 5 2 8 Source ele Destination ele ele ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MOV instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Table 18 3 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets when an overflow condition is detected otherwise resets 0 2 7 Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets S 5 0 Math Overflow Trap Bit Sets Math Overflow Trap minor error if the Overflow bit is set otherwise it remains in last state 1 Control bit Note If you want to move one word of data without affecting the math flags use a copy COP instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction 18 3 MicroLogix 150
8. 15 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual SCP Scale with Parameters 15 8 Instruction Type output Table 15 9 Execution Time for the SCP Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 28 44 us 0 00 us long word 45 59 us 0 00 us The SCP instruction produces a scaled output value that has a linear relationship between the input and scaled values This instruction solves the equation listed below to determine scaled output m X xo Yo where y scaled output x input Input m slope Ay Ax Ay y1 Yo X Xo Xo input start Input min input end Input max yo Scaled start Scaled min y scaled end Scaled max The data ranges for Start and End values are 32768 to 32767 word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Math Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 15 10 SCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files Pus pes Parameter z E 2 5 e amp 5 3 E o Jo lm Ir gt SE REl 8 2 2 sie Input x olelelelelelelelelelelololelole e ele mm Input Start m ole
9. 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The CU Count Up bit is used with all of the HSCs modes 0 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CU bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CU bit is cleared 0 9 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual HSC Mode MOD Sub Element Description MOD HSC Mode Address HSC 0 MOD Data Format word INT User Program Access read only Type control The MOD Mode variable sets the High Speed Counter to one of 8 types of operation This integer value is configured through the programming device and is accessible in the control program as a read only variable Table 9 3 HSC Operating Modes Mode Number Type 0 Up Counter The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Up Counter with external reset and hold The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode Counter with external direction Counter with external direction reset and hold Two input counter up and down Two input counter up and down with external reset and hold Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold NI n5 HSC Mode 0 Up Counter Table 9 4 HSC Mode 0 Exampl
10. 4 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Constructing Your Own Null Modem Cable If you construct your own null modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout Optical Isolator Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 3 TXD 4 gt TXD 2 3 2 RXD RXD 3 2 5 GND 4 GND 5 1 CD lt CD 8 1 4 DTR 20 4 6 DSR LI DSR 6 6 8 CTS CTS 5 8 7 RTS 4 gt RTS 4 7 4 6 Connecting the System Connecting to a DF1 Half Duplex Network SLC 5 03 processor MircoLogix 1500 processor ojoo om om oolocola 00 o CHO CHO 1761 CBL AMOO 1761 CBL APOO or 1761 CBL HM02 Or 1761 CBL PMO2 radio modem or lease line AlC straight 9 25 pin cable gt 42 MircoLogix 1500 processor f radio modem or lease line CHO to port 1 or port 2 f CHO to port 1 or port 2 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 1747 CBL PMO2 or 1761 CBL APOO 1747 CBL PM02 or 1761 CBL APOO
11. 8 11 2 Relay Type Bit Instructions XIC Examine if Closed XIO Examine 1 12 2 OTE Output Energize 0 BR ene eens 12 4 OTL Output Latch Output 8 12 5 ONS One Shots hic SEE ERR NU E uua 12 7 OSR One Shot Rising OSF One 12 8 Timer and Counter Instructions Timer Instructions Overview lese mm 13 1 TON Timer On Delay 0 0 0 13 4 TOF Timer Delay eee D RIDE RUE RR EA 13 5 RTO Retentive Timer On lsseseeeeeeeee hm 13 6 CTU Count Up CTD Count Down sesseeee eee 13 10 Pike arr ae set e o e t Ata 13 11 Compare Instructions Using the Compare Instructions 8 14 2 EQU Equal NEQ Not e eee eee 14 3 Greater Than LES Less 14 4 Greater Than or Equal LEQ Less Than or Equal 14 5 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal 14 6 TIM e cxt e pda x ame Or 14 8 toc iii MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 15 16 17 18 19 toc iv Math Instructions Using the Math Instructions 0 0 0 0 eee III 15 2 Updates to Math S
12. S 1 14 binary 0 or 1 status read only When this bit is set 1 it indicates that the programming device must have an exact copy of the controller program See Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 6 11 for more information G 8 System Status File First Pass Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 15 binary 0 or 1 status read write When the controller sets 1 this bit it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress following entry into an executing mode The controller clears this bit after the first scan Note The First Pass bit S 1 15 is set during execution of the start up protection fault routine Refer to S 1 9 for more information Controller Alternate Mode STI Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 0 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIP See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 for more information STI Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 2 1 binary 0 or 1 control read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruct
13. 0 or 1 status read only The PTO NS Normal Operation Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is in its normal state A normal state is ACCEL RUN DECEL or DONE with no PTO errors The NS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in its normal state PTO Enable Hard Stop EH Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH 2 0 or 1 control read write 10 12 The PTO EH Enable Hard Stop bit is used to stop the PTO sub system immediately Once the PTO sub system starts a pulse sequence the only way to stop generating pulses is to set the enable hard stop bit The enable hard stop aborts any PTO sub system operation idle normal jog continuous or jog pulse and generates a PTO sub system error The EH bit operates as follows Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to stop generating pulses immediately output off 0 e Cleared 0 Normal operation Using High Speed Outputs PTO Enable Status EN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access EN Enable Status follows rung state PTO 0 EN 2 e 0 or 1 status read onl
14. 01 7 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Use a small flathead screwdriver to turn the trim pots Adjusting their value causes data to change within a range of 0 to 250 fully clockwise The maximum rotation of each trim pot is three quarters as shown below Trim pot stability over time and temperature is typically 2 counts 97 4 v Maximum Minimum fully counterclockwise fully clockwise Trim pot file data is updated continuously whenever the controller is under power Trim Pot Information Function File The composition of the Trim Pot Information TPI Function File is described below User Program Data Address Data Format Range Type Access TPD Data O TPI 0 POTO Word 16 bit integer 0 250 Status Read Only TPD Data 1 TPI 0 POT1 Word 16 bit integer 0 250 Status Read Only Word bits 0 7 Word bits 8 15 TPD Error Code TPI 0 ER 0 3 Status Read Only The data resident in TPI 0 POTO represents the position of trim pot 0 The data resident in TPI 0 POTI corresponds to the position of trim pot 1 The valid data range for both is from 0 counterclockwise to 250 clockwise Error Conditions If the controller detects a problem with either trim pot the last values read remain in the data location and an error code is put in the error code byte of the TPI file for whichever trim pot had the problem Once the contro
15. C 14 Understanding the Communication Protocols RS 232 Communication Interface D 1 DF1 Full Duplex Protocol isre cece cece nee eens D 2 DF1 Half Duplex 1 D 4 DH485 Communication Protocol 0 0 ec eee eee ee D 10 System Loading and Heat Dissipation System Loading Limitations 0 0 00 ee eee nee E 1 System Loading Worksheet 00 00 eee eect eee E 4 Calculating Heat Dissipation 0 0 cece ee cee eee E 6 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time F 1 Scan Time Worksheet oco ee e eU eR ded ROO d Reps F 8 System Status File Status File OVERVIEW zc cesi tai sla n kW geen been bee See ee dne oS 1 Status File Details ED eect rt ne RE LU eS G 3 Glossary Index toc vii MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual toc viii Hardware Overview Hardware Overview Hardware Overview The MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller contains a power supply input circuits output circuits and a processor The controller is available in 24 I O and 28 I O configurations The hardware features of the controller are 1098 17 Feature Description Feature Description 1 Removable Terminal Blocks 7 Memory Module Real Time Clock 2 I O Removable 8 Replacem
16. MOV 5 Table 18 1 Execution Time for the MOV Instruction Dest Data Size When Rung ls True False word 2 15 us 0 00 us long word 7 18 us 0 00 us The MOV instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Using the MOV Instruction When using the MOV instruction observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes The source is converted to the destination size when the instruction executes If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow shall be handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination is 32767 word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Source can be a constant or an address e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word 18 2 Move Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 18 2 MOV Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2
17. UserProgram Access LPI Low Preset Interrupt HSC 0 LPI bit 0107 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode on page 9 18 The LPI Low Preset Interrupt status bit will be set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the low preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the low preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the low preset this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and will also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected High Preset Interrupt executes e Underflow Interrupt executes e Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Low Preset Reached LPR Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Program Access LPR Low Preset Reached HSC 0 LPR 0 0107 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The LPR Low Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC is less than or equal to the low preset variable HSC 0 LOP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode 9 11 MicroLogix 1500 Program
18. For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 17 1 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 17 2 17 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual OR Logical OR Bimse Incline OR Sauce Soue RB 17 4 Instruction Type output Table 17 5 Execution Time for the OR Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False word 2 00 us 0 00 us long word 8 19 us 0 00 us The OR instruction performs a logical OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Table 17 6 Truth Table for the OR Instruction Destination A OR B Source A 11111111140 11 11 Source 1 1 0 01 11 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Destination 151 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 dy For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 17 1 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 17 2 Logical Instructions XOR Exclusive OR Bisse E clus ree OR Sinice Source Dest Instruction Type output Table 17 7 Execution Time for the XOR Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False word 2 67 US 0 00 us long word 8 81 us 0 00 us The XOR instruction performs a logical exclusive OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Table 17 8 Truth Table for the XOR Instruction Destination A XOR B Source A
19. N7 12 LFU instruction unloads data from stack N7 12 at position 8 Source N7 13 N7 14 Position N7 10 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 410 AON O 33 34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 19 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The LFL instruction uses the following operands 19 16 Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the LIFO stack The data size of the source must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If LIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack where the value in source is loaded Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words EE Word 0 gNi DN EM3 not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next availab
20. arameter z Sos S cc m a 5 15 15 S n olo co p 2 gt SIE amp 2 0 5 1515 mir zs tis 5 5 5 SIGE 18 9 2 514 Source D Destination ol ejeje es DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 1 Source Dest 6 Instruction Type output Table 16 2 Execution Time for the DCD Instruction When Rung Is True 1 68 us False 0 00 us Conversion Instructions The DCD instruction uses the lower four bits of the source word to set one bit of the destination word All other bits in the destination word are cleared The DCD instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Table 16 3 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Source Bits Destination Bits 15 to 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 X olro X O 4 0101010 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X 0 0 1 1 M CON C NN CN NEC NC C NN C CN 010710 X 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
21. Instruction Type output Table 21 5 Execution Time for the RET Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 44 us 0 00 us The RET instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction user interrupt or user fault routine that caused this subroutine to execute SUS Suspend Instruction Type output Table 21 6 Execution Time for the SUS Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 66 us 0 00 us The SUS instruction is used to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troubleshooting This instruction causes the processor to enter the suspend idle mode causing all outputs to be de energized The suspend ID and the suspend file program file number or subroutine file number identifying where the suspend instruction resides are placed in the status file S 7 S 8 The immediate data range for the suspend ID is from 32768 to 32767 21 4 Program Control Instructions TND Temporary End CTND Instruction Type output The TND instruction is used to denote a premature end of ladder program execution The TND instruction cannot be executed from a STI subroutine HSC subroutine subroutine or a user fault subroutine This instruction may appear more than once in a ladder program On a true rung TND stops the processor from scanning
22. Note Use this diagram for DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave protocol without hardware handshaking Series B or later cables are required for hardware handshaking DB 9 RS 232 port mini DIN 8 RS 232 port RS 485 port 4 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Connecting to a DH485 Network MicroLogix DH485 Network MicroLogix 1500 m connection from port 1 or port 2 to MicroLogix 1761 CBL AM00 or 1761 CBL HM02 PC to port 1 AIC or port 2 1761 CBL APO0 or 1761 CBL PM02 1 E 1761 CBL AP00 Sai or 1761 CBL PM02 AIC 3 B 9 2 24V de user supply needed if not TB connected to a controller E 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL ACO0 24V de DB 9 RS 232 port user supplied mini DIN 8 RS 232 port RS 485 port gt e Recommended Tools To connect a DH485 network you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable and terminators to the AIC Advanced Interface Converter We recommend the following equipment or equivalent Table 4 2 Working with Cable for DH485 Network Description Part Number Manufacturer Shielded Twisted Pair Cable 3106 or 9842 Belden Stripping Tool 45 164 Ideal Industries 1 8 Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable Connecting the System DH485 Communica
23. read only This register identifies the Series of the controller Controller Revision Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 62 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the revision Boot FRN of the controller G 24 User Program Functionality Type System Status File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 63 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the level of functionality of the user program in the controller Compiler Revision Build Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 64 low byte byte 0 to 255 status read only This register identifies the Build Number of the compiler which created the program in the controller Compiler Revision Release Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 64 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only This register identifies the Release of the compiler which created the program in the controller G 25 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual G 26 Glossary Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Publication Number AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Brad
24. Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle Pulse IJP Jog Continuous NC 10 4 Start of PTO Start of PTO Using High Speed Outputs Standard Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a maintained type of input This means that it enables the PTO instruction Normal Operation NO and maintains its logic state until after the PTO instruction completes its operation With this type of logic status bit behavior is as follows The Done DN bit will becomes true 1 when the PTO completes and remains set until the rung logic is false The false rung logic re activates the PTO instruction To detect when the PTO instruction completes its output you monitor the done DN bit Table 10 3 Chart 2 Standard rung Logic Enable Stage Rung State Sub Elements Normal Operation INO LESE ee IN 11 12 Relative Timing Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle Jog Pulse IJP Jog Continuous NC Start of PTO Start of PTO 10 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File
25. 13 6 To reset the accumulator of a retentive timer use an RES instruction see RES Reset on page 13 11 How Counters Work Timer and Counter Instructions The figure below demonstrates how a counter works The count value must remain in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 If the count value goes above 32 767 the counter status overflow bit OV is set 1 If the count goes below 32 768 the counter status underflow bit UN is set 1 A reset RES instruction is used to reset 0 the counter 32 768 Count UP m Counter Accumulator Value Underflow Using the CTU and CTD Instructions Count Down Counter instructions use the following parameters Counter This is the address of the counter within the data file All counters are 3 word data elements Word 0 contains the Status Bits Word 1 contains the Preset and Word 2 contains the Accumulated Value 32 768 Overflow Bit ve 15 14 13 12 11110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Word 0 CU CD DN OV UN Not Used Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value CU Count Up Enable Bit CD Count Down Enable Bit DN Count Done Bit OV Count Overflow Bit UN Count Underflow Bit e Preset When the accumulator reaches this value the DN bit is set The preset data range is from 32768 to 32767 13 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 13 8 range is from 32768 to 32767
26. 14 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual MEQ Mask Compare for Equal Instruction Type input E Source Table 14 8 Execution Time for the Instructions DaaSze WhenRungils SE True False wd ws 19795 long word 3 37 us 2 58 us The MEQ instruction is used to compare whether one value source is equal to a second value compare through a mask The source and the compare are logically ANDed with the mask Then these results are compared to each other If the resulting values are equal the rung state is true If the resulting values are not equal the rung state is false For example Source Compare 1151 11 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Mask Mask 1 1 0 01 1 11 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Intermediate Result Intermediate Result 1 1 1010 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 11 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Comparison of the Intermediate Results not equal 14 6 The source mask and compare values must all be of the same data size either word or long word The data ranges for mask and compare are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 to FFFF FFFF Compare Instructions
27. 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 15 1 Math Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Level E Parameter E 2 S m n 9ES S e 16 I lEISIS S E 2182 ala S S ES 0 25255 Source ole Source B ele Destination 610 ele ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 15 2 Math Instructions Updates to Math Status Bits After a math instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 in the processor status file S2 Table 15 2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 sets if carry is generated otherwise resets 0 1 Overflow sets when the result of a math instruction does
28. Accumulator The accumulator contains the current count The accumulator data The accumulated value is incremented CTU or decremented CTD on each false to true rung transition The accumulated value is retained when the rung condition again becomes false and when power is cycled on the controller The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter Note The counter continues to count when the accumulator is greater than the CTU preset and when the accumulator is less than the CTD preset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 13 11 CTD and CTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 3 Address Address iles Function Files Data Files a Mode Level E Parameter 2 SL a 10 5 zt 51219 o 5 Ao lo e ola 121812 o e 6 E 5c _ lola 2 1 S 2 E lb m la 5 2108 S S Counter gt Preset Accumulator 1 Valid for Counter Files only Timer and Counter Instructions Using Counter File Status Bits Like the accumulated value the counter status bits are also retentive until reset Table 13 12 CTU Instruction Counter Status Bits
29. Bradley PROTECTED ESC Q a dm ENTER e Allen Bradley PROTECTED a Cds ar C int integer element number 0to 47 integer data 32 768 to 32 767 undefined bit bit data element OFF 0 number ON 1 0to 47 undefined If the element is defined and is not protected the element number flashes indicating that it can be modified If the element is protected the PROTECTED indicator light illuminates and the element number does not flash indicating that the element cannot be modified If the element is undefined the data field displays three dashes The element number does not flash because the element cannot be modified Allen Bradley PROTECTED DE ESC q C INT ENTER 7 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Entering Integer Monitoring Mode Integer monitoring mode allows you to view and modify 16 bit integer data locations in the controller To initiate integer monitoring mode press the INT key If the integer monitoring mode was previously invoked the DAT displays the last integer element monito
30. Instruction Type output Table 12 6 Execution Time for the OTL and OTU Instructions Instruction When Rung Is True False OTL 1 06 us 0 00 us OTU 1 02 us 0 00 us The OTL and OTU instructions are retentive output instructions OTL turns on a bit while OTU turns off a bit These instructions are usually used in pairs with both instructions addressing the same bit ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung 12 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Since these are latching outputs once set or reset they remain set or reset regardless of the rung condition ATTENTION In the event of a power loss any OTL controlled bit including field devices energizes with the return of power if the OTL bit was set when power was lost ATTENTION Under fatal error conditions physical outputs are turned off Once the error conditions are cleared the controller resumes operation using the data table value Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 12 7 OTL and OTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2
31. The LE Load on Error bit shows the status of the load on error selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program on page G 6 for more information The LA Load Always bit shows the status of the load always selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module Always on page G 6 for more information The MB Mode Behavior bit shows the status of the mode behavior selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Power Up Mode Behavior on page G 7 for more information Using the High Speed Counter Using the High Speed Counter The MicroLogix 1500 has two 20 kHz high speed counters Each counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from other inputs on the base unit HSCO utilizes inputs 0 through 3 and HSC1 utilizes inputs 4 through 7 Each counter is completely independent and isolated from the other HSCO is used in this document to define how the HSC works in the MicroLogix 1500 system HSC1 is identical in functionality This chapter describes how to use th
32. Using the High Speed Counter HSC Mode 6 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B Table 9 10 HSC Mode 6 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSC0 11 0 01 HSC0 11 0 0 2 5 0 111 0 0 3 5 0 CE Comments Terminals 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 5 1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Bit Function Count A Count B Not Used Not Used Example 1 gt off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Example 2 off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Example3 off Hold accumulator value 0 Example 4 on Hold accumulator value 1 Example 5 on Hold accumulator value 1 Example 6 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 Count input A leads count input B 2 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care gt rising edge falling edge Note Inputs I1 0 0 0 through I1 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used 9 23 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual HSC Mode 7 Quadrature Counter phased inputs and B With External Reset and Hold Table 9 11 HSC Mode 7 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 111 0 0 3 5 0 CE Comments Terminals 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Bit Function Count A Count B Z reset Hold Exa
33. 10 6 Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a PTO Function File with two elements PTOO and PTO1 These elements provide access to PTO configuration data and also allow the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the Pulse Train Outputs Note If the controller mode is run the data within sub element fields may be changing 4 Function Files Hsc PTO bar rer L OUT Output LDN Done LDS Decelerating Status HRS Run Status LAS Accelerating Status L PP Ramp Profile Status LIS Idle Status H ED Error Detected Status L NS Normal Operation Status L JPS Jog Pulse Status LJCS Jog Continuous Status HJP Jog Pulse L JC Jog Continuous EH Enable Hard Stop LEN Enable Status follows rung state HEC Error Code L OF Output Frequency Hz Sec L OFS Operating Frequency Status 2 5 HJF Jog Frequency Hz Sec H TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated L OPP Output Pulses Produced L ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 1 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output Function File Sub Elements Summary The variables within each PTO sub element along with what type of behavior and access the control program has to those variables are listed individually below All examples illustrate PTO 0 Terms and behavior for PTO 1 are identical Table 10 4 Pulse Train Output Function File PTO 0
34. 24 20 Process Control Instruction Analog I O Scaling To configure an analog input for use in a PID instruction the analog data must be scaled to match the PID instruction parameters In the MicroLogix 1500 the process variable PV in the PID instruction is designed to work with a data range of 0 to 16 383 The 1769 Compact I O analog modules 1769 IF4 and 1769 OF2 have the ability to scale analog data on board the module itself Scaling data is required to match the range of the analog input to the input range of the PID instruction The ability to perform scaling in the I O modules reduces the amount of programming required in the system and makes PID setup much easier The example shows a 1769 IF4 module The IF4 has 4 inputs which are individually configurable In this example analog input 0 is configured for 0 to 10V and is scaled in engineering units Word 0 is not being used in a PID instruction Input 1 word 1 is configured for 4 to 20 mA operation with scaling configured for a PID instruction This configures the analog data for the PID instruction Field Device Input Signal Analog Register Scaled Data gt 20 0 mA 16 384 to 17 406 20 0 mA 16 383 4 0 mA 0 lt 4 0 mA 819 to 1 The analog configuration screen is accessed from within RSLogix 500 Expansion General Configuration Analog Input Configuration Simply double click on 1 Fiter oes Fiter configuration item in the
35. B 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Installing Follow the procedure below to ensure proper replacement battery installation Important Do not remove the permanent battery when installing replacement battery 1 Insert battery into replacement battery pocket with wires facing up 2 Insert replacement battery wire connector into connector port 3 Secure battery wires under wire latch as shown below Replacement Battery Pocket Replacement Battery 20000 Battery Connector Wires 4 00007 00000000 Permanent Battery DO NOT REMOVE Connector Port Wire Latch Wire Connector B 4 Disposing Replacement Parts ATTENTION Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection Explosion or violent rupture is possible Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short circuiting compacting or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal For disposal batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation regulations to a proper disposal site The U S Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of Lithium batteries for disposal by motor vehicle only in regulation 173 1015 of CFR 49 effective January 5 1983 For additional information contact U S Department of Transportation Research and Special Programs Administration 400 Seventh Street S W Washington D C 20590 A
36. Instruction When Rung Is True False TOD 14 64 us 0 00 us The TOD instruction is used to convert the integer source value to BCD and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 16 11 TOD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address a Mode Level E Parameter ELR z e LE SEE o zle 9 IS _ 1 515 leo Ja f fe 1 2 2 5 555 52 8 5 EIS 2 IS S 5 Source of mm ole Destination 6 2 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 See TOD Instruction Destination Operand on page 16 11 Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD HSC PTO PWM STI EIL BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files Conversion Instructions TOD Instruction Destination Operand The destination can be either a word address or math register The maximum values permissible once converted to BCD are 9999 if the destination is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value 32768 if the destination is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in 8 13 and the high order digit in S 14
37. MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Lithium Battery 1747 BA Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards Handling Use only for the intended operation e Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures e Do not ship on passenger aircraft ATTENTION Do not charge the batteries An explosion could result or the cells could overheat causing burns Do not open puncture crush or otherwise mutilate the batteries A possibility of an explosion exists and or toxic corrosive and flammable liquids would be exposed Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high temperatures Do not attempt to solder batteries An explosion could result Do not short positive and negative terminals together Excessive heat can build up and cause severe burns Storing Store lithium batteries in a cool dry environment typically 20 C to 25 68 F to 77 and 40 to 60 humidity Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container away from flammable materials B2 Transporting Replacement Parts One or Two Batteries Each battery contains 0 23 grams of lithium Therefore up to two batteries can be shipped together within the United States without restriction Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may differ Three or More Batteries Procedures for the transportation of three or mor
38. MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual SQO Sequencer Output 20 6 Instruction Type output Table 20 3 Execution Time for the SQO Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 20 20 us 6 80 us long word 23 40 us 6 80 us On a false to true rung transition the SQO instruction transfers masked source reference words or long words to the destination for the control of sequential machine operations When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed The done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred On the next false to true rung transition the instruction resets the position to step one If the position is equal to zero at start up when you switch the controller from the program mode to the run mode instruction operation depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan Tf true the instruction transfers the value in step zero e If false the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false to true and transfers the value in step one The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits The mask can be
39. MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual TON Timer On Delay Instruction Type output Table 13 5 Execution Time for the TON Instructions Instruction When Rung ls True False TON 15 48 us 114 us Use the TON instruction to delay turning on an output The TON instruction begins to count timebase intervals when rung conditions become true As long as rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached When the accumulator equals the preset timing stops The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go false regardless of whether the timer has timed out TON timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following status bits Table 13 6 Timer Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit13 14 0 DN DN timer done accumulated value gt preset value rung state goes false bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and rung state goes false accumulated value lt preset value DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false 13 4 TOF Timer Off Delay Instruction Type output Table 13 7 Execution Time for the TOF Instructions Instruction TOF When Rung Is Timer True 1 85 us False 12 32 us and
40. MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access UIL User Interrupt Lost HSC 0 UIL bit 0107 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The MicroLogix 1500 can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions This bit is set by the MicroLogix 1500 It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition Low Preset Mask LPM 9 10 Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access LPM Low Preset Mask HSC 0 LPM t 0 to 7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The LPM Low Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a low preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Low Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt will not be executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Using the High Speed Counter Low Preset Interrupt LPI Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes
41. e or add an external resistor in parallel to the load to increase the on state load current The duration of the transient pulse is reduced when the on state load current is increased or the load impedance is decreased Wiring Your Controller 09 Transient Pulse Duration as a Function of Load Current Time Duration of Transient ms 0 0 1 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 On State Load Current mA MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 3 16 4 Connecting the System Connecting the System This chapter describes how to communicate to your control system The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you are employing This chapter also describes how the controller establishes communication with the appropriate network For information on See page DF1 protocol connections 4 3 DH485 network connections 4 8 Default Communication Configuration The MicroLogix 1500 has the following default communication configuration For more information about communicating see Understanding the Communication Protocols on page D 1 Table 4 1 DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Default Baud Rate 19 2K Parity none Source ID Node Address 1 Control Line no handshaking Error Detection CRC Embedded Responses auto dete
42. embedded I O configuration tab The input groups are arranged Simply select the filter time you require for each input group You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of five input groups e Oandl 2and3 4and5 6and7 8 and above The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting can be found in the tables under Specifications in Appendix A 5 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Latching Inputs 5 6 The MicroLogix 1500 controller provides the ability to individually configure inputs 0 to 7 to be pulse catching or latching inputs hereafter referred to as latching inputs A latching input is an input that captures a very fast pulse and holds it for a single controller scan The pulse width that can be captured is dependent upon the input filtering selected for that input To enable this feature using RSLogix 500 1 Open the Controller folder Open the I O Configuration folder Open slot 0 MicroLogix 1500 Select the embedded I O configuration tab Select the mask bits for the inputs that you want to operate as latching inputs Uv m Ds Select the state for the latching inputs The controller can detect both rising edge and off falling edge pulses depending upon the configuration selected in the programming software Enter 1 for rising edge or 0 for falling edge The following information is pr
43. 1 The total load controlled by thet 1764 24AWA and 1764 24BWA is limited to 1440VA break 2 For dc voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied dc voltage For example 28 VA 48V dc 0 58A For dc voltage applications less than 14V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A Table 6 Output Specifications Maximum Continuous Current Specification 1764 24AWA BWA 1764 28BXB Current per Common 8A 8A Current per Controller at 150V Maximum 24A 18A at 240V Maximum 20A 18A A 4 Table 7 1764 28BXB FET Output Specifications Specifications Specification General Operation High Speed Operation Outputs 2thru 7 Outputs 2 and 3 Only User Supply Voltage minimum 20 4V dc 20 4V dc maximum 26 4V dc 26 4V dc On State Voltage at maximum load 1V dc Not Applicable Drop current at maximum surge 2 5V dc Not Applicable current Current Rating per maximum load 1A at 55 C 131 F 100 mA Point 1 5A at 30 C 86 minimum load 1 0mA 10 mA maximum leakage 1 0mA 1 0mA Surge Current per peak current 4 0A Not Applicable maximum surge 10 msec Not Applicable duration maximum rate of once every second Not Applicable repetition at 30 86 F maximum rate of once every 2 Not Applicable repetition at 55 C seconds 131 F Current per maximum total 6A Not Applicable
44. 15 4 place the sum in the Destination Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value from another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination Math Instructions MUL Multiply DIV Divide Instruction Type output MUL Bep Table 15 4 Execution Time for the MUL and DIV Instructions succo Instruction Data Size When Rung Is Dest T True False MUL word 5 88 us 0 00 us L long word 28 55 us 0 00 us Source A i DIV word 9 95 us 0 00 us Source B i long word 32 92 us 0 00 us Dest 7 4 Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value by another value Source A x Source B and place the result in the Destination Use the DIV instruction to divide one value by another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination If the Sources are single words and the Destination is directly addressed to 8 13 math register then the quotient is stored in S 14 and the remainder is stored in S 13 15 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual NEG Negate NEG Negate Source Dest c c nd CLR Clear CLR Clear Dest 15 6 Instruction output Table 15 5 Execution Time for the NEG Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 2 35 us 0 00 us long word 10 18 us 0 00 us Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the Source and place the result i
45. 1769 OW8 2 125 100 1769 IQ6XOW4 1 105 50 1769 IF4 100 100 1769 OF2 100 150 mTt lModudes 8 maximum 5 Subtotal 2 1 Refer to your Compact I O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table E4 System Loading and Heat Dissipation Validating the System The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations The systems are valid because Calculated Current Values lt Maximum Allowable Current Values Calculated System Loading Maximum Allowable System Loading Table 25 11 Validating Systems using 1764 24AWA and 1764 28BXB Base Units Calculated Values Maximum Allowable Values Current 2250 mA at 5V dc Current Subtotal 1 Subtotal 2 from page E 2 400 mA at 24V dc System Loading System Loading 16 Watts Table 25 12 Validating Systems using 1764 24BWA Base Unit Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current for Devices Connected to the 24V Sum of all current sensors and or 1761 NET AIC connected to the 24V dc dc User Supply user supply AIC selector switch in the down position 400 mA at 24V de mA at 24V de Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 Current Values Subtotal 1 Subtotal 2 from page E 2 2250 mA at 5V de 400 mA at 24V de mA at 5 V dc mA at 24V dc System Loading System Loading mA x 24V mA x 5V mA x 24V z mW
46. 2m 6 5 ft PC COM port port 2 4 20 Using Inputs and Outputs Using Inputs and Outputs This section discusses the various aspects of Input and Output features of the MicroLogix 1500 controller The controller comes with a certain amount of embedded I O which is physically located on the Base Unit The controller also allows for adding Expansion I O This section discusses the following I O functions Embedded I O on page 5 2 Expansion I O on page 5 2 I O Configuration on page 5 3 I O Forcing on page 5 4 Input Filtering on page 5 5 Latching Inputs on page 5 6 5 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Embedded I O The MicroLogix 1500 provides discrete I O that is built into the controller These I O points are referred to as Embedded 1 0 Configuration Controller Inputs Outputs Quantity Type Quantity Type 1764 24BWA 12 24V dc 12 relay 1764 24AWA 12 120V ac 12 relay 1764 28BXB 16 24V dc 12 6 relay 6 FET DC embedded I O can be configured for a number of special functions that can be used in your application These are selectable input filters high speed counting event interrupts latching inputs and high speed outputs FET outputs only Expansion I O If the application requires more I O than the controller provides the user can attach up to eight additional I O modules Compact I O Bulletin 1769 is used to provide
47. 32 768 to 32 767 control read write If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MINS Setpoint Minimum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its minimum value Note MinS scaling allows you to work in engineering units The deadband error and SPV will also be displayed in engineering units The process variable PV must be within the range of 0 to 16383 Use of MinS MaxS does not minimize PID PV resolution Scaled errors greater than 32767 or less than 32768 cannot be represented If the scaled error is greater than 32767 it is represented as 32767 If the scaled error is less than 32768 it is represented as 32768 Old Setpoint Value OSP 24 6 Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type UserProgram Format Access OSP Old Setpoint Value PD10 0 0SP word INT 32 768 to 32 767 status read only The OSP Old Setpoint Value is substituted for the current setpoint if the current setpoint goes out of range of the setpoint scaling limiting parameters Output Parameters Process Control Instruction The table below shows the output parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program For M
48. 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 2 9 0 Reserved for Modem Control Line States 1 RTS 21015 CTS 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13 Message Packets Retried 14 NAK Packets Received 15 Polls Received 16 Bad Message Packets Received 17 No Buffer Space 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19 Reserved 20 Reserved for DCD Recover Field 21 Reserved for Lost Modem Field 22 Reserved Table 6 8 Active Node Table Block Word 23 Bit Description DLL Active Node Table Category Identifier Code always 3 24 Length always 13 25 Format Code always 0 26 Number of Nodes always 32 for DH485 always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex and Half Duplex Slave 27 Active Node Table Nodes 0 to 15 CS0 27 1 is node 1 CS0 27 2 is node 2 etc This is a bit mapped register that displays the status of each node on the network If a bit is set 1 the corresponding node is active on the network If a bit is clear 0 the corresponding node is inactive 28 Active Node Table Nodes 15 to 31 CS0 28 1 is node 15 CS0 28 2 is node 16 etc This is a bit mapped register that displays the status of each node on the network If a bit is set 1 the corresponding node is active on the network If a bit is clear 0 the corresponding node is inactive 29 to 42 Reserved for Active Node Table Nodes 32 255 6 16 Contro
49. Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 12 10 ONS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level 2 B Parameter S S e m zi 4 910 le l 25 15 515 O lm t SS EIS EE EES Storage Bit 12 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Falling inl PETITE ET OSF One Shot Falling Storage Bit Output Bit 7 12 8 Instruction Type output Table 12 11 Execution Time for the OSR and OSF Instructions Instruction When Rung ls True False OSR 2 71 Us 2 43 ys OSF 1 88 us 3 01 us Use the OSR and OSF instructions to trigger an event to occur one time These instructions trigger an event based on a change of rung state as follows e Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the false to true rising edge change of state of the rung Use the OSF instruction when an event must start based on the true to false falling edge change of state of the rung These instructions use two parameters Storage Bit and Output Bit Storage Bi
50. Feature Address Data Format Type com FT Functionality Type MMI 0 FT word INT status read only MP Module Present MMI 0 MP binary bit status read only WP Write Protect MMI 0 WP binary bit contro read only FO Fault Override MMI 0 FO binary bit contro read only LPC Program Compare MMI 0 LPC binary bit contro read only LE Load On Error MMI 0 LE binary bit contro read only LA Load Always MMI 0 LA binary bit contro read only MB Mode Behavior MMI 0 MB binary bit contro read only Functionality Type This bit identifies the type of memory module installed e 121764 MMI Memory Module e 2 1764 RTC Real Time Clock e 3 1764 MMIRTC Memory Module and Real Time Clock 8 6 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Module Present MP Write Protect WP Fault Override The MP Module Present bit can be used throughout the user program to determine when a memory module is present on the processor This bit is updated once per scan provided the memory module is first recognized by the processor To be recognized by the processor the memory module must be installed on the processor prior to power up or when it is in a non executing mode If a memory module is installed when the processor is in an executing mode it is not recognized If the memory module is removed during an executing mode this bit will be cleared 0 at the end of the next ladder scan When the WP Write Protect bit is
51. H ES Enable Status follows rung state LEC Error Code L OF Output Frequency Hz Sec OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz Sec H DC Duty Cycle e 9 456 45 6 LDCS Duty Cycle Status e g 456 45 6 L ORC Output Rate Of Change Hz ms PwM 1 c oOooooooooooooooo Within the PWM function file are two PWM elements Each element can be set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 or output 3 O0 0 3 10 21 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary The variables within each PWM element along with what type of behavior and access the control program has to those variables are listed individually below Table 10 7 Pulse Width Modulated Function File PWM 0 Element Description Address Data Range Type User For More Format Program Information Access OUT PWM Output PWM 0 OUT word INT 20r3 status read only 10 22 RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 23 IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 23 ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 23 NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 24 EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM 0 EH bit 0 or 1 control read write 10 24 ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0 ES bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 24 OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 OF word INT Oto 20 000 control r
52. Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC 0 UIX bi t 0107 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode on page 9 18 User The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set 1 whenever the HSC sub system begins processing the HSC subroutine due to any of the following conditions Low preset reached High preset reached Overflow condition count up through the overflow value e Underflow condition count down through the underflow value The HSC sub system will clear 0 the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine The HSC UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an HSC interrupt is executing Interrupt Pending UIP Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access UIP User Interrupt Pending KHSC O UIP 0107 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot be executed immediately This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 system and will be set and cleared automatically 9 9
53. The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OXFFFF or 0 to OXFFFFFFFF Source This is the value that is compared to file Note If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words EUER Word 0 I 2 rp not used Word 1 Length contains the number of steps the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false 3 ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set 4 FD Found bit is set when the status of all non masked bits in the source address match those of the word in the sequencer reference file This bit is assessed each time the SQC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and o
54. from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 30 m 1 ft from lines of 100k VA or more Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference If you route the cable through conduit follow these additional recommendations Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference You can use aluminum conduit in non critical areas Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid to hold both sections at the same potential Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit The conduit should contain only serial communication cables Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications For more information on planning cable routes see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication Number 1770 4 1 D 14 Understanding the Communication Protocols Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on
55. mW mW z mW 22 Watts W 1 No current is consumed from the controller when the AIC is powered by an external source E 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Calculating Heat Dissipation Use this procedure when you need to determine the heat dissipation for installation in an enclosure Use the following table For System Loading take the value from the table on page 5 Heat Dissipation Catalog Number Equation or Constant Calculation Sub Total 1764 24AWA 18W 0 3 x System Loading 18W 0 3x_ 1764 24BWA 20W 0 3 x System Loading 20W 0 3x___ W 1764 28BXB 20W 0 3 x System Loading 20N 03x W 1764 LSP 1 5W 1764 DAT 1 75W 1764 MM1 RTC MM1 RTC 0 1769 IA16 3 30W x number of modules 3 30W x 1769 IM12 3 65W x number of modules 3 65W x 1769 1016 3 55W x number of modules 3 55W x 1769 8 2 12W x number of modules 2 12W x 1769 OB16 2 11W x number of modules 2 11W x 1769 OV16 2 06W x number of modules 2 06W x 1769 OW8 2 83W x number of modules 2 83W x 1769 lQ6XOW4 2 75W x number of modules 2 75W x 1769 IF4 1769 OF2 E 6 Add Sub Totals to determine Heat Dissipation Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time F Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1500 programming instructions The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution tim
56. run mode This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the ladder program monitors input devices energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces rung Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true If all paths are false the outputs are made false save To upload transfer a program stored in memory from a controller to a personal computer OR to save a program to a computer hard disk scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and each instruction s status during the scan sinking A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground low or negative side of power supply sourcing A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the source high or positive side of power supply status The condition of a circuit or system represented as logic 0 OFF or 1 ON terminal A point on an I O module that external I O devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to Glossary throughput The time between when
57. 9 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Underflow Mask UFM Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access UFM Underflow Mask HSC 0 UFM bit 0107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The UFM Underflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a underflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Underflow Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt will not be executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Underflow Interrupt UFI Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access UFI Underflow Interrupt HSC 0 UFI bit 0107 status read write 1 9 14 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The UFI Underflow Interrupt status bit will be set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the underflow value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the underflow condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the underflow this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program a
58. Common Turn On Time maximum 0 1 msec 6 usec Turn Off Time maximum 1 0 msec 18 usec Repeatability maximum n a 2 usec Drift maximum n a 1 psec per 5 C 1 usec per 9 F 1 Outputs 2 and 3 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs 4 through 7 They may be used like the other FET transistor outputs but in addition within a limited current range they may be operated at a higher speed Outputs 2 and 3 also provide a pulse train output PTO or pulse width modulation output PWM function A 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Table 8 Working Voltage 1764 24AWA Specification Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation 1764 24AWA Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 265V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 151V ac for 1 second or 2145V dc for 1 second 132V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 265V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1
59. Correct the user program or allocate SHIFT OR LIFO is greater than 2048 or more data file space using the FIFO PARAMETER A FFU FFL LFU LFL instruction length memory map then reload and Run parameter is greater than 128 word file or greater than 64 double word file 003F COP FLL A COP or FLL instruction length parameter Correct the program to ensure that OUTSIDE OF references outside of the entire data space length and parameter do not DATA FILE SPACE point outside of the data file space Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0050 CONTROLLER A particular controller type was selected in Correct the controller base type or match the actual controller type the attached controller type 0051 BASE TYPE A particular base type AWA BWA BXB Correct the base type or MISMATCH was Selected in the user program configuration but did no match the actual base Reconfigure the program to match the attached base C 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Error Code Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0052 MINIMUM SERIES The base minimum series selected in the Correct the base type or than the series on the actual base the attached base 0070 EXPANSION I O The required expansion I O terminator was Check the expansion I O TERMINATOR removed terminator on the last I O module REMOVED Cycle power x7 1
60. Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit 12 C5 0 OV OV overflow indicator the accumulated value wraps from a RES instruction with the same address as 32 767 to 32 768 and continues the CTU instruction is enabled to count up bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done indicator accumulated value gt preset value accumulated value preset value or a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit15 C5 0 CU CU count up enable rung state is true rung state is false a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled Table 13 13 CTD Instruction Counter Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit 11 C5 0 UN underflow indicator the accumulated value wraps from a RES instruction with the same address as 32 768 to 32 767 and continues the CTD instruction is enabled to count down bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done indicator accumulated value gt preset value accumulated value preset value or a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit 14 C5 0 CD count down enable rung state is true rung state is false RES instruction with the same address as the CTD instruction is ena
61. ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Transmitting ST 0 N7 50 Message Enabled EN 0 2 octal Local Error Error Code Hex 0 In the display above the MicroLogix 1500 processor reads 10 elements from Local Node 2 s N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in this controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the instruction timed out The device at node 2 understands the SLC 500 processor family SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 MicroLogix 1000 and MicroLogix 1500 protocol Function Key Communications Instruction Description This Communication Specifies the type of message Valid types are 500CPU Read 500CPU Write 485CIF Read Controller Command 485CIF Write PLC5 Read PLC5 Write Data Table For a Read Destination this is the address in the initiating processor which is to receive data Address Valid file types are T C R and L For a Write Source this is the address in the initiating processor which is to send data Valid file types are B T C R N I O and L Size in Defines the length of the message in elements One word elements are limited to a maximum length elements of 1 103 Two word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1 51 Three word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1 34 Chann
62. EXPANSION I O The controller cannot communicate with an Check connections HARDWARE expansion I O module Check for a noise problem and be ERROR sure proper grounding practices are used Replace the module Cycle power xx79 EXPANSION I O An expansion I O module generated an Refer to the I O Module Status MODULE ERROR error IOS file Consult 1769 publications for specific module to determine possible causes of a module error 0080 EXPANSION I O The required expansion I O terminator was Check expansion I O terminator TERMINATOR removed on last I O module REMOVED Cycle power 81 EXPANSION I O The controller cannot communicate with an Check connections HARDWARE expansion I O module Check for a noise problem and be ERROR sure proper grounding practices are used Replace the module Cycle power 0083 MAX I O CABLES The maximum number of expansion I O e Reconfigure the expansion I O EXCEEDED cables allowed was exceeded system so that it has an allowable number of cables Cycle power 0084 MAX I O POWER The maximum number of expansion I O e Reconfigure the expansion I O SUPPLIES EXCEEDED power supplies allowed was exceeded System so that it has the correct number of power supplies C 12 Troubleshooting Your System Error Code Advisory Description Recommended Action Hex Message 0085 MAX I O The maximum number of expansion I O e Reconfi
63. First determine the execution time for the longest executing rung in your control program maximum rung time See Appendix G for more information 2 Multiply the maximum rung time by the Communications Multiplier correspond ing to your configuration in the Scantime Worksheet on page F 8 Evaluate you results as follows e Ifthe time calculated in step 2 is less than 100us the interrupt latency is 360 us e Ifthe time calculated in step 2 is greater than 100us the user interrupt latency is the sum of the time calculated in step 2 plus 260 us 23 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual User Fault Routine The user fault routine gives you the option of preventing a processor shutdown when a specific user fault occurs The fault routine is executed when any recoverable or non recoverable user fault occurs The fault routine is not executed for non user faults Faults are classified as recoverable non recoverable and non user faults A complete list of faults for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers appear in Troubleshooting Your System on page C 1 The basic types of faults are described below Recoverable Non Recoverable Non User Fault Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and are recovered from by executing the user fault routine The user fault routine recovers by clearing the Major Error Halted bit 1 13 Note You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device to identify the fault conditi
64. If the destination is the math register it must be directly addressed as S 13 S 13 is the only status file element that can be used Updates to Math Status Bits Table 16 12 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 always resets S 0 1 Overflow sets if BCD result is larger than 9999 On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the source word is negative otherwise resets Changes to the Math Register Contains the 5 digit BCD result of the conversion This result is valid at overflow Note To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal the destination must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error 16 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example The integer value 9760 stored at N7 3 is converted to BCD and the BCD equivalent is stored in N7 0 The maximum BCD value is 9999 MPS displays the destination value in BCD format MSB MSB Y Y N7 3 Decimal 0010 0110 0010 0000 qo NF ON a o o N7 0 4 digit BCD 1001 0111 0110 0000 16 12 Logical Instructions 1 T Logical Instructions The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on individual words Instruction Used To Page AND Bit Wise AND Perform an AND operation 17 3 OR Logical OR Perform an inclusive OR ope
65. Instruction Used To Page EQU Equal Test whether two values are equal 14 3 NEQ Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a 14 8 second value z LES Less Than Test whether one value is less than a 14 4 second value lt LEQ Less Than or Equal To Test whether one value is less than or 14 5 equal to a second value lt GRT Greater Than Test whether one value is greater than a 14 4 second value gt GEQ Greater Than or Equal To Test whether one value is greater than or 14 5 equal to a second value 2 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal Test portions of two values to see whether 14 6 they are equal LIM Limit Test Test whether one value is within the range 14 8 of two other values 14 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using the Compare Instructions Most of the compare instructions use two parameters Source A and Source B MEQ and LIM have an additional parameter and are described later in this chapter Both sources cannot be immediate values The valid data ranges for these instructions are e 32768 to 32767 word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 1 Compare Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2
66. JC bit set This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the error condition is removed 6 No Yes No Jog The jog frequency JF value is less than 0 or greater than Frequency 20 000 This error faults the controller It can be cleared by Error logic within the User Fault Routine 7 Yes Yes No Length Error The total output pulses to be generated TOP is less than zero This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 10 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PWM Pulse Width Modulation Instruction Instruction Type output Table 10 6 Execution Time for the PWM Instruction When Rung Is True False 110 50 us 21 63 us PWM Function 10 20 The PWM function allows a field device to be controlled by a PWM wave form The PWM profile has two primary components Frequency to be generated Duty Cycle interval The PWM instruction along with the HSC and PTO functions are different than all other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these instructions The interface to the PWM sub system is accomplished by scanning a PWM instruction in the main program file file 42 or by scanning a PWM instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operatin
67. LOP Low Preset 2147483648 OVF Overflow 2147483647 UNF Underflow 2147483648 OMB Output Mask Bits HPO High Preset Output 0 LPO Low Preset Output 0 HSC1 Using the High Speed Counter The HSC function along with the PTO and PWM instructions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions The HSC built into the MicroLogix 1500 is extremely versatile the user can select or configure each HSC for any one of eight 8 modes of operation Operating Modes are discussed later in this chapter see section HSC Mode on page 9 18 Some of the enhanced capabilities of the MicroLogix 1500 High Speed Counters are e 20 kHz operation High speed direct control of outputs e 32 bit signed integer data count range of 2 147 483 647 Programmable High and Low presets and Overflow and Underflow setpoints e Automatic Interrupt processing based on accumulated count e On line run time editable parameters from the user control program The High Speed Counter function operates as described in the following diagram Overflow _ 2 147 483 647 maximum High Preset Low Preset A Underlow 2 147 483 647 minimum 9 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controlle
68. Now set the rate Ta equal to a value 1 8 that of the reset term For our example the value 4 will be used to provide a rate term of 0 04 minutes per repeat Place the process in the AUTO mode If you have an ideal process the PID tuning will be complete To make adjustments from this point place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode enter the adjustment then place the PID instruction back in the AUTO mode This technique of going to MANUAL then back to AUTO ensures that most of the gain error is removed at the time each adjustment is made This allows you to see the effects of each adjustment immediately Toggling the PID rung allows the PID instruction to restart itself eliminating all of the integral buildup You may want to toggle the PID rung false while tuning to eliminate the effects of previous tuning adjustments Process Control Instruction Verifying the Scaling of Your Continuous System To ensure that your process is linear and that your equipment is properly connected and scaled do the following 1 Place the PID instruction in manual and enter the following parameters type 0 for MinS type 100 for MaxS type 0 for Enter the REM Run mode and verify that PV 0 Type 20 in CO Record the PV Record the PV Type 60 in 2 3 4 5 Type 40 in 6 7 8 Record the PV 9 Type 80 in 10 Record the PV 11 The values you recorded should be offs
69. PWM Enable Hardstop EH The PWM NS Normal Operation bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM is in its normal state A normal state is defined as ACCEL RUN or DECEL with no PWM errors Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in its normal state Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM 0 EH bit 0 or 1 control read write PWM Enable Status ES The PWM EH Enable Hard Stop bit stops the PWM sub system immediately A PWM hard stop generates a PWM sub system error Set 1 Instructs the PWM sub system to stop its output modulation immediately output off 0 e Cleared 0 Normal operation Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0 ES bit 0 or 1 status read only 10 24 The PWM ES Enable Status is controlled by the PWM sub system When the rung preceding the PWM instruction is solved true the PWM instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set When the rung preceding the PWM instruction transitions to a false state the enable status bit is reset 0 immediately Set 1 PWM is enabled e Clear
70. Size in Defines the length of the message in elements One word elements are limited to a maximum length Elements of 1 103 Two word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1 51 Three word elements limited to a maximum length of 1 34 Channel Identifies the physical channel used for the message communication Always channel 0 Target Message Defines the length of the message timer in seconds A timeout of 0 seconds means that there is no Device Timeout timer and the message will wait forever for a reply Valid range is 0 255 seconds Data Table This is the word offset value in the common interface file byte offset for non SLC device in the Offset target processor which is to send the data Local Node Specifies the node number of the processor that is receiving the message Valid range is 0 31 for Address DH 485 protocol or 0 254 for DF 1 Half and Full Duplex protocols Local Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote 25 31 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example 3 Local Read from a PLC 5 2 MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 General This Controller Control Bits Communication Command PLCSRead Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address IN7 0 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel 0 Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address IN7 50 Messa
71. Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS t 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JCS Jog Continuous Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is generating continuous Jog Pulses The JCS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is generating continuous Jog Pulses Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not generating continuous Jog Pulses PTO Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 2 to 7 status read only PTO ER Error Codes detected by the PTO sub system are displayed in this register The error codes are shown in the table below Table 10 5 Pulse Train Output Error Codes Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Name Description Code Fault Fault Errors 2 Yes No No Overlap Error An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example and PTO1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output Error An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the o
72. The Controller 0 0 always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if non BCD value is contained at the source or the value to be converted is greater than 32 767 otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit always resets Note Always provide ladder logic filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction The slightest difference in point to point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to the conversion of a non BCD digit S 1 EQU FRD L 1 E 4 EQUAL FROM BCD __ 1 Source A N7 1 Source I 0 0 0 0 Source B 1 0 0 Dest N7 2 0 0 MOV MOVE Source I 0 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 16 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example The two rungs shown cause the controller to verify that the value I 0 remains the same for two consecutive scans before it will execute the FRD This prevents the FRD from converting a non BCD value during an input value change Note convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD the source must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error The BCD value 32 760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7 0 The maximum source value is 32767 BCD MPS displays 5 13 and S 14 in BCD 5 14 8 13 0000 0000 0000 0011
73. Worst Case 1100 us Typical Case 400 us Communications Overhead Sub Total Add this number if your system includes a 1764 RTC or 1764 MM1RTC 80 us Add this number if your system includes a 1764 DAT 530 us Housekeeping Overhead 300 us Sum of All Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table X Total Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Communications Multiplier Table Multiplier at Various Baud Rates Protocol 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K Inactive DF1 Full Duplex 1 45 1 19 1 09 1 06 DF1 Half Duplex 1 16 1 07 1 04 1 00 DH485 N A 1 07 1 04 N A Shut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring F 8 System Status File G System Status File The status file lets you monitor how your controller works and lets you direct how you want it to work This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information Important Do not write to reserved words in the status file If you intend writing to status file data it is imperative that you first understand the function fully Status File Overview The status file S contains the following words Address Function Page 5 0 Arithmetic Flags G 3 5 1 Controller Mode G 4 5 2 Controller A
74. a a 5 5 15 S ele le IS 11161 2 25 elg amp 3 j S _ S J 5 m 5 S 4 e jo 5 E a E i s S ui Timer Timebase Preset o Accumulator 1 Valid for Timer Files only Note Use an RES instruction to reset a timer s accumulator and status bits 13 2 Timer Accuracy Timer and Counter Instructions Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete Table 13 4 Timer Accuracy Time Base 0 001 seconds Accuracy 0 001 to 0 00 0 01 seconds 0 01 to 0 00 1 00 seconds 1 00 to 0 00 If your program scan can exceed 2 5 seconds repeat the timer instruction on a different rung identical logic and 50 away from this rung run so that the rung is scanned within these limits Using the enable bit EN of a timer is an easy way to repeat its complex conditional logic at another rung in your ladder program Note Timing could be inaccurate if Jump JMP Label LBL Jump to Subroutine JSR or Subroutine SBR instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing If the skip duration is within 2 5 seconds no time will be lost if the skip duration exceeds 2 5 seconds an undetectable timing error occurs When using subroutines a timer must be scanned at least every 2 5 seconds to prevent a timing error 13 3
75. amp E z B lolo 5S Sh 2 siz jol 5 9 0 6 5 la f f S S 42015 JE l EE ST Source ele elele Destination es ejejejo Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing BSL Bit Shift Left Instruction Type output File Instructions Table 19 6 Execution Time for the BSL Instruction Data Size word long word When Rung Is True False 29 1 08 us word 0 00 us NA NA The BSL instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted left through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSR instruction Source Bit 1 22 12 Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16 to bit 73 HH 3130 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 120119 18 17116 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 133 32 1 58 Bit Array B3 1 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 155 154 153 52151 50 49 48 RESERVED 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 Unload Bit R6 14 10 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions 19 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 19 6 This instruction uses the foll
76. control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions glossary 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual glossary 2 counter 1 An electro mechanical relay type device that counts the occurrence of some event May be pulses developed from operations such as switch closures interruptions of light beams or other discrete events 2 In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up or down whenever the counted event occurs CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of the processor memory that contains I O values and files where data is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your controller download Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another device DTE Data Terminal Equipment Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data or both EMI Electromagnetic interference encoder 1 A rotary device that transmits position information 2 A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution executing mode Any run or test mode false The status of an instruction
77. glossary 2 mounting 2 15 removing your base unit 2 16 disconnecting main power 2 5 DIV 15 5 download glossary 2 DTE Data Terminal Equipment glossary 2 E Electronics Industries Association EIA D 1 electrostatic discharge preventing 2 18 EMC Directive 2 2 emergency stop switches 2 10 EMI glossary 2 ENC 16 4 encoder glossary 2 END 21 5 end cap hardware overview 1 4 ENTER key 7 4 EQU 3 error recovery model C 4 error table C 3 errors controller C 3 hardware C 3 identifying C 5 ESC key 7 4 Index European Union Directive compliance 2 2 executing mode glossary 2 expansion I O hardware overview 1 4 F F1 Functions 7 13 F1 key 7 4 F2 Functions 7 13 F2 key 7 4 false glossary 2 Fault Messages C 6 fault recovery procedure C 5 fault routine C 5 fault routines 23 6 faults automatically clearing C 5 identifying C 5 manually clearing using the fault routine C 5 FET output specifications 1764 28BXB A 5 FFL 19 9 FFU 19 12 FIFO First In First Out glossary 2 file glossary 2 File Instructions 19 1 FLL 19 3 FRD 16 6 FRD Source Operand 16 7 full duplex glossary 2 G general specifications A 2 GEQ 5 grounding the controller 3 7 GRT 4 Index 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Index 4 H half duplex glossary 2 hard disk glossary 3 hardware features 1 1 heat protection 2 8 high byte glossary 3 HSL 9 2
78. it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction take appropriate action and then clear bit S 5 2 using an instruction with S 5 2 G 12 Major Error While Executing User Fault Routine System Status File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 3 binary Oor 1 status read write When set 1 the major error code S 6 represents the major error that occurred while processing the User Fault Routine due to another major error Memory Module Boot Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 8 binary Oor 1 status read write When this bit is set 1 by the controller it indicates that a memory module program has been transferred due to S 1 10 Load Memory Module on Error or Default Program or S 1 11 Load Memory Module Always being set in an attached memory module user program This bit is not cleared 0 by the controller Your program can examine the state of this bit on the first scan using bit S 1 15 on entry into an Executing mode to determine if the memory module user program has been transferred after a power up occurred This inform
79. non condensing Vibration Operating 0 015 in peak to peak displacement 10 57 Hz 50 57 500 Hz Relay Operation 2g Shock without Data Operating 30g panel mounted 15g DIN Rail mounted Access Tool installed Relay operation 7 5g pane mounted 5g DIN Rail mounted Non Operating 40g panel mounted 30g DIN Rail mounted Shock with Data Access Tool installed Operating 20g panel moun Relay operation 7 5g pane ted 15g DIN Rail mounted mounted 5g DIN Rail mounted Non Operating 30g panel mounted 20g DIN Rail mounted 1 Recommended storage temperature for maximum ba storage conditions of life is significantly shor tery life 5 years typical with normal operating he 1764 RTC and 1764 MMI1RTC is 40 C to 40 C 40 F to 104 F Battery er at elevated temperatures 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual A 2 Table 1 General Specifications Description 1764 24BWA 1764 24AWA 1764 28BXB Agency Certification UL 508 C UL under CSA C22 2 no 142 Class I Div 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 no 213 CE compliant for all applicable directives Electrical EMC The module has passed testing at the following levels IEC1000 4 3 10 V m IEC1000 4 2 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect 1 0 2 kV CM 1 kV DM Power Supply 1764 24AWA 1764 24BWA 4 kV CM 2 kV DM Power Supply 1764 28BXB 0 5 kV CM 0 5 kV
80. standard that specifies the electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication It provides you with a variety of system configuration possibilities RS 232 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol One of the biggest benefits of the RS 232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system using the appropriate DF1 protocol only not DH485 protocol D 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual DF1 Full Duplex Protocol DF1 Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory The MicroLogix 1500 controllers support the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex DF is an open protocol Refer to DF Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 for more information DF1 Full Duplex Operation DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions DF1 protocol controls
81. surge suppressors in chapter 1 Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 000A OS MISSING OR The operating system required for the user Download a new OS using CORRUPT program is corrupt or missing ControlFlash Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for more information about available operating systems for the MicroLogix 1500 controller C 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Error Code Advisory Description Recommended Action Message Hex 000B BASEHARDWARE The base hardware faulted or is Upgrade the OS using FAULT incompatible with the OS ControlFlash to be compatible with the base Obtain a new base Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for more information about available operating systems for the MicroLogix 1500 controller 0012 LADDER The ladder program has a memory integrity Reload the program or re compile PROGRAM problem and reload the program If the ERROR error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program Referto proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1 0015 The user program I O configuration is Re compile and reload the program CONFIGURATION invalid and enter the Run mode If the error FILE ERROR persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program 0016 STARTUP The user
82. that alters the program counter sometimes called a branch In ladder programs a JUMP JMP instruction causes execution to jump to a labeled rung ladder logic A program written in a format resembling a ladder like diagram The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices least significant bit LSB The digit or bit in a binary word code that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 7 of a word logic A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that can be either true or false General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions glossary 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual glossary 4 Master Control Relay MCR A mandatory hardwired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch Whenever the MCR is de energized its contacts open to de energize all application I O devices mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run
83. 0 0 1 0101010710 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 4 0 X 1 9 meopo polesgyso gog s jus ug o X 1 0 101 e o 4 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 04 1 0101010101010 lololo X 1 gt 1 01010010 X 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 0 X 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 01010101010101010101010710 X 1 1 1 01011 X 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 not used 16 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Source Dest EE Instruction Type output Table 16 4 Execution Time for the CLR Instruction When Rung Is True False 6 90 us 0 00 us The ENC instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit looking for the first bit set The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer The ENC instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Table 16 5 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Source Bits Destination Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 151004 03 02 01 00 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X
84. 0010 0111 0110 0000 15 0 15 0 5 digit BCD 0 0 0 3 2 7 6 0 1 2 1 6 l N7 0 Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000 You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your ladder program If you do not convert the values the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost Note Ifthe math register S 13 and S 14 is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed 4 digits be sure to clear word S 14 before executing the FRD instruction If S 14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program an incorrect decimal value will be placed in the destination word 16 8 Conversion Instructions Clearing S 14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below 0001 0010 0011 0100 9 13 and 5 14 are displayed in BCD format 0000 0100 1101 0010 When the input condition I 0 1 is set 1 a BCD value transferred from a 4 digit thumbwheel switch for example is moved from word N7 2 into the math register Status word S 14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed 16 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD TOD To BCD Source Dest c o 2 16 10 Instruction Type output Table 16 10 Execution Time for the TOD Instructions
85. 0107 contro read write 9 8 LPM Low Preset Mask HSC 0 LPM Ibit 0107 contro read write 9 10 HPM High Preset Mask HSC 0 HPM bit 0107 contro read write 9 12 UFM Underflow Mask HSC 0 UFM bit 0107 contro read write 9 14 OFM Overflow Mask HSC 0 OFM bit 0107 contro read write 9 15 LPI Low Preset Interrupt HSC 0 LPI bit 0107 status read write 9 11 HPI High Preset Interrupt HSC 0 HPI bit 0107 status read write 9 12 UFI Underflow Interrupt HSC 0 UFI bit 0107 status read write 9 14 OFI Overflow Interrupt HSC 0 OFI bit 0107 status read write 9 16 LPR Low Preset Reached HSC 0 LPR bit 0107 status read only 9 11 HPR High Preset Reached HSC 0 HPR bit 0107 status read only 9 13 DIR Count Direction HSC 0 DIR bit 0107 status read only 9 16 UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit 0107 status read write 9 13 OF Overflow HSC 0 OF bit 0107 status read write 9 15 MD Mode Done HSC 0 MD bit 0 or 1 status read write 9 17 CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2107 status read only 9 17 94 Using the High Speed Counter Table 9 1 High Speed Counter Function File HSC 0 or HSC 1 5 Description Address DataFormat HSC Type UserProgram ForMore Modes Access Information MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT 0107 contro read only 9 18 ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC word 32 bit INT 0107 contro read write 9 24 HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT 0107 contro read write 9
86. 3 37 3 50 Equal Move MOV 0 00 2 15 2 50 0 00 7 18 2 00 Message Steady State MSG 6 00 8 00 2 88 Message False to True 150 00 Transition for Reads Long Word addressing level does not apply Message False to True 200 1 3 word Transition for Writes Multiply MUL 0 00 5 88 2 00 0 00 28 55 3 50 Masked Move MVM 0 00 7 05 2 00 0 00 10 58 3 00 Negate NEG 0 00 2 35 3 00 0 00 10 18 3 00 Not Equal NEQ 0 94 1 30 1 25 2 20 1 80 2 50 Not NOT 0 00 2 20 2 50 0 00 7 99 2 50 One Shot ONS 1 85 1 38 3 50 Word addressing level does not apply Or OR 0 00 2 00 2 75 0 00 8 19 3 00 One Shot Falling OSF 3 01 1 88 5 38 One Shot Rising OSR 2 43 2 71 5 38 Output Enable OTE 0 98 1 49 1 63 Output Latch OTL 0 00 1 06 0 63 Output Unlatch OTU 0 00 1 02 0 63 Word addressing level does not apply Proportional Integral PID 9 65 263 19 2 38 Derivative Pulse Train Output PTO 21 40 75 11 1 88 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 21 63 110 50 1 88 Reset Accumulator RAC Word addressing level does not apply 0 00 17 61 2 00 1 0 Refresh REF 0 00 see p F 8 0 50 Reset RES 0 00 4 94 1 00 Return RET 0 00 0 44 0 25 Retentive Timer On RTO 1 85 15 73 pop 1 09 ee Subroutine SBR 0 16 0 16 0 25 Scale SCL 0 00 9 30 2 50 Scale with Parameters SCP 0 00 28 44 3 75 0 00 45 59 6 00 Sequencer Compare SQC 6 80 21 30 3 88 6 80 22 80 4 38 Sequencer Load SQL 6 80 19 20 3 38 6 80 21 10 3 88 F3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Table F 1 MicroLogi
87. 45 33 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 19 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual This instruction uses the following operands 19 10 Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the FIFO stack The address level of the source must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If FIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack where the value in source is loaded Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words EC ZR ERE RUE EE Word 0 gNi DN EM3 not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant fo
88. 5 25 2 Remote Messages 2 0 YO RR Se E CER to tica 25 14 MSG Instruction Error Codes 2 0 ee ren 25 18 Timing Diagram for MicroLogix 1500 MSG Instruction 25 21 Service Communications SVC cette eee eee 25 24 Examples Ladder Logic lsslsleeeeeeeeeee eee 25 27 Using Local Messaging cernere e 25 28 Using Remote Messaging sse cece rr str rs rea 25 34 Example 2 Passthru via DH485 Channel 0 of the SLC 5 04 Processor 25 37 Example Passthu using Two 1785 KA5s 0 0 000000 cece eee eee 25 40 Specifications Controller DIMENSIONS De enr grap eiae n E e hte A 9 Compact I O 1 mte A 10 Transistor Output Transient Pulses A 10 Replacement Parts MicroLogix 1500 Replacement Kits 00 0 cee eee ee eee B 1 Lithium Battery 1747 B 2 Replacement Doors RI fe red Ne ees B 6 Replacement Terminal Blocks sssseesessresrrrrrrrrr reser rer rr e B 8 Troubleshooting Your System Understanding the Controller LED C 2 Controller Error Recovery Model C 4 Identifying Controller Faults 00 cece eee C 5 Calling Allen Bradley for 1
89. 50 26 B51 26 B51 74 3 B51 3 B51 51 27 B51 27 B51 75 4 B51 4 B51 52 28 B51 28 B51 76 5 B51 5 B51 53 29 B51 29 B51 77 6 B51 6 B51 54 30 B51 30 B51 78 7 B51 7 B51 55 31 51 31 51 79 8 51 8 51 56 32 51 32 51 80 9 51 9 51 57 33 B51 33 B51 81 10 B51 10 B51 58 34 B51 34 B51 82 11 B51 11 B51 59 35 B51 35 B51 83 12 B51 12 B51 60 36 B51 36 B51 84 13 B51 13 B51 61 37 B51 37 B51 85 14 B51 14 B51 62 38 B51 38 B51 86 15 B51 15 B51 63 39 B51 39 51 87 16 51 16 51 64 40 51 40 51 88 17 51 17 51 65 41 51 41 51 89 18 51 18 51 66 42 51 42 51 90 19 51 19 51 67 43 51 43 51 91 20 51 20 51 68 44 51 44 51 92 21 51 21 51 69 45 51 45 51 93 22 51 22 51 70 46 51 46 51 94 23 51 23 51 71 47 51 47 51 95 7 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The element number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data bit as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is editable or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 or the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad Important Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from
90. 6 Controller Memory and File Types This chapter describes controller memory and the types of files used by the MicroLogix 1500 controller The chapter is organized as follows Controller Memory on page 6 2 Data Files on page 6 5 Protecting Data Files During Download on page 6 6 Password Protection on page 6 9 Clearing the Controller Memory on page 6 10 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 6 11 Function Files on page 6 12 6 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Controller Memory File Structure MicroLogix 1500 user memory is comprised of Data Files Function Files and Program Files Function Files are new and exclusive to the MicroLogix 1500 controller and are not available in the MicroLogix 1000 or SLC controllers MicroLogix 1500 Memory Output File Data Files Function Files Program Files Selectable Timed 6 2 High Speed Count Pulse Train Output Pulse Width Mod Base Hardware Info 2 i 5 2 Bit cu 5 T Timer o 9c Counter 8 SR Control SN Integer L Long Word M Message P PID Memory Module Data Access Tool Trim Pot Info Real Time Clock Comms Status Status File User Memory Controller Memory and File Types User memory is the amount of storage available to a user for storing ladder logic data table files I
91. 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PTO Accelerating Status AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS Ss 0 or 1 status read only The PTO AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the acceleration phase of the output profile e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile PTO Ramp Profile RP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP 2 0 or 1 control read write 10 10 The PTO RP Ramp Profile bit controls how the output pulses generated by the PTO sub system accelerate to and decelerate from the Output Frequency that is set in the PTO function file PTO 0 OF It can be used by an input or output instruction on any rung within the control program The RP bit operates as follows Set 1 Configures the PTO instruction to produce an S Curve profile e Cleared 0 Configures the PTO instruction to produce a Trapezoid profile Using High Speed Outputs PTO Idle Status IS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program
92. Controller i 2 WD folder and then double click on the nez z specific I O card that you wish to 3 RES Filter SORG Filter The configuration for the analog Nr TEES E ak EFI output is virtually identical Simply address the PID control variable CV esie liie to the analog output address and configure the analog output to Scaled for PID behavior ETE UNIO 24 21 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Application Notes The following paragraphs discuss e Input Output Ranges e Scaling to Engineering Units e Zero crossing Deadband e Output Alarms e Output Limiting with Anti reset Windup The Manual Mode e Feed Forward Time Proportioning Outputs Input Output Ranges The input module measuring the process variable PV must have a full scale binary range of 0 to 16383 If this value is less than 0 bit 15 set then a value of zero is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set bit 12 of word 0 in the control block If the process variable is greater than 16383 bit 14 set then a value of 16383 is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set The Control Variable calculated by the PID instruction has the same range of 0 to 16383 The Control Output word 16 of the control block has the range of 0 to 100 You can set lower and upper limits for the instruction s calculated output values where an up
93. Controllers User Manual Sign Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 0 3 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is negative Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 3 is restored when execution resumes Controller Mode User Application Mode 9 4 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 0 to 1 4 binary 010 1 1110 status read only Bits 0 4 function as follows 1 0 to 1 4 Mode 1 4 S 1 3 1 2 5 11 S 1 0 ID Controller Mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 remote download in progress 0 0 0 0 1 1 remote program mode 0 0 0 1 3 remote suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 0 0 1 1 0 6 run mode 0 0 1 1 1 7 remote test continuous mode 0 1 0 0 0 8 remote test single scan mode 1 0 0 0 0 16 download in progress 1 0 0 0 1 17 program mode 1 1 0 1 27 suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 1 1 1 1 0 30 mode Forces Enabled System Status File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 5 binary 1 status read
94. DA binary bit 0 or 1 control read write When set 1 the derivative rate action DA bit causes the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated on the error instead of the process variable PV When clear 0 this bit allows the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated where the derivative is performed on the PV CV Upper Limit Alarm UL Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write The control variable upper limit alarm bit is set when the calculated CV output exceeds the upper CV limit 24 16 Process Control Instruction CV Lower Limit Alarm LL Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write The control variable lower limit alarm bit is set 1 when the calculated CV output is less than the lower CV limit Setpoint Out Of Range SP Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the setpoint exceeds the maximum scaled value or is less than the minimum scaled value PV Out Of Range PV Tuning Parameter Descriptions Ad
95. DH485 communications 1761 6 3 Controllers later Bulletin 1747 SLC 500 Processors SLC Chassis These processors support a variety of I O 1747 6 2 Processors requirements and functionality 1746 BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign 1746 6 1 devices Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels 1746 6 2 2 RS232 and 1 DH485 to printers modems or the 1746 6 3 DH485 network for data collection 1785 KA5 DH M DH485 1771 PLC Provides communication between stations on the PLC 1785 6 5 5 Gateway Chassis 5r DH and SLC 500 DH485 networks Enables 1785 1 21 communication and data transfer from PLC to SLC 500 on DH485 network Also enables programming software programming or data acquisition across to DH485 2760 RB Flexible Interface 1771 PLC Provides an interface for SLC 500 using protocol 2760 ND001 Module Chassis cartridge 2760 SFC3 to other A B PLCs and devices Three configurable channels are available to interface with Bar Code Vision RF Dataliner and PLC Systems D 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Table 25 4 Allen Bradley Devices that Support DH485 Communication Catalog Number Description Installation Function Publication 1784 KTXD DH485 IM IBM XT AT Provides DH485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 22 Computer Bus 1784 PCMK PCMCIA IM PCMCIA slot Provides DH485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 19 in c
96. DM IEC1000 4 6 10V communications cable 3V IEC1000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz communications cable 1 kV 5 kHz IEC1000 4 5 communications cable1 kv galvanic gun Terminal Screw Torque 1 13 Nm 10 in Ib rated 1 3 Nm 12 in Ib maximum Table 2 Input Specifications Description 1764 24AWA 1764 24BWA and 1764 28BXB Inputs 0 thru 7 Inputs 8 and Higher On State Voltage Range 79 to 132V ac 14 to 30 0V dc at 30 10 to 30 0V dc at 30 C 86 F 86 F 14 to 26 4V de 55 10 to 26 4V dc at 55 C 131 F 131 F Off State Voltage Range 0 to 20V ac 0 to 5V de Operating Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz 0 Hz to 20 kHz 0 Hz to 500 Hz On State Current minimum 50mAat79Vac 2 5 mA at 14V dc 20mA at 10V dc nominal 120mAati20Vac 7 3mAat24V dc 8 9 at 24V dc maximum 16 0 MA at 132V ac 12 0 mAat30Vdc 12 0 mA at 30V dc Off State Leakage 2 5 mA minimum 1 5 mA minimum Current Nominal Impedance 12k ohms at 50 Hz 3 3k ohms 2 7k ohms 10k ohms at 60 Hz Inrush Current max 250 mA at 120V ac Not Applicable Not Applicable 1 Scan time dependant Note Specifications The 1764 24AWA input circuits inputs 0 11 do not support adjustable filter settings They have maximum turn on and maximum turn off times of 20 milliseconds Table 3 Response Times for High Speed Inputs 0 Through 7 applies to 1764 24BWA and 1764 28BXB Maximum Filter Set
97. Ensure that the specified temperature range is maintained Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce hot spots near the controller Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered Note Do not bring in unfiltered outside air Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure Master Control Relay 2 8 A hard wired master control relay MCR provides a reliable means for emergency machine shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits Refer to the figures on page 2 11 and 2 12 ATTENTION Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and or machine damage c
98. General This Controller Control Bits Communication Command 500 Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements 2 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel 0 Error ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Transmitting ST 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Bridge Addr n octal 1 Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr dec Remote Station Address dec Remote Bridge Link ID 2 Error 0 Error Description No errors Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by a MicroLogix 1500 processor on the DH485 network Local Bridge Node Address is set to since this is the DH485 node address used by the passthru SLC 5 04 processor Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 not used because communication is from one remote capable device to another remote capable device Remote Station Address is the SLC 5 04 processor at node address 1 Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH network with both SLC 5 04 processors Channel 1 Link ID 2 Note Data Table Addresses the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user specified Important Set the MicroLogix 1500 s Link ID in the channel configuration screen Communications Instruction MicroLogix 1500 Processor Device D to PLC 5 Device B via an SLC 5 04 Processor Pass
99. I O Confipuration ere ee bas Dede gee eg UR RR wd 5 3 I O Forcibg 15e ie ee eee cite eet res ets 5 4 Input Filtering tuse ID serb We eee a A es 5 5 katching Inputs re tee e RR eq ep heats 8 ates 5 6 Controller Memory and File Types Controller Memory oc cay hs ws Moses PE SG ee eG BOIS PAGG TIE DRUG Epp 6 2 Data Ell S shld etre ont retar RAM M 4 Gee Ep 6 5 Protecting Data Files During Download 6 6 Password Protection ii Se eet ee wee ea wea 6 9 Clearing the Controller Memory 8 6 10 Allow Future Access Setting OEM 6 11 Function Files iss cat aaa Bie hae tus abe MN a eee en 6 12 Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT Trum Pot perations esses oe ORO Rie a ew le Pee ee 7 1 Data Access Tool DAT 3 ss sly eh ke bes c pede See RELA oda balan 7 3 DAT Keypad and Indicator Light Functions 7 3 Power Up Operations ro score ee Lee es ak PE A Fe UE eed tea eee 7 5 DAT Function eid oh ee Gee cian Wee eS Wai Wits OS Ve ee 7 6 Eland F2 Eunction star Rig Ee A be Ee XQ Sundaes Beads 7 13 Working Screen Operation 7 14 Non Existent Elements se veu Uns E e RA ALS Seal e ENEYISRU DN 7 14 Controller ci 5 coo ane Ghee oh REN RW d Pea CHE R
100. Immediate Output with 88 22 4 REESUO oor ea eines the b t 22 6 Using Interrupts Information About Using Interrupts 0 00 00 ccc 23 1 User Interrupt Instructions 23 7 INT Interrupt Subroutine 0 0 0 Ih 23 7 STS Selectable Timed Start eee eee ee 23 8 UID User Interrupt Disable 0 0 00 cee II 23 9 UIE User Interrupt Enable 23 10 UIF User Interrupt Flush 1 0 0 0 III 23 12 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File 23 13 Using the Event Input Interrupt Function File 23 19 Process Control Instruction The eee eee niet ede eoe e roe 24 1 The PID Equation sneis eoi see eee he es Ew ae GA IRE Rede 24 2 PD Data Pile vai o ede whet lack Bie ede a e a Ce e 24 3 Input Parameters ose Renee da plone getter eae INSERERE EU E 24 5 Output Parameters ve IERI eere etie 24 7 Tuning Parameters ice cce De RC rey Se ee e D het 24 10 Runtime Errors eve eer eR rera ferat ng 24 19 Analog VO Scaling esee IN RE aee ets 24 21 Application Notes ics se Rp Ree E ERA Rer 24 22 toc v MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 25 toc vi Communications Instructions MicroLogix 1500 Messaging
101. Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation 1764 28BXB Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second 75V dc Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation FET Output Group to Backplane Isolation and FET Outputs Group to Group Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second 75V dc Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Relay Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 265V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Relay Output Group to Relay and FET Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 265V Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Specifications Controller Dimensions See also page 2 13 for Base Unit Mounting Dimensions Expansion I O 38 mm 1 49 in Base Unit 147 mm 5 78 in 168 mm 6 62 in DIN rail center line 132mm 122 mm MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Compact I O Dimensions Panel Mounting For more than 2 modules number of modules 1 X 35 mm 1 38 Refer to host controller do
102. Making a DF1 Isolated Point to Point Connection You can connect the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller to your personal computer using a serial cable from your personal computer s serial port to the controller The recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full Duplex FK TW 2 8 MicroLogix Controller Optical Isolator recommended 1761 CBL PM02 Personal Computer 4 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual We recommend using an Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as your optical isolator See page 4 13 for specific AIC cabling information MicroLogix 1500 PC 1761 CBL AM00 Tj or 1761 CBL HM02 Sf h e 1747 CP3 or 1761 o AEE MicroLogix 1500 provides power i to the AIC or an external power supply may be used Using a Modem You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one MicroLogix 1500 controller using DF1 Full Duplex protocol or to multiple controllers using DF1 Half Duplex protocol as shown in the following illustration Do not attempt to use DH485 protocol through modems under any circumstance For information on types of modems you can use with the micro controllers see page D 8
103. MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Real Time Clock Function File The real time clock provides year month day of month day of week hour minute and second information to the Real Time Clock RTC Function File in the controller The programming screen is shown below Function Files IDAT re cs4 gt Hsc PTO PwM sm Day of Week DD MM YYYY Dete p 0 HH MM SS Time 05 05 p Set Date amp Time Disable Clock YR Year MON Month DAY Day Hour MIN Minute SEC Second DOW Day Of The Week 0 DS Disabled 0 BL RTCBatteryis Low 0 The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below User Program Feature Address Data Format Range Type Access YR RTC Year RTC 0 YR word 1998 to 2097 status read only MON RTC Month RTC 0 MON word 11012 status read only DAY RTC Day of Month RTC 0 DAY word 11031 status read only HR RTC Hours RTC 0 HR word 0 to 23 military time status read only MIN RTC Minutes RTC 0 MIN word 0 to 59 status read only SEC RTC Seconds RTC 0 SEC word 0 to 59 status read only DOW RTC Day of Week RTC 0 DOW word 0 to 6 Sunday to Saturday status read only DS Disabled RTC 0 DS binary 0 or 1 control read write BL RTC Battery Low RTC 0 BL binary 0 or 1 status read only 8 2 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Writing Data to the
104. Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 12 3 XIC and XIO Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address a Mode Level E Parameter z 5 g E E 9E Siz o 1 5 15 a Sz 2 5 5 5 5 S 52 3 Ela 2 5 S Su Bit 1 See Important note about indirect Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD HSC PTO PWM STI EIL BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 12 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual OTE Output Energize 12 4 Instruction Type output Table 12 4 Execution Time for the OTE Instructions When Rung Is True False 1 49 us 0 98 us Use an OTE instruction to turn a bit location on when rung conditions are evaluated as true and off when the rung is evaluated as false An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 4 OTE instructions are reset turned OFF when You enter or return to the program or remote program mode or power is restored The OTE is programmed within an
105. O configuration etc in the controller User data files consist of the system status file I O image files and all other user creatable data files bit timer counter control integer long word MSG and PID The user word is defined as a unit of memory consumption in the controller The amount of memory available to the user for data files and program files is measured in user words Memory consumption is allocated as follows For data files a user word is the equivalent of 16 bits of a data file element For example 1 integer data file element 1 user word 1 long word file element 2 user words lt 1 timer data file element 3 user words For program files a user word is the equivalent of a ladder instruction with one operand For example 1 XIC instruction which has 1 operand consumes 1 user word 1 EQU instruction which has 2 operands consumes 2 user words 1 ADD instruction which has 3 operands consumes 3 user words MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The controller supports over 7K of user words Memory can be used in any combination of program files and data files as long as the total memory usage does not exceed 4K user data words as shown below User Memory 4 0K RS S 5 a SD we 0 5K OK OK Program Words 3 65K 4 35K See Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page F 1 to find the memory usage for specific instructions Note
106. OFF e DC 250 25 Output ON 75 output OFF e DC 0 0 Output OFF constant no waveform 10 25 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PWM Duty Cycle Status DCS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to 1000 status read only The PWM DCS Duty Cycle Status provides feedback from the PWM sub system The Duty Cycle Status variable can be used within an input instruction on a rung of logic to provide PWM system status to the remaining control program PWM Error Code ER Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2105 status read only PWM ER Error Codes detected by the PWM sub system are displayed in this register The table identifies known errors Table 10 8 PWM Error Codes Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Namie Description Code Fault Fault Errors 2 Yes No No Overlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the Error same physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PWMO and PWM1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Output invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the Error lonly v
107. Program Access ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 0 ADP long word 32 bit INT see below control read write The PTO ADP Accel Decel Pulses defines how many of the total pulses TOP variable will be applied to each of the ACCEL and DECEL components The illustration below shows the relationship where total output pulses 12 000 e ADP accel decel pulses 3 000 If you need to determine the ramp period accel decel ramp duration 2x ADP OF duration in seconds OF output frequency The following formulas can be used to calculate the maximum frequency limit for both profiles The maximum frequency the integer lt the result found below OF output frequency For Trapezoid Profiles OF x OF 4 0 5 For S Curve Profiles 0 999 x OF x SQRT OF 6 4 12 000 gt Accel Run Decel 3 000 6 000 3 000 The ADP range is from 0 to the calculated value The value in the ADP variable must be less than one half the value in the TOP variable or an error is generated In this example the maximum value that could be used for accel decel is 6000 because if both accel and decel are 6000 the total number of pulses 12 000 The run component would be zero This profile would consist of an acceleration phase from 0 to 6000 At 6000 the output frequency OF variable would be generated and immediately enter the deceleration phase 6000 to 12 000 At 12 000 the PTO operation woul
108. User Manual Using Remote Messaging The MicroLogix 1500 can pass a MSG instruction to a target device on a remote network Example 1 Communicating with A B processors using a 1785 5 Node 1 octal 25 94 Device A SLC 5 04 Modular I O Controller Device B DH485 Node 7 DH485 Device C MicroLogix 1500 PLC 5 40 with 1785 KA5 Module Node 5 Node 3 octal DH Link ID 2 57 6Kbaud DH Link ID 2 2 57 6Kbaud Link ID 1 19 2Kbaud Node 2 Communications Instruction MicroLogix 1500 Device C to SLC 5 04 Processor Device A via 1785 KA5 i MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 n x General This Controller Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel Error ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Transmitting ST p Message Enabled EN 0 Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Bridge Addr p octal Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr dec o o 1 Gum Remote Station Address dec 1 Remote Bridge Link ID Error 0 I Error Description No errors Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by a MicroLogix 1500 processor on the DH485 Link ID 1 Local Bridge Node Address is set to 7 since this is the DH485 node add
109. When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file this is also the length of source if it is a file data type The length of the sequencer 20 10 can range from 1 to 255 Sequencer Instructions Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as source if it is a file data type It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Table 20 6 SQL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files EM Address 2 Mode Level E Parameter z O LES oO le le lele s _ 2 5 la f f Ju 2 2 NE 5 la la Z IS JE 8 0 El E 2 5 File mm mm ole Source ele ele Control 1 Length Position 1 Control file only Note If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words 20 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 20 12 Program Control Instructions 21 Program Control Instructions Use these in
110. X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 xe x IET NEX 1 0 lolala 0 0 1 0 1 0101010101010 1010 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 010 Xe ox 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 X 1 010 0 0 0 0 0 01 0110 0 000 0 1 1 0 1 010101 01010101010101010107101 0 0 1 1 1 determi nes the state of the flag 16 4 Note If source is zero the destination is zero and the math status is zero the flag is set to 1 Updates to Math Status Bits Table 16 6 Math Status Bits Conversion Instructions With this Bit The Controller 0 0 always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if more than one bit in the source is set otherwise resets The math overflow bit S 5 0 is not set 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign Bit always resets 16 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD Instruction Type output FRD 7 PE gp Table 16 7 Execution Time for the FRD Instructions Dest Instruction When Rung Is True False FRD 12 61 us 0 00 us The F
111. a controlled variable from a fixed point Glossary off state leakage current When an ideal mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows through the switch Practical semiconductor switches and the transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches allow a small current to flow when the switch is in the off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating of a switch should be less than the minimum operating current rating of the load that is connected to the switch on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan online Describes devices under direct communication For example when RSLogix 500 is monitoring the program file in a controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that receives data from the controller processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU processor file The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices Only one processor file may be stored in the controller
112. allowed to occur during a program cycle The timing accuracy is from 10 ms to 0 ms This means that a value of 2 results in a timeout between 10 and 20 ms If the program scan time value equals the watchdog value a watchdog major error is generated code 0022H G 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Free Running Clock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 4 binary 0 to FFFF status read write This register contains a free running counter that is incremented every 100 us This word is cleared 0 upon entering an executing mode Minor Error Bits Overflow Trap Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 5 0 binary 0 or 1 status read write If this bit is ever set 1 upon execution of the END or TND instruction a major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a math instruction ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG SCL or FRD take appropriate action and then clear bit 5 0 using an OTU instruction with S 5 0 Control Register Error Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 5 2 binary 0 or 1 status read write The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL BSR SQO SQC and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error When bit S 5 2 is set 1
113. an input turns on and the corresponding output turns on true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it will cause a fault workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage write To copy data to a storage device For example the processor WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output modules glossary 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual glossary 8 Index A ADD 15 4 address glossary 1 AIC applying power to 4 18 attaching to the network 4 18 connecting 4 12 isolated modem 4 5 installing 4 18 recommended user supplied components 4 17 selecting cable 4 13 AIC Advanced Interface Converter glossary 1 Allen Bradley contacting for assistance C 14 AllenBradley contacting for assistance P 3 AllenBradley Support P 3 AND 17 3 application glossary 1 attach and lock module 2 25 backup data glossary 1 Base Comms Door B 7 base comms door B 7 base terminal door B 6 B 6 base unit panel mounting 2 17 base units hardware overview 1 2 baud rate glossary 1 bit glossary 1 bit key 7 4 Bit Mode 7 12 block diagrams glossary 1 Boo
114. and File Types are shown below Table 9 14 HSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files Qe pos E Parameter E 8 e 2 z E 2 ollon El Els ls 2 8 Counter Number High Preset ele elele Low Preset ele Output High 1 1 SIEN Source Output Low E A Source 9 30 Using the High Speed Counter RAC Reset Accumulated Value Instruction Type output L 7 High Speed Counter Load 1 Table 9 15 Execution Time for the RAC Instruction High Proset ATA ow Preset Sours NS When Rung Is True False 17 61 us 0 00 us The RAC instruction resets the high speed counter and allows a specific value to be written to the HSC accumulator The RAC instruction uses the following parameters e Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used 0 HSCO and 1 e Source Specifies the location of the data to be loaded into the HSC accumulator The data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below Table 9 16 RAC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this tabl
115. and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file destination must be a word size file If FIFO is a long word size file destination must be a long word size file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words BR PRES PRL Se Word 0 pN EM2 not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word Position Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 128 word or 0 to 64 long word The position is decremented after each unload Data is unloaded at position zero 19 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 19 13 FFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Typ
116. and that interrupts generated by the HSC will be processed based on their priority within the MicroLogix 1500 system This bit can be controlled by the user program or will be automatically set by the HSC sub system if auto start is enabled See also Priority of User Interrupts on page 23 4 9 6 Auto Start AS Using the High Speed Counter Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Program Access AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bit 0107 control read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode on page 9 18 The AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the HSC function will automatically start whenever the MicroLogix 1500 controller enters any run or test mode Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access ED Error Detected HSC 0 ED bit 0107 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used in the control program to detect if an error is present in the HSC sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set 1 the user should lo
117. definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Mode Level E Parameter z 5 g S E LL e 9o sgorl zzmgEtLFIgOoE5ES B5 5 t amp o S 215 5 5 m 52 3 Ela 2 5 2 8 Low Limit ele Test ele High Limit 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EIL BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 14 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 14 10 Math Instructions 1 5 Math Instructions Use these output instructions to perform computations using an expression or a specific arithmetic instruction Instruction Used To Page ADD Add Add two values 15 4 SUB Subtract Subtract two values 15 4 MUL Multiply Multiply two values 15 5 DIV Divide Divide one value by another 15 5 NEG Negate Change the sign of the source value and 15 6 place it in the destination CLR Clear Set all bits of a word to zero 15 6 S
118. drill Topics include agency certifications compliance to European Union Directives using in hazardous locations master control relay power considerations preventing excessive heat controller spacing mounting the controller Agency Certifications UL 508 e C UL under CSA C22 no 142 Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 no 213 CEcompliant for all applicable directives 2 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Compliance to European Union Directives EMC Directive This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment EN 50082 2 EMC Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive 2 2 This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN 61131 2 see the appropriate sections in
119. fixed or variable It will be fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code It will be variable if you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step The following figure indicates how the SQO instruction works Sequencer Instructions External Outputs Associated with 0 14 SQO Sequencer Output CEND File 10 1 Mask OFOF CDN gt Dest 014 0 Control R6 20 Length 4 Position 2 Destination 0 14 0 15 87 0 0000 0101 0000 1010 Mask Value OFOF 15 87 0 0000 1111 0000 1111 Sequencer Output File B10 1 Word Step B10 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 2 1010 0010 1111 0101 1 3 1111 0101 0100 1010 2 Current Step 41 0101 0101 0101 0101 3 51 0000 1111 0000 1111 4 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 ON ON ON ON 20 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 20 8 This instruction uses the following operands File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and stored in the destination Mask The mask operand contains the mask constant When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through to destination When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to destination The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OXFFFF w
120. for the program currently in the controller matches that of the program being transferred to the controller file number file type and file size number of elements of the protected data for the program currently in the controller exactly match that of the program being transferred to the controller If all of the previous conditions are met the controller will not write over any data file in the controller that is configured as Download Protected If any of the previous conditions are not met the entire User Program is transferred to the controller Additionally if the program being transferred to the controller contains protected files the Data Protection Lost indicator S 36 10 is set to indicate that protected data has been lost For example a control program with protected files is transferred to the controller The original program did not have protected files or the files did not match The data protection lost indicator S 36 10 is then set The data protection lost indicator represents that the protected files within the controller have default values and the user application may need configuration setup Note The controller will not clear the Data Protection Lost indicator It is up to the user to clear this bit Controller Memory and File Types Password Protection MicroLogix controllers have a built in security system based on numeric passwords Controller passwords consist of up to 10 digits 0 9 Each c
121. have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address being used Important All devices should be set to the same maximum node address Example DH485 Connections The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix 1500 controllers to the DH485 network using the Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC For more information on the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 DH485 Network with a MicroLogix 1500 Controller MicroLogix les 1500 connection from port 1 or port 2 to MicroLogix 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 1761 CBL AP00 or 1761 CBL PM02 NY J R Em connection from port 1 or port 2 to PC 1761 CBL APO00 1761 CBL PM02 v 24V dc user supply 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL ACO0 24V dc user supply D 16 Understanding the Communication Protocols Typical 3 Node Network PanelView 550 MicroLogix 1500 Je i 1761 CBL AM00 m 1761 CBL HM02 menar s r i RJ45 port 1761 CBL AS09
122. inactive or false Master Control Reset MCR zone Note bit that is set within a subroutine using OTE instruction remains set until the OTE is scanned again ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION Never use an output address at more than one place in your logic program Always be fully aware of the load represented by the output coil Relay Type Bit Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 12 5 OTE Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Level E Parameter E 2 E Es e SSIS IS le _ 2151 5 leo f f Ju 2 2 NE 555 52 8 SEIS EIS IS 8 5 Destination Bit eleleljej e e e e e e e e e elele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch L gt _
123. instruction completes its function ER bit is set 1 and an error code 37H is placed in the MG File to inform you of the timeout error Atthe next end of scan REF or SVC instruction the MicroLogix 1500 controller determines if it should examine the communications queue for another instruction The controller bases its decision on the state of the Channel 0 Communication Servicing Selection CSS and Message Servicing Selection MSS bits the net work communication requests from other nodes and whether previous MSG instructions are already in progress If the MicroLogix 1500 controller determines that it should not access the queue the MSG instruction remains as it was Either the EN and EW bits remain set 1 or only the EN bit is set 1 until the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction If the MicroLogix 1500 controller determines that it has an instruction in the queue it unloads the communications queue entries into the message buffers until all four message buffers are full If an invalid message is unloaded from the communications queue the ER bit is set 1 and a code is placed in the MG file to inform you of an error When a valid MSG instruction is loaded into a message buffer the EN and EW bits are set 1 The MicroLogix 1500 controller then exits the end of scan REF or SVC portion of the scan The controller s background communication function sends the messages to the target nodes specified in the MSG instruct
124. interrupt subroutine It then updates its output every time the STI subroutine is scanned The STI time interval and the PID loop update rate must be the same in order for the equation to execute properly See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 for more information on STI interrupts PID closed loop control holds a process variable at a desired set point A flow rate fluid level example is shown below Feed Forward or Bias Set Point Flow Rate Process Control Variable Output Level mm Detector Control Valve 24 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The PID equation controls the process by sending an output signal to the control valve The greater the error between the setpoint and process variable input the greater the output signal Alternately the smaller the error the smaller the output signal An additional value feed forward or bias can be added to the control output as an offset The PID result control variable drives the process variable toward the set point The PID Equation 24 2 The PID instruction uses the following algorithm Standard equation with dependent gains Output 71094 202 bias Standard Gains constants are Term Range Low to High Reference Controller Gain Kc 0 01 to 327 67 dimensionless Proportional Reset Term 1 T 327 67 to 0 01 minutes per repeat Integral Rate Term Tp 0 01
125. into the high preset the control program must do one of the following Toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 9 29 The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow HSC 0 OVF parameter or an HSC error will be generated Low Preset LOP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT control read write The LOP Low Preset is the lower setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system will generate an interrupt To load data into the low preset the control program must do one of the following Toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 9 29 The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow HSC 0 UNF parameter or an HSC error will be generated If the underflow and low preset values are negative numbers the low
126. is decremented after each unload Table 19 17 LFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files o Mode Level E Parameter z E 2 n a 8 a a 112191518 sb e 19 S lel 6 18 2 5 1 15 5 _ feo S 555 S 46015 JE lm 98 LIFO mm mm FEE mm Destination E DESEE DE UD Control 1 Length Position 1 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters 19 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 19 20 Sequencer Instructions Sequencer Instructions Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines or processes that have a consistent and repeatable operation They are typically time based or event driven Instruction Used To Page SQC Sequencer Compare Compare 16 bit data with stored data 20 2 SQO Sequencer Output Transfer 16 bit data to word addresses 20 6 SQL Sequencer Load Load 16 bit data into a file 20 10 Use the sequencer compare instruction to detect when a step is complete use the sequencer output instruction to set output conditions for each step Use the sequencer load instruction to load data into the sequencer file The primary advantage o
127. is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not exist Invalid Input Valid numbers must be 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Input Overlap Ells cannot share inputs Each Ell must have a unique input 23 21 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Ell User Interrupt Executing UIX Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX User Interrupt Executing EI 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the EII mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the PEN The EII mechanism clears the UTX bit when the controller completes its processing of the EII subroutine The EII UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an interrupt is executing Ell User Interrupt Enable UIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable ElI 0 UIE binary bit control read write The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable subroutine processing This bit must be set if the user wants the controller to process the subroutine when event occurs Ell User Interrupt Lost UIL 23 22 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost EII 0 UIL binary bit status read write UIL User Interrupt L
128. its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target bit file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten Note Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses B51 96 and above in this example e The DAT always starts at bit O of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file Power Save Timeout PST Parameter 7 10 The power save timeout turns off the DAT display after keypad activity has stopped for a user defined period of time The power save DAT 0 PST value is set in the DAT Function File The valid range is 0 to 255 minutes The power save feature can be disabled by setting the PST value to 0 which keeps the display on continuously The default value is 0 In power save mode a dash flashes in the left of the display Press any key except F1 or F2 to return the DAT to its previous mode If F1 or F2 is pressed the DAT will change the value of the F1 or F2 status bits but the display remains in power save mode 1 Fl and F2 keys do not apply Understanding the DAT Display Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT When the DAT enters either the integer or bit mode the element number and a data value are displayed as shown below Integer Mode Display Bit Mode Display Allen
129. m Input End x4 m Pm Scaled Start y ole Pm Scaled End y4 1 1 1 1 1 ele Scaled Output y ol 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 15 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual SQR Square Root Instruction Type output SOR _ Pad Root Sj Table 15 11 Execution Time for the Instruction Dest Data Size When Rung Is i True False word 22 51 us 0 00 us long word 26 58 us 0 00 us The SQR instruction calculates the square root of the absolute value of the source and places the rounded result in the destination The data ranges for the source is 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The Carry Math Status Bit is set if the source is negative See Updates to Math Status Bits on page 15 3 for more information Table 15 12 SQR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 z Address Address Data Files Function Files 5 Level Parameter Slo l S a 5 Ks zie a a 1 12151 18 o m 115 1 121815 225 amp o Q S lola S 2 555 42
130. mm 6 62 in Depth 87 mm 3 43 in See Controller Dimensions on page A 9 for more dimensional information Controller Spacing The base unit is designed to be mounted horizontally with the Compact expansion I O extending to the right of the base unit Allow 50 mm 2 in minimum of space on all sides for adequate ventilation as shown below lt lt Top 0 Controller TTT sic Side 555 Side o jo o o o Bottom 2 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Mounting the Controller ATTENTION Do not remove protective debris strips until after the base and all other equipment in the panel near the base is mounted and wiring is complete The debris strips are there to prevent drill fragments wire strands and other dirt from getting into the controller Once wiring is complete remove protective debris strips and install processor unit Failure to remove strips before operating can cause overheating Protective ESD Barrier ATTENTION Becareful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel Drilled fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris strips have been removed ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage s
131. module to determine possible causes of a module error xx8A EXPANSION I O Either an expansion I O cable is Correct the user program to CABLE configured in the user program but no eliminate a cable that is not CONFIGURATION is present or present ERO CH e expansion I O cable is configured in re compile reload the program the user program and a cable is physically present but the types do not match and enter the Run mode or add the missing cable Cycle power 1 xx indicates module number If xx 0 problem cannot be traced to a specific module C 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Errar Advisor Code M y Description Recommended Action essage Hex xx8B EXPANSION I O Either an expansion I O power supply is Correct the user program to POWER SUPPLY configured in the user program but no eliminate a power supply that is CONFIGURATION power supply is present or not present MISMATCH expansion I O power supply is re compile reload the program ERROR configured in the user program and a and enter the Run mode or power supply is physically present but With power removed add the the types do not match missing power supply xx8C EXPANSION I O An expansion I O object i e cable power Correct the user program I O OBJECT TYPE supply or module in the user program I O configuration so that the object MISMATCH configuration is not the same object
132. modules attached to the MicroLogix 1500 Controller The end cap terminator is not provided with the base and processor units It is required when using expansion I O Hardware Overview Accessories Cables Use only the following communication cables in Class I Division 2 hazardous locations Environment Classification Communication Cables Class I Division 2 Hazardous Environment 1761 CBL PM02 Series C or later 1761 CBL HM02 Series C or later 1761 CBL AMOO Series C or later 1761 CBL APO00 Series C or later 2707 NC8 Series B or later 2707 NC9 Series B or later 2707 NC10 Series B or later 2707 NC11 Series B or later Programming Programming the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller is done using RSLogix 500 Rev 3 01 00 or later Programming cables are not provided Communication Options The MicroLogix 1500 can be connected to a personal computer using the DF1 protocol It can also be connected to the DH485 network using an Advanced Interface Converter catalog number 1761 NET AIC and to the DeviceNet network using a DeviceNet Interface catalog number 1761 NET DNI See Connecting the System on page 4 1 for descriptions of these communication options MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Installing Your Controller Installing Your Controller This chapter shows you how to install your controller system The only tools you require are a Flat or Phillips head screwdriver and
133. network performance number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed See your programming software s user manual for more information Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers is 1 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 0 to CS0 5 7 Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix 1500 device on the DH485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 D 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Setting Maximum Node Address Once you
134. not fit into the destination otherwise resets 0 2 7 Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets 5 2 14 Math Overflow Selected examines the state of this bit to determine the value of the result when an overflow occurs 5 0 Overflow Trap sets if the Overflow Bit is set otherwise resets 1 Control bits Overflow Trap Bit S 5 0 Minor error bit S 5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code 0020 is declared In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch OTU instruction with address S 5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement 15 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual ADD Add SUB Subtract Instruction Type output ADD ee Table 15 3 Execution Time for the ADD and SUB Instructions Source B Instruction Data Size When Rung Is Des True False ADD word 2 12 us 0 00 us 808 long 10 82 us 0 00 us Subtract Source SUB word 3 06 us 0 00 us T Source B long word 11 22 us 0 00 us Desi 7 Use the ADD instruction to add one value to another value Source A Source B and
135. nterface Bi File T C R 34 l O N 103 Write CIF L CIF Common Interface 51 File T C R 34 Channel 25 10 This variable defines the communication channel that will be used to transmit the message request This value is factory set to channel 0 for the MicroLogix 1500 and cannot be changed Communications Instructions Target Device Parameters Message Timeout This value defines how long in seconds the message instruction has to complete its operation once it has started Timing begins when the false to true rung transition occurs enabling the message If the timeout period expires the message errors out The default value is 5 seconds If the message timeout is set to zero the message instruction will never timeout The user must set 1 the Time Out TO bit to flush a message instruction from its buffer if the destination device does not respond to the communications request Data Table Address Offset This variable defines the starting address in the target controller The data table address is used for a 500CPU or PLCS type MSG A valid address is any valid configured data file within the target device whose file type is recognized by the MicroLogix 1500 controller The data table offset is used for 485CIF type messages A valid offset is any value in the range 0 to 255 and indicates the word or byte offset into the target s Common Interface File CIF The type of device determines whether it is a word or byte
136. offset The amount of data to be exchanged is determined by the Size in Elements variable described on page 25 9 Local Node Address This is the destination device s node number if the devices are connected on a network DH485 using 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet using 1761 NET DNI or DF1 Half Duplex Note To initiate a broadcast message on a DH485 network set the local node address to 1 Local Remote This variable defines the type of communications that will be used Use local when you need point to point communications via DF1 Full Duplex or network communications like DH485 using 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet using 1761 NET DNI or DF1 Half Duplex 25 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Control Bits Parameters 25 12 Ignore if Timed Out TO Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 TO Binary On Off Control Read Write The Timed Out Bit TO can be set in your application to remove an active message instruction from processor control You can create your own timeout routine by monitoring the EW and ST bits to start a timer When the timer times out you can set the TO bit which will remove the message from the system The controller resets the TO bit the next time the associated MSG rung goes from false to true An easier method is to use the message timeout variable described on page 25 11 because it simplifies the user program This built in tim
137. or 1761 CBL AS03 7 ol f 1747 CP3 1761 1 IE i D 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Networked Operator Interface Device and MicroLogix 1500 Controller PanelView 550 LJ I LJ I LJ I RS 232 Port NULL modem adapter connection from PC to AIC connection from NULL modem adapter to AIC 1761 CBL APOO or 1761 CBL AP00 or 1761 CBL PM02 1761 CBL PM02 AIC 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL ACO0 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL ACO0 24V dc user supply 24V dc user supply AIC 5 11747 A EE E Ei F 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 SLC 5 03 processor MicroLogix 1500 D 18 Understanding the Communication Protocols MicroLogix 1500 Remote Packet Support PLC 5 MicroLogix 1500 controllers can respond and initiate with device s communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH485 and DH networks The example below shows how to send messages from a PLC device or a PC on the DH network to a MicroLogix 1500 controller on the DH485 network This method uses an SLC 5 04 processor bridge connection When using this met
138. or equivalent connected to port 2 Use an external DC power supply with the following specifications operating voltage 24V dc 20 15 output current 150 mA minimum rated NEC Class 2 Make a hard wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V dc Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wrong power source 4 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual DeviceNet Communications You can connect a MicroLogix 1500 to a DeviceNet network using the DeviceNet Interface DND catalog number 1761 NET DNI For additional information on using the DNI refer to the DeviceNet Interface User Manual publication 1761 6 5 DeviceNet Node Port 1 Replacement connector part no 1761 RPL 0000 Use this write on area to mark the d qup DeviceNet node B address be cw RS 232 Port 2 Cable Selection Guide 22 EE MIL OR TT 1761 CBL HM02 1761 CBL AMO0 Cable Length Connections from to DNI 1761 CBL AMOO 45 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 port 2 Moree SANDE ete MicroLogix 1500 port 2 e ee 7 1761 CBL PM02 i 1761 CBL AP00 Cable Length Connections from to DNI 1761 CBL AP00 45 cm 17 7 in SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors channel 0 port 2 1761 CBL PM02
139. phase of the output profile PWM Idle Status IS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM IS Idle Status is controlled by the PWM sub system and represents no PWM activity It can be used in the control program by an input instruction Set 1 PWM sub system is in an idle state e Cleared 0 PWM sub system is not in an idle state it is running PWM Error Detected ED Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM ED Error Detected bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PWM 0 ED Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in an error state Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in an error state 10 23 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PWM Normal Operation NS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only
140. rail Make sure that the placement of the base unit on the DIN rail meets the recommended spacing requirements see Controller Spacing on page 2 13 Refer to the mounting template from the inside back cover of the MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controller Base Units Installation Instructions publication 1764 5 1 2 Hook the top slot over the DIN rail 3 While pressing the base unit down against the top of the rail snap the bottom of the base unit into position Ensure DIN latches are in the up secured position 4 Leave the protective debris strip attached until you are finished wiring the base unit and any other devices To remove your base unit from the DIN rail 1 Place a flat blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom of the base unit 2 Holding the base unit pry downward on the latch until the latch locks in the open position Repeat this procedure with the second latch This releases the base unit from the DIN rail dI m ENS or DIN Rail Latch 2 16 Installing Your Controller Base Unit Panel Mounting Mount to panel using 8 or 4 screws Mounting Template To install your base unit using mounting screws 1 Remove the mounting template from the inside back cover of the MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controller Base Units Installation Instruction publication 1764 5 1 Secure the template to the mounting surface Make sure your
141. required by the DH485 specification End of Line Termination Jumper elden 3106A or 9842 Cable 1219 4000ft Maximum Jumper 4 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Connecting the AIC The AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC enables a MicroLogix 1500 to connect to a DH485 network The AIC has two RS 232 ports and one isolated RS 485 port Typically there is one AIC for each MicroLogix 1500 When two MicroLogix controllers are closely positioned you can connect a controller to each of the RS 232 ports on the AIC The AIC can also be used as an RS 232 isolator providing an isolation barrier between the MicroLogix 1500 communications port and any equipment connected to it i e personal computer modem etc The following figure shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the AIC 3 AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC 2 lis f 5 Item Description 1 Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE 2 Port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 DTE 3 Port RS 485 Phoenix plug 4 DC Power Source selector switch cable port 2 power source external external power source connected to item 5 5 Terminals for external 24V dc power supply and chassis ground F
142. runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors G 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Active Nodes Channel 0 Nodes 0 to 15 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 9 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File See Active Node Table Block on page 6 16 for more information Active Node Channel 0 Nodes 16 to 31 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 10 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File See Active Node Table Block on page 6 16 for more information Math Register Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 13 word 32 768 to status read write 32 767 5 14 word 32 768 to status read write 32 767 These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL DIV FRD and TOD math instructions The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL DIV FRD or TOD instruction is executed in the user program An explanation of how
143. scaled process variable and scaled error in these units as well The control output percentage word 16 is displayed as a percentage of the 0 to 16383 CV range The actual value transferred to the CV output is always between 0 and 16383 When you select scaling the instruction scales the setpoint deadband process variable and error You must consider the effect on all these variables when you change scaling 24 23 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Zero Crossing Deadband DB Output Alarms 24 24 The adjustable deadband lets you select an error range above and below the setpoint where the output does not change as long as the error remains within this range This lets you control how closely the process variable matches the setpoint without changing the output DB SP Error range DB Time Zero crossing is deadband control that lets the instruction use the error for computational purposes as the process variable crosses into the deadband until it crosses the setpoint Once it crosses the setpoint error crosses zero and changes sign and as long as it remains in the deadband the instruction considers the error value zero for computational purposes Select deadband by entering a value in the deadband storage word word 9 in the control block The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value you enter A value of zero inhibits this feature The deadband has the same scaled units as the
144. set 1 the module is write protected and the user program and data within the memory module cannot be overwritten When the WP bit is cleared 0 the module is read write The FO Fault Override bit shows the status of the fault override selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module Important The memory module fault override selection in the Memory Module Information MMI file does not determine the controller s operation It merely displays the setting of the Fault Override bit S 1 8 in the memory module s user program See Fault Override At Power Up on page G 5 for more information 8 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Load Program Compare Load on Error Load Always Mode Behavior 8 8 The LPC Load Program Compare bit shows the status of the load program compare selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module Important The memory module load program compare selection in the Memory Module Information MMI file does not determine the controller s operation It merely displays the setting of the Load Program Compare bit S 2 9 in the memory module s user program See Memory Module Program Compare on page G 10 for more information
145. set However during subsequent execution of the PID loop if an invalid loop setpoint is entered the PID loop continues to execute using the old setpoint and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set 41H Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected 1 Deadband lt 0 or 1 Deadband lt 0 Change deadband to 0 lt deadband lt MaxS MinS 16383 Change deadband to 0 deadband 16383 24 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Error Code Description of Error Condition or Corrective Action Conditions 2 Deadband gt 2 Deadband gt MaxS MinS 16383 51H 1 Output high limit lt 0 or Change output high limit to 2 Output high limit gt 100 0 lt output high limit lt 100 52H 1 Output low limit 0 or Change output low limit to 2 Output low limit gt 100 0 output low limit output high limit 100 53H Output low limit output high limit Change output low limit to 0 output low limit output high limit 100 PID is being entered for the second time PID You have at least three PID loops in your program loop was interrupted by an I O interrupt which One in the main program or subroutine file one in 60H is then interrupted by the PID STI interrupt an I O interrupt file and one in the STI subroutine file You must alter your ladder program and eliminate the potential nesting of PID loops
146. setpoint if you choose scaling You may set an output alarm on the control variable at a selected value above and or below a selected output percent When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded either value it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit in the PID instruction Alarm bits are reset by the instruction when the control variable comes back inside the limits The instruction does not prevent the control variable from exceeding the alarm values unless you select output limiting Select upper and lower output alarms by entering a value for the upper alarm CVH and lower alarm CVL Alarm values are specified as a percentage of the output If you do not want alarms enter zero and 100 respectively for lower and upper alarm values and ignore the alarm bits Process Control Instruction Output Limiting with Anti Reset Windup You may set an output limit percent of output on the control variable When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded a limit it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit and prevents the control variable from exceeding either limit value The instruction limits the control variable to 0 and 100 if you choose not to limit Select upper and lower output limits by setting the limit enable bit bit OL and entering an upper limit and lower limit CVL Limit values are a percentage 0 to 100 of the control v
147. table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files Address Mode Level Parameter E 2 g sl I Bll tee EL o 51 62 SE 225 a EE 3 SEES Source mm 61 16 ole Destination ol Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files The source and destination file types must be the same except bit B and integer N they can be interchanged It is the address that determines the maximum length of the block to be copied as shown in the following table Table 19 3 Maximum Lengths for the COP Instruction Source Destination Data Type Range of Length Operand 1 word elements ie word 1to 128 2 word elements ie long word 11064 3 word elements ie counter 11042 19 2 File Instructions FLL Fill File Instruction Type output FLL Hl pane a Table 19 4 Execution Time for the FLL Instruction fena Data Size When Rung Is True False word 13 0 43 us word 0 00 us long word 13 7 0 859 us 0 00 us dword The FLL instruction loads elements of a file with either a constant or an address data value for a given length The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated The instruction fills
148. test or program negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the voltage level normally associated with logic 1 for example 0 5V 1 0V Positive is more conventional for example 1 5V 0 network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The current at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that will allow logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 0 when evaluated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that will allow logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 1 when evaluated off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any filter adjustment applied offline Describes devices not under direct communication offset The steady state deviation of
149. that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FIFO First In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file file A collection of information organized into one group full duplex A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time Glossary hard disk storage area in a personal computer that may be used to save processor files and reports for future use high byte Bits 8 15 of a word input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies signals through input circuits to the controller inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller I O Inputs and Outputs Consists of input and output devices that provide and or receive data from the controller jump Change in normal sequence of program execution by executing an instruction
150. the controller LED status C 2 using the fault routine C 5 true glossary 7 U UID 23 9 UIE 23 10 UIF 23 12 upload glossary 7 User Interrupt Instructions 23 1 Using Expansion I O 5 1 Using Logical Instructions 17 1 wire requirements 3 1 wiring spade lug 3 3 wiring diagrams 3 8 wiring recommendation 3 2 wiring your controller 3 1 Working Screen Operation 7 14 working voltage 1764 24AWA specifications A 6 working voltage 1764 24BWA specifications A 7 working voltage 1764 28BXB specifications A 8 workspace glossary 7 write glossary 7 X XIC 12 2 12 2 XOR 17 5 Rl D i Reach us now at www rockwellautomation com Wherever you need us Rockwell Automation brings together leading brands in industrial automation including Allen Bradley controls Reliance Electric power transmission products Dodge mechanical power transmission components and Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation s unique flexible approach to helping customers achieve a competitive advantage is supported by thousands of authorized partners distributors and system integrators around the world Americas Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Rockwell European Headquarters SA NV avenue Herrmann Debroux 46 1160 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 06 00 Fax 32 2 663 06 40 As
151. the information you supply to the instruction It can be an address a value or an instruction specific parameter such as a timebase Data Files See Data Files on page 6 5 Function Files See Function Files on page 6 12 e CSF See Communications Status File on page 6 13 e ISF See Input Output Status File on page 6 17 e Addressing Level Address levels describe the granularity at which an instruction will allow an operand to be used For example relay type instructions XIC XIO etc must be programmed to the bit level timer instructions TON TOF etc must be programmed to the element level timers have 3 words per element and math instructions ADD SUB etc must be programmed to the word or long word level Programming Instructions Overview Addressing Modes The MicroLogix 1500 supports three types of data addressing Immediate Direct Indirect The MicroLogix 1500 does not support indexed addressing How or when each type is used depends on the instruction being programmed and the type of elements specified within the operands of the instructions By supporting these three addressing methods the MicroLogix 1500 allows incredible flexibility in how data can be monitored or manipulated Each of the addressing modes are described below Immediate Addressing Immediate addressing is primarily used to assign numeric constants within instructions For example You require a 10 second timer so
152. the math register operates is included with the instruction definitions G 16 System Status File Node Address Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 15 low byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File See Channel 0 General Channel Status Block on page 6 14 for more information Baud Rate Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 15 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File See Channel 0 General Channel Status Block on page 6 14 for more information Maximum Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 22 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program cycles This value indicates in 100 us increments the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller The controller compares each scan value to the value contained in 8 22 If the controller determines that the last scan value is larger than the previous the larg
153. the timed interrupt times out A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller it is programmed and operates the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the STI set point STI Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code STI 0 ER word INT status read only Error codes detected by the STI sub system are displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Table 23 11 STI Error Code Error Recoverable Fault Code Controller 1 Invalid Program File Description Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not exist 23 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual STI User Interrupt Executing UIX Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the STI mechanism completes timing and the controller is scanning the STI PEN The UIX bit is cleared when the controller completes processing the STI subroutine The STI UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an STI interrupt is executing STI U
154. then operate based on those newly loaded settings This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle Itis up to the user program to set and clear this bit SP can be toggled while the HSC is running and no counts will be lost User Interrupt Enable UIE 9 8 Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC 0 UIE bi t 0107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable HSC subroutine processing This bit must be set 1 if the user wants the controller to process the HSC subroutine when any of the following conditions exist Low preset reached High preset reached Overflow condition count up through the overflow value e Underflow condition count down through the underflow value If this bit is cleared 0 the HSC sub system will not automatically scan the HSC subroutine This bit can be controlled from the user program using the OTE UIE or UID instructions ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung User Using the High Speed Counter Interrupt Executing UIX
155. to 327 67 minutes Derivative Applies to MicroLogix 1500 PID range when Reset and Gain Range RG bit is set to 1 For more information on reset and gain see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 24 15 The derivative term rate provides smoothing by means of a low pass filter The cut off frequency of the filter is 16 times greater than the corner frequency of the derivative term Process Control Instruction PD Data File The PID instruction implemented by the MicroLogix 1500 is virtually identical in function to the PID implementation used by the Allen Bradley SLC 5 03 and higher processors Minor differences primarily involve enhancements to terminology The major difference is that the PID instruction now has its own data file In the SLC family of processors the PID instruction operated as a block of registers within an integer file The Micrologix 1500 PID instruction utilizes a PD data file You can create a PD data file by creating a new data file and classifying it as a PD file type RSLogix automatically creates a new PD file or a PD sub element whenever a PID instruction is programmed on a rung C Help GJ Controller CJ Program Files CJ Data Files Cross Reference E 00 output n INPUT s2 status E 83 BINARY E T4 TIMER E c5 COUNTER R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER E pp10 9 Force Files TEST RS a Each P
156. use a PID Loop tuner package for the best result 1 RSTune Rockwell Software catalog number 9323 1003D 24 26 Procedure Process Control Instruction 1 Create your ladder program Make certain that you have properly scaled your analog input to the range of the process variable PV and that you have properly scaled your control variable CV to your analog output 2 Connect your process control equipment to your analog modules Download your program to the processor Leave the processor in the program mode ATTENTION Ensure thatall possibilities of machine motion have been considered with respect to personal safety and equipment damage It is possible that your output CV may swing between 0 and 100 while tuning Note If you want to verify the scaling of your continuous system and or determine the initial loop update time of your system go to the procedure on page 24 29 3 Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Tq of 0 a gain K of and a loop update of 5 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feedforward 4 Get prepared to chart the CV PV analog input or analog output as it varies with time with respect to the setpoint SP value 5 Place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mo
157. what the fault is and how to correct it This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions Automatically Clearing Faults You can automatically clear a fault by cycling power to the controller when the Fault Override at Powerup bit 1 8 is set in the status file You can also configure the controller to clear faults and go to RUN every time the controller is power cycled This is a feature that OEMs can build into their equipment to allow end users to reset the controller If the controller faults it can be reset by simply cycling power to the machine To accomplish this set the following bits in the status file e 2 1 8 Fault Override at Power up e S2 1 12 Mode Behavior If the fault condition still exists after cycling power the controller re enters the fault mode For more information on status bits see System Status File on page G 1 Note You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing your own unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 to prevent reusing system defined codes The recommended values for user defined faults are FF00 to FFOF Manually Clearing Faults Using the Fault Routine The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable user faults can cause the user fault subroutine to be executed If the fault is recoverable the subroutine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The c
158. word 3 38 9 50 20 1 39 Lword 3 38 Fill File FLL 0 00 13 0 43 word 2 00 0 00 13 7 0 85 Lword 2 50 Convert from BCD FRD 0 00 12 61 1 50 Long Word addressing level does not apply Greater Than or Equal To GEQ 0 94 1 30 1 25 2 27 2 59 2 88 Greater Than GRT 0 94 1 30 1 25 2 27 2 59 2 38 High Speed Load HSL 0 00 41 85 7 25 0 00 42 95 7 75 Immediate Input with Mask 0 00 22 06 3 00 Interrupt Subroutine INT 0 16 0 16 0 25 Immediate Output with Mask 0 00 19 44 3 00 Jump JMP 0 00 039 050 Long Word addressing level does not apply Jump to Subroutine JSR 0 00 6 43 1 50 Label LBL 0 16 0 16 0 50 Less Than or Equal To LEQ 1 02 1 30 1 25 2 21 2 59 2 88 Less Than LES 1 02 1 22 1 25 2 21 2 59 2 88 LIFO Load LFL 9 50 20 00 3 38 9 50 24 00 3 88 LIFO Unload LFU 9 50 20 80 3 38 9 50 24 00 3 38 Limit LIM 5 79 6 43 2 25 11 59 12 41 4 00 Master Control Reset MCR Start 0 66 0 66 1 00 MCR End 087 087 750 Long Word addressing level does not apply F 2 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Table F 1 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Word Long Word Execution Time inus Memory Execution Time in us Memory Instruction Usage in Usage in Programming Instruction Mnemonic False True Words False True Words Masked Comparison for MEQ 1 97 2 07 1 75 2 58
159. you program a timer with a I second time base and a preset value of 10 The numbers 1 and 10 in this example are both forms of immediate addressing Direct Addressing When you use direct addressing you define a specific data location within the controller Any data location that is supported by the elements of an operand within the instruction being programmed can be used In this example we are illustrating a limit instruction where Low Limit This is an immediate value entered from the programming software Test Value TPI TPO This is the current position value of trim pot 0 e High Limit N7 17 This is the data resident in Integer file 7 element 17 TPI TPO and N7 17 are direct addressing examples 11 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Indirect Addressing 11 4 Indirect addressing allows components within the address to be used as pointers to other data locations within the controller This functionality can be especially useful for certain types of applications recipe management batch processing and many others Indirect addressing can also be difficult to understand and troubleshoot It is recommended that you only use indirect addressing when it is required by the application being developed The MicroLogix 1500 supports indirection indirect addressing for Files Words and Bits To define which components of an address are to be indirected a closed bracket T is used The following
160. 0 Programmable Controllers User Manual MVM Masked Move Instruction Type output MVM Ress Move Table 18 4 Execution Time for the MVM Instruction Mask Data Size When Rung Is Dest True False i word 7 05 us 0 00 us long word 10 58 us 0 00 us 18 4 The MVM instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination allowing portions of the destination to be masked The mask bit functions as follows Table 18 5 Mask Function for MVM Instruction Source Bit Mask Bit Destination Bit 1 0 last state 0 0 last state 1 1 1 0 1 0 Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can be a constant or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the Destination that correspond to zeros in the Mask are not altered Using the MVM Instruction When using the MVM instruction observe the following Move Instructions Source Mask and Destination must be of the same data size i e all words or all long words An example of masking is shown below for word addressing level Bit Wora 15 1 1 12 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Destination Before Move 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Source O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 70717071707 1707 1 Mask 1 a a 1 o o 0 0 4 4 417170 0704 0 Destination After Move 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 M
161. 0 system is properly grounded A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time We recommend periodically checking system operation particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the Micrologix 1500 system Transistor Output Transient Pulses 3 14 ATTENTION A brief transient current pulse may flow through transistor outputs if the external supply voltage is suddenly applied at the V dc and V dc com terminals e g via the master control relay It is a fast rate of change of voltage at the terminals that causes the pulse This condition is inherent in transistor outputs and is common to solid state devices The transient pulses may occur regardless of whether the controller is powered or running See chart on page 3 15 The transient energy is dissipated in the load and the pulse duration is longer for loads of high impedance or low current The graph below illustrates the relation between pulse duration and load current Power up transients do not exceed the times shown in the graph For most applications the pulse energy is not sufficient to energize the load To reduce the possibility of inadvertent operation of devices connected to transistor outputs adhere to the following guidelines Either ensure that any programmable device connected to the transistor output is programmed to ignore all output signals until after the transient pulse has ended filtering
162. 0 to 20 000 control read write 10 16 TOP Total Output Pulses To Be 0 word 0 to 2 147 483 647 control read write 10 1 Generated 32 bit INT OPP Output Pulses Produced PTO 0 OPP long word 0 to 2 147 483 647 status read only 10 14 32 bit INT ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 0 ADP_ long word see p 10 15 control read write 10 15 32 bit INT 10 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PTO Output OUT Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OUT Output PTO 0 OUT word INT 20r3 control read only The PTO OUT Output variable defines the output O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 that the PTO instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program When OUT 2 PTO pulses output 2 O0 0 0 2 of the embedded outputs 1764 28B XB e When OUT 3 PTO pulses output 3 00 0 0 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28B XB Note Forcing an output controlled by the PTO while it is running will cause a PTO error PTO Done DN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DN Done PTO 0 DN bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO DN Done bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DN bit operates as
163. 0 will read the existing configuration of the controllers I O Some Compact I O modules support or require configuration To configure a specific module double click on the module an I O configuration screen will open that is specific to the module 5 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual I O Forcing Input Forcing Output Forcing 5 4 One of the advanced features of the MicroLogix 1500 controller is the ability to ignore a configuration error caused by an individual I O module This capability is configured in the programming software on an individual module slot basis in the Advanced Configuration screen If the user chooses to ignore a configuration error for a certain slot and that slot has a configuration error the module will be ignored during input and output scanning I O forcing is the ability to override the actual status of the I O at the user s discretion The MicroLogix 1500 and RSLogix 500 both support I O forcing When an input is forced the value in the input data file is set to a user defined state For discrete inputs you can force an input or off When an input is forced it no longer reflects the state of the physical input For embedded inputs the controller reacts as if the force is applied to the physical input terminal Note When an input is forced in the controller it has no effect on the input device connected to the controller When an output is forced the contr
164. 010 E Ele 2 8 la Source o e jojojo ejoj jo ele Destination ele ele 15 10 Conversion Instructions 1 6 Conversion Instructions The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform conversions between binary and decimal values Instruction Used To Page DCD Decode 4 to 1 01 16 Decodes a 4 bit value 0 to 15 turning 16 3 on the corresponding bit in the 16 bit destination ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Encodes a 16 bit source to a 4 bit value 16 4 Searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer Convert From Binary Coded Converts the BCD source value to an 16 6 Decimal integer and stores it in the destination TOD Convert to Binary Coded Converts the integer source value to BCD 16 10 Decimal format and stores it in the destination 16 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Decode and Encode Instructions 16 2 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 16 1 Conversion Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files io Mode Level
165. 1 E x2 circuits stopping machine motion i Cat No 700 PK400A1 Emergency Stop St Start Suppressor 1 Push Button Qvertravel m Cat No 700 N24 m Limit Switch i 115V ac or 230V ac dc Power Supply PT Juselec9soeneosso MCR o gt 24V de Lo Hi d 1 O Line Terminals Connect to terminals Circuits of Power Supply 1764 24AWA and Line Terminals Connect to 24V dc 1764 24BWA terminals of Power Supply 2 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols 1 12 230V Deme Fuse RN o nte Krka m Mer Sa dai wel 1 Isolation Operation of either ofthese contacts will Transformer iremove power from the external I O circuits V MCR 230V ac Output Circuits Master Control Relay MCR I X1 2 stopping machine motion Cat No 700 PK400A1 Emergency Stop Suppressor Push Button Overtravel amp Start Cat No 700 N24 Limit Switch gt 0 JO MCR bee eee ewe we ee we ee ee em eM we ee MCR MCR 115V ac or po i c Circuits for UL Listing MCR 24 V de Lo Hi Circuits Line Terminals Connect to 1764 24AWA Line Terminals Connect to 24V dc or 1764 24BWA terminals terminals of Power Supply 2 12 Installing Your Controller Base Unit Mounting Dimensions Height A DIN latch open 138 mm 5 43 in DIN latch closed 118 mm 4 65 in Width B 168
166. 1 N50 48 11 35 N50 35 N50 50 3 12 N50 12 N50 48 12 36 N50 36 N50 50 4 13 N50 13 N50 48 13 37 N50 37 N50 50 5 14 N50 14 N50 48 14 38 N50 38 N50 50 6 15 N50 15 N50 48 15 39 N50 39 N50 50 7 16 N50 16 N50 49 0 40 N50 40 N50 50 8 17 N50 17 N50 49 1 41 N50 41 N50 50 9 18 N50 18 N50 49 2 42 N50 42 N50 50 10 19 N50 19 N50 49 3 43 N50 43 N50 50 11 20 N50 20 N50 49 4 44 N50 44 N50 50 12 21 N50 21 N50 49 5 45 N50 45 N50 50 13 22 N50 22 N50 49 6 46 N50 46 N50 50 14 23 N50 23 N50 49 7 47 N50 47 N50 50 15 1 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The element number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data register as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is read write or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 or the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad Important Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not ina
167. 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Bit Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 gt on 3 gt off on 3 gt off off jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on off gt 3 gt off off 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example3 on off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on off off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on 3 gt off on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 gt Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care gt rising edge falling edge Note Inputs I1 0 0 0 through I1 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used 9 21 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using the Quadrature Encoder 9 22 The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder The following figure shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution Quadrature Encoder Reset input Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation
168. 1111111114011 11 Source 1111010 1111111111110 1010100111 Destination 010 11 0 1 01 1 1 0 0 11 1 1 For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 17 1 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 17 2 17 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual NOT Logical NOT Instruction Type output NOT n Table 17 9 Execution Time for the NOT Instruction Dee Data Size When Rung Is True False word 2 20 us 0 00 us long word 7 99 us 0 00 us The NOT instruction is used to invert the source bit by bit one s complement and then place the result in the destination Table 17 10 Truth Table for the NOT Instruction Destination A NOT B Source 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 00 Destination 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 17 1 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 17 2 17 6 Move Instructions Move Instructions The move instructions modify and move words Instruction Used to Page MOV Move Move the source value to the destination 18 2 MVM Masked Move Move data from a source location to a 18 4 selected portion of the destination 18 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual MOV Move Instruction Type output
169. 12 See also Load Always on page 8 8 System Status File Power Up Mode Behavior Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 112 binary 0 or 1 control read only If Power Up Mode Behavior is clear 0 Last State the mode at power up is dependent upon the position of the mode switch state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 mode atthe previous power down If Power Up Mode Behavior is set 1 Run the mode at power up is dependent upon the position of the mode switch state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 Important If you want the controller to power up and enter the Run mode regardless of any previous fault conditions you must also set the Fault Override bit S 1 8 so that the Major Error Halted flag is cleared before determining the power up mode The following table shows the Power Up Mode under various conditions Mode Switch Position Major Error Power Up Mode Mode at Last Power Don Power Up Mode at Power Up Halted Behavior Program ale Don t Care Don t Care Program True Program w Fault R Download REM Program Program or Any REM Program False kast State REM Suspend or Suspend REM Suspend Remote REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault REM Suspend or Suspend Suspend Last State Any Mode except Run False REM Suspend i Suspend Run Run Don t Care Run Tru
170. 20 98 Ti 7 ACC 2 22 39 T44 6 21 1 18 23 49 23 73 T4 1 ACC 6 21 T4 ACC 8 17 T 1 ACC 23 49 TE 7 ACC 24 51 F 6 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using and Indirect Address ADD Instruction Addressing Source A N7 Source B T4 ACC Destination N ADD Instruction Times ADD Instruction 2 12 us Source A 5 15 us Source B 6 02 us Destination 22 04 us Total 35 33 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 XIC 0 51 us 5 15 us 5 66 us True case XIC 0 63 us 5 15 us 5 78 us False case F7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Scan Time Worksheet Calculate the scan time for you control program using the worksheet below Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion I O is used 53 us Expansion Input Words X 3 ys or X 7 5 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 10 us Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution times of all instructions in your program when executed true Program Scan Sub Total Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion I O used 29 us Expansion Output Words X 2 us or X 6 5 us if Forcing is used E Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead
171. 25 LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP word 32 bit INT 2 to 7 contro read write 9 25 OVF Overflow HSC 0 O0VF word 32 bit INT 0 to 7 contro read write 9 26 UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF word 32 bit INT 2 to 7 contro read write 9 26 OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 OMB word 16 bit binary 0107 contro read only 9 27 HPO High Preset Output HSC 0 HPO word 16 bit binary 0107 contro read write 9 28 LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0 LPO word 16 bit binary 2 07 contro read write 9 28 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 n a not applicable HSC Function File Sub Elements All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access PFN Program File Number HSC 0 PFN word INT 0107 control read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The PFN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when the HSCO count to High Preset or Low Preset through Overflow or Underflow The integer value of this variable defines which program file will run at that time A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller it is programmed and operates the same as any other prog
172. 3 12 Using Interrupts Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File Function Files pwM ST len erc par re MMi enale Address PFN Program File Number HER Error Code UIX User Interrupt Executing H UIE User Interrupt Enable HUIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled FAS Auto Start ED Error Detected SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts The Selectable Timed Interrupt STD within the MicroLogix 1500 controller provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example of where you would use the STI are PID type applications where a calculation must be performed at a specific time interval A motion application where the motion instruction PTO needs to be scanned at a specific rate to guarantee a consistent acceleration deceleration profile A block of logic that needs to be scanned more often How an STI is used is typically driven by the demands requirements of the application It operates using the following sequence 1 2 The user selects a time interval When a valid interval is set and the STI is properly configured the controller mon itors the STI value When the time period has elapsed the controller s normal operation is interrupted The controller then scans the logic in the STI pro
173. 4 1 PID Communications The communication instructions read or write data to another station 25 1 MSG SVC MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using the Instruction Descriptions 11 2 Throughout this manual each instruction or group of similar instructions has a table similar to the one shown below This table provides information for all sub elements or components of an instruction or group of instructions This table identifies the type of compatible address that can be used for each sub element of an instruction or group of instructions in a data file or function file The definitions of the terms used in these tables are listed below this example table Table 11 1 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Example Table Data Files Function Files gid Address o Mode Level Parameter z E g x amp sles I LSE HAHAE viele 21 WERE Gis BEBE Sls Els els leis 8 Source A 616 ole Source Destination ele ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DATI TPI CSF and ISF files The terms used within the table are defined as follows e Parameter The parameter is
174. 432 767 control read write 24 5 MINS Setpoint Minimum PD10 0 MINS word INT 32 768 to 432 767 control read write 24 6 OSP Old Setpoint Value PD10 0 0SP word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only 24 6 Scaled Process Variable SPV Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type UserProgram Format Access SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only The SPV Scaled Process Variable is the analog input variable If scaling is enabled the range is the minimum scaled value MinS to maximum scaled value MaxS If the SPV is configured to be read in engineering units then this parameter corresponds to the value of the process variable in engineering units See Analog I O Scaling on page 24 21 for more information on scaling Setpoint MAX MAXS Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type UserProgram Format Access MAXS Setpoint Maximum PD10 0 MAXS word INT 32 768 to 32 767 control read write If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MAXS Setpoint Maximum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its maximum value 24 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Setpoint MIN MINS Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type UserProgram Format Access MINS Setpoint Minimum PD10 0 MINS word INT
175. 485 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 0 9 Total Message Packets Received 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 0to7 Message Packet Retries 8to 15 Retry Limit Exceeded Non Delivery 12 0107 No Memories Sent 81015 No Memories Received 13 0to7 Total Bad Message Packets Received 81015 Reserved 14 to 22 Reserved Table 6 6 DF1 Full Duplex DLL Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 1 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 21015 Reserved for Modem Control Line States 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received 12 Undelivered Message Packets 13 ENQuiry Packets Sent 14 NAK Packets Received 15 ENQuiry Packets Received 16 Bad Message Packets Received and NAKed 17 No Buffer Space and Naked 18 Duplicate Message Packets Received 19 Reserved 20 Reserved for DCD Recover Field 21 Reserved for Lost Modem Field 22 Reserved 6 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Table 6 7 DF1 Half Duplex Slave DLL Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2
176. 6 o 1 S 216 5 5 5 52 60 2 510 Storage Bit Output Bit od 12 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 12 10 Timer and Counter Instructions Timer and Counter Instructions Timers and counters are output instructions that let you control operations based on time or a number of events The following Timer and Counter Instructions are described in this chapter Instruction Used To Page TON Timer On Delay Delay turning on an output on a true rung 13 4 TOF Timer Off Delay Delay turning off an output on a false rung 13 5 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay turning on an output from a true 13 6 rung The accumulator is retentive CTU Count Up Count up 13 10 CTD Count Down Count down 13 10 RES Reset Reset the RTO and counter s ACC and 13 11 status bits not used with TOF timers See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 9 29 for information on the High Speed Counter function Timer Instructions Overview Timers in a MicroLogix 1500 reside in a timer file A timer file can be assigned as any unused data file When a data file is used as a timer file each timer element within the file has three sub elements These sub elements are Status Reserved e Preset This is the value that the timer must reach before the timer times out When the accumulator re
177. 6 RES Instruction Operation When using a RES instruction with a Timer Element Counter Element Control Element The controller resets the The controller resets the The controller resets the ACC value to 0 ACC value to 0 POS value to 0 DN bit OV bit EN bit TT bit UN bit EU bit EN bit DN bit DN bit CU bit EM bit CD bit ER bit UL bit ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur 13 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 13 17 RES Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files d Mode Level E Parameter 2 SL a z OS m S 2 o 5 lo lo Io 1 1 S gt E 8 5 2 25 2 e 1810 2 5 15 5 Im LK ib la a SIGE 8 ST Structure 13 12 Compare Instructions 1 4 Compare Instructions Use these input instructions when you want to compare values of data
178. 6 13 for the file structure I O Status File 10S This file type contains information about the controller I O See Input Output Status File on page 6 17 for the file structure 6 12 Controller Memory and File Types Base Hardware Information Function File The base hardware information file is a read only file It contains a description of the MicroLogix 1500 Base Unit Table 6 2 Base Hardware Information Function File BHI Address Description BHI 0 CN CN Catalog Number BHI 0 SRS SRS Series BHI 0 REV REV Revision BHI 0 FT FT Functionality Type Communications Status File The communications status file is a read only file in the controller that contains information on how the controller communication parameters are configured and status information on communications activity Note You can use the Communications Status File information as a troubleshooting tool for communications issues The data file is structured as Table 6 3 Communications Status File Word Description 0105 General Channel Status Block 6 to 22 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block 23 to 42 DLL Active Node Table Block 43 End of List Category Identifier Code always 0 6 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 6 14 Table 6 4 Channel 0 General Channel Status Block Word Bit Description 0 Communications Channel General Status Informatio
179. 8 3 disabling 8 3 Real Time Clock Function File 8 2 REF 22 6 related publications P 2 relay glossary 6 relay contact rating table A 4 relay logic glossary 6 relays surge suppressors for 3 6 Relay Type Bit Instructions 12 1 remote packet support D 19 replacement battery B 2 disposing B 5 handling B 2 installing B 4 storing B 2 transporting B 3 replacement doors B 6 base comms door B 7 base terminal door B 6 processor access door B 6 trim pots mode switch cover door B 7 replacement kits B 1 replacement parts B 1 base comms door B 7 base terminal door B 6 processor access door B 6 terminal blocks B 8 trim pots mode switch cover door B 7 Replacement Terminal Blocks B 8 replacement terminal blocks B 8 RES 13 11 reserved bit glossary 6 response times for high speed dc inputs A 3 response times for normal dc inputs A 4 restore glossary 6 RET 21 4 retentive data glossary 6 RS 232 glossary 6 RS 232 communication interface D 1 RTO 13 6 run mode glossary 6 rung glossary 6 S safety circuits 2 5 safety considerations disconnecting main power 2 5 periodic tests of master control relay circuit 2 6 power distribution 2 5 safety circuits 2 5 save glossary 6 Index SBR 21 3 scan time glossary 6 SCL 15 7 SCP 15 8 Sequencer Instructions 20 1 sinking glossary 6 sinking and sourcing circuits 3 8 sinking wiring diagram 1764 24BWA 3 10 1764 28BXB 3 12 sourcing g
180. 9 1 O Inputs and Outputs glossary 3 identifying controller faults C 5 22 2 Input and Output Instructions 10 1 22 1 input device glossary 3 input specifications A 2 input states on power down 2 7 inrush current glossary 3 installing your controller 2 1 installing controller components 2 18 compact I O 2 25 data access tool 2 21 memory module real time clock 2 23 processor 2 19 installing your base unit on DIN rail 2 16 using mounting screws 2 17 instruction glossary 3 Instruction Descriptions 11 2 instruction set glossary 3 INT 23 7 integer key 7 4 Integer Mode 7 12 IOM 22 4 isolated link coupler installing 4 9 isolation transformers power considerations 2 6 J JMP 21 2 JSR 21 3 jump glossary 3 K keypad 7 4 L ladder logic glossary 3 LBL 21 2 least significant bit LSB glossary 3 LED Light Emitting Diode glossary 3 LEDs error with controller C 3 normal controller operation C 2 status C 2 LEQ 5 LES 4 LFL 19 15 LFU 19 18 LIFO Last In First Out glossary 3 LIM 8 lithium battery 1747 BA disposing B 5 handling B 2 installing B 4 manufacturer B 5 storing B 2 transporting B 3 local data types footnote 25 29 logic glossary 3 Logical Instructions 17 1 Logical Instructions Status Updates 15 3 17 2 low byte glossary 3 manuals related P 2 master control relay 2 8 Master Control Relay MCR glossary 4 master control relay circu
181. A SPACE Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 002E Ell ERROR An error occurred in the Ell configuration See the Error Code in the Ell Function File for the specific error 0030 SUBROUTINE The JSR instruction nesting level exceeded Correct the user program to reduce NESTING the controller memory space the nesting levels used and to meet EXCEEDS LIMIT the restrictions for the JSR instruction Then reload the program and Run 0031 UNSUPPORTED The program contains an instruction s that Modify the program so that all INSTRUCTION is not supported by the controller instructions are supported by the DETECTED controller Re compile and reload the program and enter the Run mode 0032 SQO SQC SQL A sequencer instruction length position Correct the program to ensure that OUTSIDE OF parameter references outside of the entire the length and position DATA FILE SPACE data file space parameters do not point outside data file space Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0033 BSL BSR FFL The length position parameter of a BSL Correct the program to ensure that FFU LFL LFU BSR FFL FFU LFL or LFU instruction the length and position CROSSED DATA references outside of the entire data file parameters do not point outside of Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0034 NEGATIVE VALUE A negative value was loaded to a timer fthe program is moving values to IN TIMER PRESET pres
182. Access IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO IS Idle Status is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used in the control program by an input instruction The PTO sub system must be in an idle state whenever any PTO operation needs to start The IS bit operates as follows Set 1 PTO sub system is in an idle state The idle state is defined as the PTO is not running and no errors are present Cleared 0 PTO sub system is not in an idle state it is running PTO Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED it 0 or 1 status read only The PTO ED Error Detected Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PTO 0 ER The ED bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in an error state Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in an error state 10 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PTO Normal Operation Status NS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access NS Normal Operation Status 0 5
183. Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 9 MEQ Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Data Files Function Files 1 Address Mode Level E Parameter z 5 g E El E kr e 9o 9sgorl zzmgEtLFI gOOoE5E B5 5 t amp o a S 2 5 5 5 m 52 9 Ela 2 5 2 8 Source ele ele Mask ele Compare ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 14 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual LIM Limit Test LIM Limit Test Low Lim Test High Lim Xo oua 14 8 Instruction Type input Table 14 10 Execution Time for the LIM Instructions Data Size When Rung ls True False word 6 43 us 5 79 us long word 12 41 us 11 59 us The LIM instruction is used to test for values within or outside of a specified
184. AlC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 4 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 CBL AMOO op ee EFA 61 0 02 Cable Length Connections from to External Power AIC Power Selection Supply Switch Setting Required 1761 CBL AM00 45cm 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 or 1500 port2 I no cable CBL 2 17617CBL HM02 moon to port 2 on another AIC port2 yes external 1 External power supply required un should be set to cable 2 Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking M DLL H user supplied cable B E HI ess the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch Cable Connections from External Power Power Selection Supply Switch Setting Required straight 9 25 pin modem or other communication device porti yes external 1 External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 2 Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking 4 14 Cable 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL PM02
185. Although the controller allows up to 256 elements in a file it may not actually be possible to create a file with that many elements due to the user memory size in the controller Note For each additional file created in a user program the file consumes one user word of program space plus the number of user words as determined by the file s type and number of elements 6 4 Data Files Controller Memory and File Types Data files contain status information associated with the controller external I O and all other data associated with the instructions used in ladder subroutines The data files can also be used to store look up tables and recipes Data files are organized by the type of information they contain The data file types are File File Words per File Name Identifier Number Element File Description Output File 0 0 1 The Output File stores the values that are written to the physical outputs during the Output Scan Input File 1 1 The Input File stores the values that are read from the physical inputs during the Input Scan Status File S 2 1 The contents of the Status File are determined by the functions which utilize the Status File See System Status File on page G 1 for a detailed description Bit File B 3 to 255 1 The Bit File is a general purpose file whose locations are default 3 referenced by ladder logic instructions Timer File T 3 to 255 3 The Timer File is used for maint
186. Bradley PROTECTED Gi amp ds Bir INT Center Note If an element value is being modified when the fault is detected the fault is stored until the modification is accepted or discarded Then the fault will be displayed Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT Pressing ESC while the fault is being displayed returns the DAT to its previous mode The fault is not removed from the controller just from the DAT display screen The fault that was on screen will not display again and cannot be recalled If a new fault is detected it will be displayed If the initial fault is cleared and returns at a later time the DAT will display the fault at that time Error Conditions When the DAT detects an error in its own operation it displays the error screen The error screen consists of Err and a two digit error code as shown below Allen Bradley PROTECTED ad s Bm C INT Center The DAT can experience two different types of errors internal errors and communication errors They are described in the following sections Internal DAT Errors Internal DAT errors are non recoverable When the DAT experiences an internal error it displays the error screen and the tool will not respond to any key presses Remove and re install the DAT If this does not clear the error the DAT must be replaced
187. COR Copy Files ssc uL Sesh hots ee tal cca othe epee eg eis nese eid nals Me aes Bias 19 2 FEL Fill Ete Ie lat rr 19 3 BSL Bit Shift 19 5 BSR Bit Shift Right ERE AREE el ee Pee ee 19 7 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load 0 0 00 cee ene eee 19 9 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload 19 12 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load 19 15 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload 0 0 0 0 ccc ene 19 18 20 21 22 23 24 Sequencer Instructions SQC Sequencer Compare 1 0 2 cece sr sr FRK 20 2 SQO Sequencer ee DER chat Ids A et aee 20 6 SQL Sequencer Load 5 e ER E ERE REN bes 20 10 Program Control Instructions JMP II 21 2 EBL cated hates END NR E We RA LO 21 2 JSR Jump to Subroutine rr rss a 21 3 SBR Subroutine terre bik beled cee eens 21 3 RET Return from Subroutine sssesssreeserrrrrrerrerrrr rer rs eee eee 21 4 SUS Suspend ieee SR SUR SR eR SR S S 21 4 TND Temporary End usce ve RR PA eS Ee NEL NS ner 21 5 END Program End BIN E EEUARPSIOGIpARS 21 5 MCR Master Control Reset leen 21 6 Input and Output Instructions TIM Immediate Input with Mask lsseeeeeeeeee II 22 2 IOM
188. Communication Errors If the DAT experiences a communication error the error message screen displays During these error conditions the tool will respond to the up down arrow key the bit and integer keys and the ESC key Pressing any of those keys clears the error message Any on going element modifications are discarded 7 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The DAT continually monitors the interface between the DAT and the controller to ensure a good communication path If the DAT loses communication with the controller for more than three seconds it generates an interface time out error The DAT continues to attempt to re establish communications The error screen displays until the DAT regains communications with the processor All key presses are ignored until the display clears DAT Error Codes Error Code Description Caused by Recommended Action 00 Interface time out Communication traffic Add SVC instructions to ladder program 01 02 Power up test failure Internal failure Remove and re insert the DAT If failure persists replace the unit 03 07 internal error Internal failure Remove and re insert the DAT If failure persists replace the unit 08 processor owned Another device has ownership of the Release ownership by the other device controller 09 access denied Cannot access that file because another Release file ownership by the other device has ownership device 31 34 internal error Intern
189. Control 1 Length Source m elelele 1 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Instruction Type output File Instructions Table 19 10 Execution Time for the FFL Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 20 00 us 9 50 us long word 23 00 us 9 50 us On a false to true rung transition the FFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a FIFO stack This instruction s counterpart FIFO unload is paired with a given FFL instruction to remove elements from the stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL FIFO Load CEND Source N7 10 FIFO N7 12 CDN gt Control R6 0 Length 34 Position 9 FFU FIFO Unload FIFO N7 12 Dest 11 CDND gt Control R6 0 Length 34 lt EM gt Position 9 Destination Position N7 11 N7 12 N7 13 FFU instruction unloads N7 14 data from stack N7 12 at position 0 N7 12 34 words are allocated for FIFO stack starting at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Source N7 10 OA amp C0 O FFL instruction loads data into stack 47 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7
190. Controllers User Manual Example Passthu using Two 1785 KA5s Device A Device B MicroLogix 1500 icroLogix 1500 Device D BN Node 2 PLC 5 40 with ode De 1785 KA5 Module Node 3 pir 8 i octal Link ID 6 Device C 19 2Kbaud DH485 19 2Kbaud PLC 5 40 with 19 2Kbaud 1785 KA5 Module Node 20 in Link ID 4 DH 17 6Kbaud Node 10 MicroLogix 1500 Device A to a MicroLogix 1500 Device B Using two 1785 KA5s MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 General Communication Command Data Table Address Size in Elements Channel Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address p jJ Local Bridge Addr dec 20 octal Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr dec fo Remote Station Address dec 2 Remote Bridge Link ID s 1 r Error Description No errors 25 40 This Controller 7 r Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO o Awaiting Execution EW 0 Error ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Transmitting ST 0 Message Enabled 0 Error Error Code Hex 0 Communications Instruction Channel is set to 0 since the command is sent from the MicroLogix 1500 s DH485 channel onto local Link ID 4 Local Bridge Node Address is set to 20 since it is the bridge device Link ID 4 that the command is to be sent through device D Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 n
191. Counter Instructions Use the TOF instruction to delay turning off an output The TOF instruction begins to count timebase intervals when rung conditions become false As long as rung conditions remain false the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer has timed out TOF timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following status bits Table 13 8 Timer Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example bit 13 T4 0 DN Bit DN timer done Is Set When rung conditions are true And Remains Set Until One of the rung condit accumulate Following Occurs ions go false and the d value is greater than or equal to the preset value bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung conditions are false and the rung conditions go true or when the done bit accumulated value is less than the lis reset preset value bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung conditions are true rung conditions go false ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur 13 5 MicroLogix 1500 Progra
192. D 7 2 g GND 8 1 DCD i 4 16 Recommended User Supplied Components Connecting the System These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier Table 4 5 User Supplied Components Component Recommended Model external power supply and chassis ground power supply rated for 20 4 28 8V dc NULL modem adapter standard AT straight 9 25 pin RS 232 cable see table below for port information if making own cables 1761 CBL APO0 or 1761 CBL PM02 DB 9 RS 232 Port 1 i CIS RS 485 connector Port 3 cable straight D 1 5 Ma TERM 7 2 6 Py ies 7 A 2 bolla 1 9 amp 3 4 a B 8 Ke sj 4 oI com 5 o 8 e 4 3 5 8 Q 5 2 THs GND Table 4 6 AIC Terminals Pin Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 Port 22 1761 CBL PM02 cable Port 3 RS 485 Connector 1 received line signal detector DCD same state as port 1 s DCD signal chassis ground 2 received data RxD received data RxD cable shield 3 transmitted data TxD transmitted data TxD signal ground 4 DTE ready DTR DTE ready DTR DH485 data B 5 signal common GND signal common GND DH485 dat
193. D data file has a maximum of 255 elements and each PID instruction requires a unique PD element Each PD element is composed of 20 sub elements which include bit integer and long integer data All of the examples in this chapter use PD file 10 sub element 0 24 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PID Instruction Normally you place the PID instruction on a rung without conditional logic If conditional logic is in front of the PID instruction the output remains at its last value when the rung is false The integral term is also cleared when the rung is false Note In order to stop and restart the PID instruction you need to create a false to true rung transition The example below shows a PID instruction on a rung with RSLogix 500 programming software When programming the setup screen provides access to the PID instruction configuration parameters The illustration shows the RSLogix 500 setup screen 24 4 Input Parameters Process Control Instruction The table below shows the input parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type UserProgram For More Format Access Information SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only 24 5 MAXS Setpoint Maximum PD10 0 MAXS word INT 32 768 to
194. E PV SP Forward acting E PV SP causes the control variable to increase when the process variable is greater than the setpoint Reverse acting E SP PV causes the control variable to decrease when the process variable is greater than the setpoint PV in Deadband DB Process Control Instruction Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the process variable is within the zero crossing deadband range PLC 5 Gain Range RG Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit 0 or 1 control read write When set 1 the reset TI and gain range enhancement bit RG causes the reset minute repeat value and the gain multiplier KC to be enhanced by a factor of 10 That means a reset multiplier of 0 01 and a gain multiplier of 0 01 When clear 0 this bit allows the reset minutes repeat value and the gain multiplier value to be evaluated with a reset multiplier of 0 1 and a gain multiplier of 0 1 Example with the RG bit set The reset term TT of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 01 minutes repeat 0 6 seconds repeat will be applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error will be multiplied by 0 01 an
195. Example 5 Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care gt rising edge A falling edge Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other Note functions regardless of the HSC being used 11 0 0 0 HSCO 111 0 0 1 HSCO 111 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Comments Terminals 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Bit Function Count Direction Not Used Not Used Example 1 gt off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Example 2 gt on on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Blank cells don t care gt rising edge falling edge Inputs I1 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other 9 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual HSC Mode 3 Counter with External Direction Reset and Hold Table 9 7 HSC Mode 3 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSC0 11 0 01 HSC0 11 0 0 2 5 0 11 0 0 3 HSC0 Comments Terminals 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 5 1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 gt off on off off 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 1 0 0 Example 2 gt on on gt gt off off 1 I HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 1 0 0 Example3 tn n Hold
196. Function File on page 8 2 for more information RTC Day of Week Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 53 word 0 to 6 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device See Real Time Clock Function File on page 8 2 for more information OS Catalog Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 57 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the Operating System in the controller G 23 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual OS Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 58 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series letter for the Operating System in the controller OS FRN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 59 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the FRN of the Operating System in the controller Controller Catalog Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 60 ASCII A to ZZ status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the controller Controller Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 61 ASCII AtoZ status
197. Incoming Command Pending System Status File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 0 binary Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 4 0 See Channel 0 General Channel Status Block on page 6 14 for more information Message Reply Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 1 binary Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 4 1 See Channel 0 General Channel Status Block on page 6 14 for more information Outgoing Message Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 2 binary Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 4 2 See Channel 0 General Channel Status Block on page 6 14 for more information G 19 MicroLogi
198. N Sar 7 14 Error Conditions Los devetlerssdespties Bee Qa RENATE BN DS 7 15 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Real Time Clock Operation III 8 1 Memory Module Operation sssseeseserererrerererr 8 4 Using the High Speed Counter High Speed Counter HSC Function File 0 0 0 eee rer rs ra 9 2 High Speed Counter Function File Sub Elements 9 4 HSC Function File Sub Elements 8 9 5 HSL High Speed Counter Load sssseseeeererrrrrrrrrrr rer rr een 9 29 RAC Reset Accumulated Value sssseseereerrerrrrrsrrrrr rer rr een 9 31 10 11 12 13 14 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Pulse Train Output Instruction 0 00 00 eee e 10 1 Pulse Train Output Function 0 00 00 ee e 10 1 Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function 10 6 Pulse Train Output Function File Sub Elements Summary 10 7 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 10 20 PWM Func thon c Santa oe eite e RUE ERR et ale es 10 20 Pulse Width Modulated PWM Function 10 21 Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary 10 22 Programming Instructions Overview Instruction Set a ek ea ees CE ADV M DARAUS T4 EN UO Te ale 11 1 Using the Instruction Descriptions
199. PLC5 The illustration below shows a DeviceNet network using DeviceNet Interfaces 1761 NET DNI connected to a Ethernet network using an SLC 5 05 In this configuration controllers on the DeviceNet network can reply to requests from devices on the Ethernet network but cannot initiate communications to devices on Ethernet Communications Instructions DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks DeviceNet Network B DNI g PN a E o MicroLogix 1500 22 MicroLogix 1000 Node 17 SLC 5 03 Node 10 SLC 5 05 PanelView 550 Node 5 Node 38 Node 54 Ethernet Network PLC 5E SLC 5 05 SLC 5 05 Configuring a Remote Message You configure for remote capability in the RSLogix Message Setup screen The message configuration shown below is the MicroLogix 1500 at node 12 on the DH485 network This message will read five elements of data to address N 50 0 in the SLC 5 04 controller at node 51 on the DH network The SLC 5 04 at Node 23 of the DH network is configured for passthru operation Z MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 0 General This Controller Control Bits Communication Command 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N7 0 Size in Elements 5 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel 0 Enor ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 5 Message Tra
200. Personal Computer Modem Cable L MicroLogix Eccc ii through Controller Protocol DF1 Full Duplex protocol to 1 controller DF1 Half Duplex Master protocol to multiple controllers which CE are using DF1 Half Duplex Slave protocol Optical Isolator recommended We recommend using an AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as your optical isolator See page 4 13 for specific AIC cabling information 4 4 DF1 Isolated Modem Connection Connecting the System Dr MicroLogix 1500 1761 CBL AM00 or 1761 CBL HM02 User supplied modem cable ee Modem MicroLogix 1500 provides power to the AIC or an external power supply may be used For additional information on connections using the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Constructing Your Own Modem Cable If you construct your own modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout for constructing a straight through cable AIC Modem Optical Isolator 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 TXD TXD 2 3 2 lt gt 3 2 5 GND f GND 7 5 1 CD co s 4 4 DTR DTR 20 4 6 DSR gt DSR 6 6 8 CTS CTS 5 8 7 RTS RTS 4 7
201. Programmable Controllers User Manual Remote Messages 25 14 The MicroLogix 1500 is also capable of remote or off link messaging Remote messaging is the ability to exchange information with a device that is not connected to the local network This type of connection requires a device on the local network to act as a bridge or gateway to the other network The illustration below shows two networks a DH485 and a DH network The SLC 5 04 processor at DH485 node 17 is configured for passthru operation Devices that are capable of remote messaging and are connected on either network can initiate read or write data exchanges with devices on the other network based on each device s capabilities In this example node 12 is a MicroLogix 1500 The MicroLogix 1500 can respond to remote message requests from nodes 40 or 51 on the DH network and it can initiate a message to any node on the DH network Note The MicroLogix 1000 can respond to remote message requests but it cannot initiate them This functionality is also available on Ethernet by replacing the SLC 5 04 at node 19 with an SLC 5 05 processor DH485 and DH Networks DH485 Network AIC B AIC lB node 17 lC g dE T Ee MicroLogix 1500 _ MicroLogix 1000 12 SELIN SLC 5 03 Node 10 SLC 5 04 PanelView 550 Node 5 Node 19 Node 22 Node 51 Node 40 SLC 5 04
202. QR Square Root Find the square root of a value 15 10 SCL Scale Scale a value 15 7 SCP Scale with Parameters Scale a value to a range determined by 15 8 creating a linear relationship 15 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using the Math Instructions Most math instructions use three parameters Source A Source B and Destination additional parameters are described where applicable later in this chapter The mathematical operation is performed using both Source values The result is stored in the Destination When using math instructions observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes Sources are evaluated at the highest precision word or long word of the operands Then the result is converted to the size of the destination If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow shall be handled as follows lt If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination is 32767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Sources can be constants or an address but both sources cannot be constants e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648
203. RD instruction is used to convert the BCD source value to an integer and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 16 8 FRD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files woos Address a Mode Level Parameter z E d 2 g o 21 62 82 518 522525 Source 616 SIE A 2 Destination ol ejeje ol 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 See FRD Instruction Source Operand on page 16 7 Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EIL BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files 16 6 Conversion Instructions FRD Instruction Source Operand The source can be either a word address or the math register The maximum BCD source values permissible are 9999 if the source is a word address allowing only 4 digit BCD value 32768 if the source is the math register allowing 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S 13 and the high order digit in S 14 If the source is the math register it must be directly addressed as S 13 S 13 is the only status file element that can be used Updates to Math Status Bits Table 16 9 Math Status Bits With this Bit
204. Real Time Clock When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device the new values take effect immediately The real time clock does not allow you to write invalid date or time data Use the Disable Clock button in your programming device to disable the real time clock before storing a module This will decrease the drain on the battery during storage RTC Battery Operation The real time clock has an internal battery that is not replaceable The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which shows the status of the RTC battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery will fail in less than 14 days and the real time clock module needs to be replaced When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable or a real time clock is not attached ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more than 14 days may result in invalid RTC data 8 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Memory Module Operation More than just user back up the memory module supports the following features e User Program and Data Back up Program Compare Data File Protection Memory Module Write Protection Removal Insertion Under Power User Program and Data Back up The memory module provides a simple and flexible program data transport mechanism allowing the user to update the program in the contro
205. T sets 1 the corresponding latched key bit within the DAT Function File When the F1 or F2 key is pressed a second time the DAT clears 0 the corresponding latched key bit 7 18 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Working Screen Operation Because the DAT is a communications device its performance is affected by the scan time of the controller Occasionally when there is a long scan time and the DAT is waiting for information from the controller the working screen is displayed The working screen consists of three dashes that move across the display from left to right While the working screen is displayed key presses will not be recognized Once the DAT receives the data it returns to its normal mode of operation You can minimize the effect of the working screen by adding an SVC instruction to the control program See Service Communications on page 25 24 Non Existent Elements When the DAT determines that an element number does not exist in the controller the element value displays as three dashes If the protection bit for an element is undefined the DAT will assume that the element is unprotected Controller Faults 7 14 The DAT checks for controller faults every 10 seconds When the DAT detects controller fault the display shows FL in the element number field and the value of the controller s major fault word S2 6 is displayed in the value field as shown below Allen
206. TY Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers Bulletin 1764 Controllers User Manual Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in or included with this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or part without w
207. UT2 OUT3 OUT4 j OUT6 VAC VAC GND VDC 5 OUT 9 JOUT 11 Hi L1 Wiring Your Controller 1764 24BWA Sourcing Wiring Diagram Input Terminals 24V DC IN IN 3 IN 4 IN 6 DC IN 9 IN 11 POWERCOM 0 COM2 OUT IN IN DC IN IN IN IN 10 COM 1 e e e e e e DC DC Output Terminals VA VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC OUT 5 JOUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 10 NEUT VDCO VDC 1 VDC 2 VDC 3 VDC 4 120 24QEARTH OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 JOUT 3 JOU VA GND VDC 5 LIU e S eco 3 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1764 28BXB Sinking Wiring Diagram Input Terminals DC DC DC e NOT JDC IN 1 IN 3 IN 4 IN 6 DC IN 9 IN11 JIN 13 JIN 15 USED COM 2 NOT JIN IN DC IN 5 IN IN IN 10 JIN 12 JIN 14 USED COM 1 bd Output Terminals Qe aa DC 3 CO VAC VDC 2 JOUT 3 JOUT 5 OUT 7 JOUT 9 JOUT 10 VDC 0 VDC 1 VDC 3 24v EARTH OUT 0 JOUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 4 OUT 6
208. User Program Access S 2 14 binary 0 or 1 control read write Set 1 this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When S 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e and the destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 32 bits of the result The default condition of S 2 14 is cleared 0 When S 2 14 is cleared 0 and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow e the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e the destination address contains 432 767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word if the result is positive or 32 768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word if the result is negative To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the new math overflow operation Program an unconditional instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the original math overflow operation Watchdog Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 3H Byte 2 to 255 control read write This byte value contains the number of 10 ms intervals
209. VD OUT 8 VAC JOUT 1 GND 2 VDC 4 DC 1 USED terminals are not intended for use as connection points 3 12 Wiring Your Controller 1764 28BXB Sourcing Wiring Diagram Input Terminals DC DC e e e DC NOT JDC IN IN 3 IN 4 IN 6 DC IN 9 IN 11 IN13 JIN 15 USED COM 0 COM 2 NO IN IN IN IN IN IN IN 12 JIN 14 USED COM 1 bd e e Output Terminals OO DC CO VAC VAC VDC 2 JOUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7 VAC JOUT 9 JOUT 10 VDC 0 VDC 1 VDC 3 24v EARTH OUT 0 OUT 1 JOUT 2 JOUT 4 JOUT 6 VD OUT 8 OUT 1 GND COM2 VDC4 1 00900 1 NOT USED terminals not intended for use as connection points MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Controller 1 O Wiring Minimizing Electrical Noise Because of the variety of applications and environments where controllers are installed and operating it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by input filters To help reduce the effects of environmental noise install the MicroLogix 1500 system in a properly rated i e NEMA enclosure Make sure that the MicroLogix 150
210. a A 6 DCE ready DSR DCE ready DSR termination 7 request to send RTS request to send RTS not applicable 8 clear to send CTS clear to send CTS not applicable 9 not applicable not applicable not applicable 1 On port 1 pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6 Whenever the AIC is powered on pin 4 will match the state of pin 6 2 An 8 pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2 This connector is not commercially available If you are making a cable to connect to port 2 you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen Bradley cable shown above 3 In the 1761 CBL PM02 cable pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB 9 connector 4 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Safety Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups or non hazardous locations only ATTENTION EXPLOSION HAZARD e AIC must be operated from an external power source This product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means See Safety Considerations on page 2 4 for additional information Installing and Attaching the AIC 1 Take care when installing the AIC in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the MicroLogix 1500 controller to the AIC does not interfere with the enclosure door 2 Carefully plug the terminal bl
211. accumulator counts up the direction flag will be set 1 Whenever the HSC accumulator counts down the direction flag will be cleared 0 If the accumulated value stops the direction bit will retain its value The only time the direction flag will change is when the accumulated count reverses This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in a run mode Using the High Speed Counter Mode Done MD Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access MD Mode Done HSC 0 MD bi t 0 or 1 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The MD Mode Done status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system when the HSC is configured for Mode 0 or Mode 1 behavior and the accumulator counts up to the High Preset Count Down CD Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access CD Count Down HSC 0 CD 2 2 07 status read only 1 ForMode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The CD Count Down bit is used with the bidirectional counters modes 2 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CD bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CD bit is cleared 0 Count Up CU Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access CU Count Up HSC 0 CU bi t 0107 status read only
212. accumulator value Example 4 a off 0 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 3 off on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 Clear accumulator 0 Blank cells don t care gt rising edge falling edge Note functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 4 Two Input Counter up and down Table 9 8 HSC Mode 4 Examples Inputs I1 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other Input 11 0 0 0 HSC0 11 0 01 HSC0 11 0 0 2 5 0 11 0 0 3 5 0 CE Comments Terminals 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Bit Function Count Up Count Down Not Used Not Used Example 1 gt gt gt off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example 2 on off gt on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Blank cells don t care gt rising edge falling edge Note 9 20 functions regardless of the HSC being used Inputs I1 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other Using the High Speed Counter HSC Mode 5 Two Input Counter up and down with External Reset and Hold Table 9 9 HSC Mode 5 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSC0 11 0 01 HSC0 11 0 0 2 5 0 111 0 0 3 HSC0 CE Comments Terminals
213. aches this value the DN status bit is set TON and RTO only The preset data range is from 0 to 32767 The minimum required update interval is 2 55 seconds regardless of the timebase e Accumulator The accumulator counts the Timebase intervals It represents elapsed time The accumulator data range is from 0 to 32767 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Timers can be set to any one of three time bases Table 13 1 Timer Base Settings Time Base Timing Range 0 001 seconds 0 32 767 seconds 0 01 seconds 0 327 67 seconds 1 00 seconds 0 32 767 seconds Each timer address is made of a 3 word element Word 0 is the control word word 1 stores the preset value and word 2 stores the accumulated value Table 13 2 Timer File Bit Word 15 13 121111019 1817 16 5 3 2110 Word 0 EN TT DN Internal Use Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value EN Timer Enable Bit TT Timer Timing Bit DN Timer Done Bit Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 13 3 Timer Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address ata Files A Mode Level Parameter E 2 B Sos S
214. acket contains one of the following responses successful write request successful read request with data failure with error code At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction following the target node s reply the MicroLogix 1500 controller examines the message from the target device If the reply is successful the DN bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 If itis a successful read request the data is written to the data table The MSG instruction function is complete If the reply is a failure with an error code the ER bit is set 1 and the ST bit is cleared 0 The MSG instruction function is complete 6 If the DN or ER bit is set 1 and the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared 0 the next time the MSG instruction is scanned See Examples Ladder Logic on page 25 27 for examples using the MSG instruction 25 23 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Service Communications SVC Channel Select 25 24 Under normal operation the MicroLogix 1500 controller processes communications once every time it scans the control program If you require the communications port to be scanned more often or if the ladder scan is long you can add an SVC Service Communications instruction to your control program The SVC instruction is used to improve communications performance throughput but will also cause the ladder scan to be longer Simply place the SVC instruction on a rung within the
215. aining timing information for default 4 ladder logic timing instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 13 1 for instruction information Counter File C 3 to 255 3 The Counter File is used for maintaining counting information default 5 for ladder logic counting instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 13 1 for instruction information Control File R 3 to 255 3 The Control Data file is used for maintaining length and default 6 position information for various ladder logic instructions Integer File N 3 to 255 1 The Integer File is a general purpose file whose locations are default 7 referenced by ladder logic instructions Long Word File L 3 to 255 2 The Long Word File is a general purpose file whose locations are referenced by ladder logic instructions Message File MG 3 to 255 25 The Message File is associated with the MSG instruction See Communications Instructions on page 25 1 for information on the MSG instruction PID File PD 3 to 255 23 The PID File is associated with the PID instruction See Process Control Instruction on page 24 1 for more information 6 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Protecting Data Files During Download Once a User Program is in the controller there may be a need to update the ladder logic and download it to the controller without destroying the contents of one or more Data Files in the controller This situation can occur w
216. al or move instruction in the program is executed Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access read write binary 0 or 1 status OverFlow Flag This bit is set 1 if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 0 is restored when execution resumes Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access binary 0 or 1 status read write Zero Flag This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in the destination Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 Whenever this bit is set 1 the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is also set 1 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 1 is restored when execution resumes Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is zero Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 2 is restored when execution resumes G 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable
217. al Address format not enough fields specified Description Illegal Address format too fields specified E4H PCCC Description Illegal Address symbol not found 5 PCCC Description Illegal Address Format symbol is 0 or greater than the maximum number of characters support by this device E6H PCCC Description Illegal Address address does not exist or does not point to something usable by this command E7H Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large E8H PCCC Description Cannot complete request situation changed file size for example during multi packet operation E9H PCCC Description Data or file is too large Memory unavailable EAH PCCC Description Request is too large transaction size plus word address is too large EBH Target node cannot respond because target node denies access ECH Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable 25 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 25 20 Description of Error Condition EDH PCCC Description Resource is already available condition already exists EEH PCCC Description Command cannot be executed EFH PCCC Description Overflow histogram overflow FOH PCCC Description No access F1H Local processor detects illegal target file type F2H PCCC Description Invalid parameter invalid data in search or command bl
218. al Moduessf PN 8 maximum 5 Subtotal 2 670 250 1 Refer to your Compact I O Installation Ins ructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table E 2 System Loading and Heat Dissipation Validating the System The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations The systems are valid because Calculated Current Values lt Maximum Allowable Current Values Calculated System Loading lt Maximum Allowable System Loading Table 25 7 Validating Systems using 1764 24AWA and 1764 28BXB Base Units Calculated Values Maximum Allowable Values Current 2250 mA at 5V de Current Subtotal 1 Subtotal 2 from page E 2 650 mA 670 mA 1320 mA at 5V de 120 mA 250 mA 370 mA at 24V dc 400 mA at 24V de System Loading System Loading 1320 mA x 5V 370 mA x 24V 6600 MW 8880 mW 15 480 mW 15 5 Watts 16 Watts Table 25 8 Validating Systems using 1764 24BWA Base Unit Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current for Devices Connected to the 24V Sum of all current sensors and or 1761 NET AIC connected to the 24V dc dc User Supply user supply AIC selector switch in the down position 400 mA at 24V de 150 mA at 24V dc example sensor value Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 Current Values Subtotal 1 Subtotal 2 from page E 2 2250 mA at 5V de 400 mA at 24V d
219. al failure Remove and re insert the DAT If failure persists replace the unit 1 This error can occur after a download in which communications configurations are changed This error be cleared by removing and re installing the DAT or by cycling power to the controller 7 16 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Three modules with different levels of functionality are available for use with the MicroLogix 1500 controller Catalog Number Function 1764 RTC Real Time Clock 1764 MM1 Memory Module 1764 MM1RTC Memory Module and Real Time Clock Real Time Clock Operation Removal Insertion Under Power At power up or on detection of a real time clock being inserted the controller determines if a real time clock module is present If a real time clock is present its values are written to the RTC Function File in the controller The real time clock module can be installed or removed at any time without risk of damage to either the module or the controller If a module is installed while the MicroLogix 1500 is executing the module will not be recognized until either a power cycle occurs or until the controller is placed in a non executing mode program mode or fault condition Removal of the memory module is detected within one program scan Removal of the real time clock under power causes the controller to write zeros to the RTC Function File 8 1
220. alid choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected This error Error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed 2 No No Yes Output The configured PWM output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced Forced condition must be removed for the PWM to operate Error This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 3 Yes Yes No Frequency The frequency value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error Error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Reserved Yes Yes No Duty Cycle The PWM duty cycle is either less than zero or greater than 1000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 10 26 Programming Instructions Overview 1 1 Programming Instructions Overview Instruction Set The following table shows the MicroLogix 1500 programming instructions listed within their functional group Functional Group Description Page Relay Type Bit The relay type bit instructions monitor and control the status of bits 12 1 XIC XIO OTE OTL OTU OSR ONS OSF Timer and Counter T
221. ammable Controllers User Manual UIE User Interrupt Enable Instruction Type output UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Types 4 Table 23 6 Execution Time for the UIE Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 66 us 0 00 us The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits Table 23 7 Types of Interrupts Enabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Value Corresponding Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSC0 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 23 10 Using Interrupts To enable interrupt s 1 Mo ud Select which interrupts you want to enable Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt Enter the sum into the UIE instruction For example to enable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the ru
222. ariable The difference between selecting output alarms and output limits is that you must select output limiting to enable limiting Limit and alarm values are stored in the same words Entering these values enables the alarms but not limiting Entering these values and setting the limit enable bit enables limiting and alarms Anti reset windup is a feature that prevents the integral term from becoming excessive when the control variable reaches a limit When the sum of the PID and bias terms in the control variable reaches the limit the instruction stops calculating the integral sum until the control variable comes back in range The integral sum is contained in element IS The Manual Mode In the manual mode the PID algorithm does not compute the value of the control variable Rather it uses the value as an input to adjust the integral sum IS so that a smooth transfer takes place upon re entering the AUTO mode In the manual mode the programmer allows you to enter a new CV value from 0 to 10096 This value is converted into a number from 0 to 16383 and written to the Control Variable address If your ladder program sets the manual output level design your ladder program to write to the CV address when in the manual mode Note that this number is in the range of 0 to 16383 not 0 to 100 Writing to the CV percent CVP with your ladder program has no effect in the manual mode The example on the next page shows how you can manually co
223. art ElI 0 AS binary bit control read only AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the function automatically starts whenever the MicroLogix 1500 controller enters any executing mode 23 23 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Ell Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected ElI 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set the user should look at the specific error code in parameter EII 0 ER This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 and is set and cleared automatically Ell Edge Select ES Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ES Edge Select ElI 0 ES binary bit control read only The ES Edge Select bit selects the type of trigger that causes an Event Interrupt This bit allows the to be configured for rising edge off to on 0 to 1 or falling edge on to off 1 to 0 signal detection This selection is based on the type of field device that is conne
224. ary bit contro read write 23 23 AS Auto Start EII 0 AS binary bit contro read only 23 23 ED Error Detected EII 0 ED binary bit status read only 23 24 ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit contro read only 23 24 IS Input Select EII 0 IS word INT contro read only 23 24 23 20 Ell Function File Sub Elements Ell Program File Number PFN Using Interrupts Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number ElI 0 PFN word INT control read only PFN Program File Number defines which subroutine is called executed when the input terminal assigned to EII 0 detects a signal A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller It is programmed and operates the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the EII Ell Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code EII 0 ER word INT status read only ERs Error Codes detected by the sub system are displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Table 23 13 Ell Error Codes Error Recoverable Fault Description Code Controller 1 Invalid Program File Program file number
225. ary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 whenever the discrete input filter selection in the control program is not compatible with the hardware G 14 Major Error System Status File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 6 word 0 to FFFF status read write This register displays a value which can be used to determine what caused a fault to occur See Troubleshooting Your System on page C 1 to learn more about troubleshooting faults Suspend Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 7 word 32 768 to status read write 32 767 When controller executes Suspend SUS instruction SUS code is written to this location S 7 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Suspend File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 8 word 010255 status read write When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS file is written to this location 8 8 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as
226. ask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can be a constant value or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered e Valid constants for the mask are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 18 6 MVM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Level 2 B Parameter E S a a 5 515 15 ololS E ol 2 92g o Gro A 2 5 16 5 lm rz t SS EIS EES Source o e jojojo ole ele Mask ele elelele 610 ele Destination ele 18 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Updates to Math Status Bits 18 6 After a MVM instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Table 18 7 Math Status Bits With thi
227. assis Ground Shrink Tubing Recommended Blue 3106A ASSIS roun or Blue with White Stripes 9842 Multiple Cable Connection to Previous Device to Next Device Table 4 3 Connections using Belden 3106A Cable For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue Blue Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A Table 4 4 Connections using Belden 9842 Cable For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue White White with Blue Stripe Cut back no connection Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A 1 To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the the insulation jacket is removed This wire is not used by DH485 4 10 Connecting the System Grounding and Terminating the DH485 Network Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together This connects the termination impedance of 120 2 that is built into each AIC as
228. at a time program file The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic program program mode When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs are de energized program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the scan the ladder program is executed and the Output data file is updated based on the program and the Input data file programming device Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams protocol The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network read To acquire data from a storage place For example the processor READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder program glossary 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual glossary 6 relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays restore To download transfer a program from a personal computer to a controller reserved bit A status file location that the user should not read or write to retentive data Information associated with data files timers counters inputs and outputs in a program that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits A single ended serial communication interface
229. ation about the status file Address Description CS0 4 0 Incoming Command Pending CS0 4 1 Incoming Message Reply Pending 50 4 2 Outgoing Message Command Pending CS0 4 4 Communications Active Bit Application Example The SVC instruction is used when you want to execute a communication function such as transmitting a message prior to the normal service communication portion of the operating scan 50 4 SVC 0000 4 E Service Communications MCP Channel Select 0 You can place this rung after a message write instruction CS0 4 MCP is set when the message instruction is enabled and put in the communications queue When CS0 4 MCP is set 1 the SVC instruction is evaluated as true and the program scan is interrupted to execute the service communication s portion of the operating scan The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction The example rung shows a conditional SVC which will be processed only when an outgoing message is in the communications queue Note You may program the SVC instruction unconditionally across the rungs This is the normal programming technique for the SVC instruction 25 25 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 25 26 Communications Instruction Examples Ladder Logic Enabling the MSG Instruction for Continuous Operation The MSG instruction will be enabled during the initial processor program scan and each time the MSG completes
230. ation instruction See Pulse Train Modulation Output Function on page 10 1 for more information Selectable Timed STI This file type is associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function See Using the Interrupt Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 for more information Event Input Ell This file type is associated with the Event Input Interrupt instruction See Using the Event Interrupt Input Interrupt Ell Function File on page 23 19 for more information Real Time Clock RTC This file type is associated with the Real Time Clock time of day function See Real Time Clock Operation on page 8 1 for more information Data Access Tool DAT This file type contains information about the Data Access Terminal See DAT Function File Information on page 7 6 for more information Trim Pot TPI This file type contains information about the Trim Pots See Trim Pot Information Function Information File on page 7 2 for more information Memory Module MMI This file type contains information about the Memory Module See Memory Module Information Information File on page 8 5 for more information Base Hardware BHI This file type contains information about the Base Unit hardware See Base Hardware Information Information Function File on page 6 13 for the file structure Communications cso This file type contains information about the Communications with the controller See Status File Communications Status File on page
231. ation is useful when you have an application that contains retentive data and a memory module has bit S 1 10 or bit S 1 11 set Memory Module Password Mismatch Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 9 binary Oor 1 status read write At power up if Load Always is set and the controller and memory module passwords do not match the Memory Module Password Mismatch bit is set 1 See Password Protection on page 6 9 for more information G 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual STI Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 5 10 binary 0 or 1 status read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIL See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 for more information Processor Battery Low Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 11 binary Oor 1 status read only This bit is set 1 when the battery is low Important Install a replacement battery immediately See Lithium Battery 1747 BA on page B 2 for more information Input Filter Selection Modified Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 13 bin
232. ator 1761 NET AIC recommended MI 767 08 POR I Personal Computer 25 6 Communications Instructions Configuring a Local Message B3 0 MSG 0000 Read Write Message MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen The RSLogix Message Setup Screen is shown below Descriptions of each of the elements follow 22 MSG Rung 2 0 MG11 0 oO x This Controller Control Bits Communication Command ET EN Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements Awaiting Execution EW o Channet 0 Error ER 0 Message done DN 0 Message Transmitting ST 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address IN50 Local Node Addr dec 3 27 Local Remote Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors 25 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual This Controller Parameters 25 8 Communication Command The MicroLogix 1500 controller supports six different types of communications commands If the target device supports any of these command types the MicroLogix 1500 should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported commands include Communication Command 500CPU Read Description The target device is compatible with and supports the SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix 1000 and 1500 controllers use this se
233. atus 0 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JPS Jog Pulse Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO has generated a Jog Pulse The JPS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction outputs a Jog Pulse e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction exits the Jog Pulse state Note The output jog pulse is normally complete with the JP bit set The JPS bit remains set until the JP bit is cleared 0 off PTO Jog Continuous JC Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access JC Jog Continuous PTO JJC 0 or 1 control read write The PTO JC Jog Continuous bit instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous pulses The frequency generated is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Continuous operation is only possible under the following conditions PTO sub system in idle Jog Pulse not active Enable not active The JC bit operates as follows Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous Jog Pulses e Cleared 0 The PTO sub system does not generate Jog Pulses When the Jog Continuous bit is cleared the current output pulse is truncated 10 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PTO Jog Continuous Status JCS
234. base unit is spaced properly see Controller Spacing on page 2 13 Drill holes through the template Remove the mounting template Mount the base unit Leave the protective debris strips attached until you are finished wiring the base unit and any other devices 2 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Installing Controller Components 2 18 Prevent Electrostatic Discharge ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch bus connector pins Follow these guidelines when you handle any module Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential Wear an approved wrist strap grounding device Do not touch the bus connector or connector pins Do not touch circuit components inside the module If available use a static safe work station When not in use keep the module in its static shield bag ATTENTION Be sure the base unit is free of all metal fragments before removing protective debris strips and installing the processor unit Failure to remove strips before operating can cause overheating Installing Your Controller Processor 1 Be sure base unit power is off 2 Slide the processor into the base unit using the guide rails for alignment 3 Push until a click is heard Important It is critical that the processor is fully engaged and locked into place 2 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 4 Make sure the act
235. bled 13 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual CTU Count Up CTD Count Down 13 10 Instruction Type output Table 13 14 Execution Time for the CTU and CTD Instructions Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False CTU word 7 80 us 8 40 us CTD word 8 30 us 8 30 us The CTU CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false to true rung transition When the CTU rung makes a false to true transition the accumulated value is incremented by one count The CTD instruction operates the same except the count is decremented Note Ifthe signalis coming from a field device wired to an input on the controller the on and off duration of the incoming signal must not be more than twice the controller scan time assuming 5046 duty cycle This condition is needed to enable the counter to detect false to true transitions from the incoming device RES Reset RES Timer and Counter Instructions Instruction Type output Table 13 15 Execution Time for the RES Instructions Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False RES word 4 94 us 0 00 us The RES instruction resets timers counters and control elements When the RES instruction is executed it resets the data defined by the RES instruction The RES instruction has no effect when the rung state is false The following table shows which elements are modified Table 13 1
236. calls a subsequent subroutine 5 After completion of that subroutine the processor resumes normal execution from where it was interrupted Using Interrupts When Can the Micrologix 1500 Operation be Interrupted The Micrologix 1500 only allows interrupts to be serviced during certain periods of a program scan They are e At the start of a ladder rung Anytime during End of Scan Between data words in an expansion I O scan The interrupt will only be serviced by the processor at these opportunities If the interrupt is disabled the pending bit will be set at the next occurrence of one of the three listed occasions ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung 23 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Priority of User Interrupts When multiple interrupts occur the interrupts are serviced based upon their individual priority When an interrupt occurs and another interrupt s has already occurred but has not been serviced the new interrupt will be scheduled for execution based on its priority relative to the other pending interrupts At the next point in time when an interrupt can be serviced all the interrupts will be executed in the sequence of highest priority to lowest priority If an interrupt
237. control operand is the address of BSR s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 EN DN ER UL4 not used Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates thatthe instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The data range for length is from 0 to 2048 e Source The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the last highest bit position Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 19 9 BSR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level E Parameter z E 2 B equ 8 8 Elle gt gt 282 re Ge 5 S 2 5 155 65 1 m a IGE 18 0 ST File m mm mm
238. control program When the rung is scanned the controller will service any communications that need to take place You can place the SVC instruction on a rung without any preceding logic or you can condition the rung with a number of communications status bits The table on page 25 25 shows the available status file bits Note The amount of communications servicing performed is controlled by the Communication Servicing Selection Bit CSS and Message Servicing Selection Bit MSS in the Channel 0 Communication Configuration File For best results place the SVC instruction in the middle of the control program You may not place an SVC instruction in a Fault DII STI or I O Event subroutine When using the SVC instruction you must select the channel to be serviced The channel select variable is a one word bit pattern that determines which channel is serviced Each bit corresponds to a specific channel For example bit 0 equals channel 0 When any bit is set 1 the corresponding channel is serviced Enter a 1 decimal value 1 turns on bit 0 to allow channel 0 to be serviced If you enter 0 only the DAT will be serviced Note The DAT is not a selectable channel It is always serviced when the SVC instruction executes Communications Instructions Communication Status Bits The following communication status bits allow you to customize or monitor communications servicing See System Status File on page G 1 for additional inform
239. ct Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled ACK Timeout 50 counts NAK retries 3 retries ENQ retries 3 retries Stop Bits 1 44 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using the Communications Toggle Push Button 4 2 The Communications Toggle Push Button is located on the processor You cannot access the button if the processor door or DAT is installed Use Communications Toggle Push Button to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back The Default Communications DCOMM LED operates to show when the controller is in the default communications mode settings shown on 4 1 Note Communications Toggle Push Button must be pressed and held for one second to activate Connecting the System Connecting to the RS 232 Port There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol using a point to point connection or using a modem Descriptions of these methods follow ATTENTION Chassis ground internal 24V ground and RS 232 ground are internally connected You must connect the chassis ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any devices It is important that you understand your personal computer s grounding system before connecting to the controller An optical isolator is recommended between the controller and your personal computer
240. cted to the controller The default condition is 1 which configures the EII for rising edge operation Ell Input Select IS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access IS Input Select EII 0 IS word INT control read only The IS Input Select parameter is used to configure each EII to a specific input on the controller Valid inputs are 0 to 7 which correspond to I1 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 This parameter is configured with the programming device and cannot be changed from the control program 23 24 Process Control Instruction 2 4 Process Control Instruction This chapter describes the MicroLogix 1500 Proportional Integral Derivative PID instruction The PID instruction is an output instruction that controls physical properties such as temperature pressure liquid level or flow rate using process loops The PID Concept The PID instruction normally controls a closed loop using inputs from an analog input module and providing an output to an analog output module For temperature control you can convert the analog output to a time proportioning on off output for driving a heater or cooling unit An example appears on page 24 21 The PID instruction can be operated in the timed mode or the Selectable Time Interrupt STI mode In the timed mode the instruction updates its output periodically at a user selectable rate In the STI mode the instruction should be placed in an STI
241. cumentation for this dimension 35 28 5 1 38 1 12 132 5 197 122 6 0 2 4 826 0 008 Host Controller Compact I O Compact I O Compact I O Right End Cap NOTE All dimensions are in mm inches Hole spacing tolerance End Cap He FA e Depth 85 3 35 7 Dimensions inches Transistor Output Transient Pulses Refer to page 3 14 for Transistor Output Transient Pulses A 10 0 4 mm 0 016 in Replacement Parts Replacement Parts This chapter contains the following information atable of MicroLogix 1500 replacement parts procedure for replacing the lithium battery illustrations of the MicroLogix 1500 replacement doors and terminal blocks MicroLogix 1500 Replacement Kits The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog number Description Catalog Number ESD Barrier 1764 RPL TRM1 Base Terminal Doors See page B 6 1764 RPL TDR1 Processor Access Door See page B 6 1764 RPL CDR1 Door Combination Kit 1764 RPL DR ESD Barrier Terminal Door Access Door Base Comms Door See page B 7 Trim Pots Mode Switch Cover Door See page B 7 17 Point Terminal Block for inputs on 1764 24AWA and 24BWA bases 1764 RPL TB1 See page B 8 21 Point Terminal Block for inputs of 1764 28BXB and outputs for all base 1764 RPL TB2 units See page B 8 B 1
242. d can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency being produced by the PTO sub system Note The value displayed may not exactly match the value entered in the PTO 0 OF This is because the PTO sub system may not be capable of reproducing an exact frequency at some of the higher frequencies For PTO applications this is typically not an issue because in all cases an exact number of pulses are produced PTO Total Output Pulses To Be Generated TOP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated PTO 0 TOP long word 32 bit INT 0 to 2 147 483 647 control read write The PTO TOP Total Output Pulses defines the total number of pulses to be generated for the pulse profile accel run decel inclusive PTO Output Pulses Produced OPP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OPP Output Pulses Produced PTO 0 0PP long word 32 bit INT 0 to 2 147 483 647 status read only The PTO OPP Output Pulses Produced is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor how many pulses have been generated by the PTO sub system 10 14 PTO Accel Decel Pulses ADP Using High Speed Outputs Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User
243. d to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices e g sensors switches See page 2 8 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits Wiring Your Controller 1764 24AWA Wiring Diagram Input Terminals L2 NOT JAC N IN IN IN AC IN N11 USED COM 0 COM2 OT TIN IN AC IN5 N7 IN JIN 10 USED COM 1 L1 e e e e e e L2 L1 Output Terminals d bd w s9 VA VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC UT 5 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 10 NEUT VDC 0 VDC 1 VDC2 VDC3 VDC 4 OUT 9 JOUT 11 VDC 5 20 24QEARTHIOUT 0 OUT 1 JOUT 2 JOUT 3 JOUT 4 OUT 6 VAC GND eit IOs 1 NOT USED terminals not intended for use as connection points MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1764 24BWA Sinking Wiring Diagram Input Terminals EN IN 1 IN 3 INA IN6 DC IN 9 IN 11 COM 0 2 INO IN2 DC INS IN 7 IN8 IN 10 COM 1 e DC DC Output Terminals v CC VAC VACI VAC VACI OUTS OUT7 OUT8 OUT 10 NEUT VDCO VDC1 VDC2 VDC3 VDC4 120 240 OUTO OUT1 O
244. d applied to the PID algorithm Example with the RG bit clear The reset term TI of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 1 minutes repeat 6 0 seconds repeat will be applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error will be multiplied by 0 1 and applied to the PID algorithm Note The rate multiplier TD is not affected by this selection 24 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Setpoint Scaling SC Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 control read write The SC bit is cleared when setpoint scaling values are specified Loop Update Too Fast TF Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access TF Loop Update Too Fast PD10 0 TF binary bit 0 or 1 status read write The TF bit is set by the PID algorithm if the loop update time specified cannot be achieved by the controller due to scan time limitations If this bit is set correct the problem by updating your PID loop at a slower rate or move the PID instruction to an STI interrupt routine Reset and rate gains will be in error if the instruction operates with this bit set Derivative Action Bit DA Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0
245. d stop output frequency 0 10 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PTO Jog Frequency JF Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write The PTO JF Jog Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during all Jog phases This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error PTO Jog Pulse JP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access Jog Pulse 0 or 1 control read write The PTO JP Jog Pulse bit is used to instruct the PTO sub system to generate a single pulse The width is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO function file Jog Pulse operation is only possible under the following conditions PTO sub system in idle Jog continuous not active Enable not active The JP bit operates as follows Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate a single Jog Pulse e Cleared 0 Arms the PTO Jog Pulse sub system 10 16 Using High Speed Outputs PTO Jog Pulse Status JPS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access JPS Jog Pulse St
246. ddress is set to 7 since this is the DH485 node address used by the 1785 K A5 communication interface module Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 not used because communication is from one remote capable device to another remote capable device Remote Station Address is the PLC 5 processor at node address 3 Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH network with the 1785 KA5 and the PLC 5 processor Channel 1A Link ID 2 Note Data Table Addresses the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user specified Important Set the MicroLogix 1500 s Link ID in the channel configuration screen 25 36 Communications Instruction Example 2 Passthru via DH485 Channel 0 of the SLC 5 04 Processor Device B PLC 5 40 Device C SLC 5 04 Device D ponds Modular I O Controller MicroLogix 1500 DH Link ID 2 Node 2 57 6Kbaud 485 DH85 gt O octal Node 1 Link ID 2 1 19 2Kbaud Node 1 its L Tom octal Device A or z 1761 NET AIC SLC 5 04 1 1761 NET AIC Modular I O Controller MicroLogix 1000 25 37 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual MicroLogix 1500 Processor Device D to SLC 5 04 Processor Device A via an SLC 5 04 Processor Device C Passthru using Channel 0 DH485 25 38 2 MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 121
247. de Allen Bradley PROTECTED CHEd Cds Q Bir INT Center 7 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual DAT Function File DAT configuration is stored in the processor in a specialized configuration file called the DAT Function File The DAT Function File which is part of the user s control program is shown below lt Function Files HSC PTO PwM sr Jen ATC uu Bu cs Lm 09g DP Data Access Terminal present FIP F1 key Pressed FIL F1 Key Latched F2P F2 Key Pressed H Fal F2 Key Latched H PST Power Save Timeout seconds control H DFT Data Functional Type H Firmware Major Rev tt 1 x Firmware Minor Rev 1 CN 4 Catalog Number H TIF Target Integer File L TBF Target Bit File goaoooo o oa o io o The DAT function file contains the Target Integer File the Target Bit File and the Power Save Timeout parameter These three parameters are described in the table below Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access _ Target Integer File DATO TIF Word int Control Read Only Target Bit File DAT 0 TBF Word int Control Read Only Power Save Timeout DAT 0 PST Word int Control Read Only Target Integer File TIF 7 6 The DAT can read write to any valid integer file within the controller The value stored in t
248. de then place the processor in the Run mode 6 While monitoring the PID display adjust the process manually by writing to the CO percent value 7 When you feel that you have the process under control manually place the PID instruction in the AUTO mode 8 Adjust the gain while observing the relationship of the output to the setpoint over time 24 27 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 24 28 9 When you notice that the process is oscillating above and below setpoint in even manner record the time of 1 cycle That is obtain the natural period of the process Natural Period 4x deadtime Record the gain value Return to the MANUAL mode stop the process if necessary 10 Set the loop update time and STI time interval if applicable to a value of 5 to 10 11 12 13 14 15 times faster than the natural period For example if the cycle time is 20 seconds and you choose to set the loop update time to 10 times faster than the natural rate set the loop update time to 200 which would result in a 2 second rate Set the gain K value to 1 2 the gain needed to obtain the natural period of the pro cess For example if the gain value recorded in step 9 was 80 set the gain to 40 Set the reset term T to approximate the natural period If the natural period is 20 seconds as in our example you would set the reset term to 3 0 3 minutes per repeat approximates 20 seconds
249. diating into system wiring The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device dcorL1 Suppression Device ac or de Outputs de COM or L2 If the outputs dc we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode for surge suppression as shown in the illustration that follows 24V dc Relay or Solid State dc Outputs IN4004 Diode 24V dc common Wiring Your Controller Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge suppressor all shown below These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device See the table on page 3 6 for recommended suppressors Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices Output Device Output Device Output Device Suppressor Varistor RC Network If you connect an expansion I O triac output to control an inductive load we recommend that you use varistors to suppress noise Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application The suppressors we recommend for triac outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads are a Harris MOV part number V175 LAI1OA or an Allen Bradley MOV catalog number 599 K04 or 599 K A04 Consult the varistor manufacturer s data sheet when selecting a varistor for your application For
250. discrete inputs and outputs analog inputs and outputs and in the future specialty modules The number of Compact I O that can be attached to the MicroLogix 1500 is dependent on the amount of current required by the I O modules See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page E 1 for more information on valid configurations 5 2 Using Inputs and Outputs Configuration Embedded I O Expansion I O All embedded 1 is automatically configured to factory default settings and does not require setup If you need to change the input filters for any DC input controller 1764 24BWA 1764 28BXB open RSLogix 500 1 S3 Open the Controller folder Open the I O Configuration folder Open slot 0 MicroLogix 1500 Select the embedded I O configuration tab You can change the filter settings for any of the input groups and configure the latching inputs from this screen Expansion I O must be configured for use with the MicroLogix 1500 controller Configuring expansion I O can be done either manually or automatically Using RSLogix 500 1 2 Open the Controller folder Open the I O Configuration folder For manual configuration drag the Compact I O module to the slot For automatic configuration you must have the MicroLogix 1500 controller connected to the computer either directly or over a network Click the Read I O Config button on the I O configuration screen RSLogix 50
251. dress Data Range Type User Program Format Access PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit 0 or 1 status read write The process variable out of range bit is set 1 when the unscaled process variable exceeds 16 383 or isless than zero Done DN Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only The PID done bit is set 1 for one scan when the PID algorithm is computed It resets automatically 24 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Enable EN Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only The PID enabled bit is set 1 whenever the PID instruction is enabled It follows the rung state Integral Sum IS Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access IS Integral Sum PD10 0 IS Lword 32 2 147 483 648 to status read write bit INT 2 147 483 647 ue bse 1l This is the result of the integration JEn I Altered Derivative Term AD Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access AD Altered Derivative Term PD10 0 AD Lword 32 2 147 483 648 to status read only bit INT 2 147 483 647 This
252. dvertently overwritten Note Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses N50 51 and above in this example e The DAT always starts at word 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file Target Bit File TBF 7 8 The DAT can read or write to any valid bit file within the controller The value stored in the TBF location identifies the bit file with which the DAT will interface Valid bit files are B3 through B255 When the DAT reads a valid bit file number it can access the first 48 elements 0 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits 48 95 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the first 48 elements The only bit file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TBF location The TBF location can only be changed by a program download Important Use your programming software to ensure that the bit file you specify in the TBF location as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the MicroLogix 1500 user program Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT The example table below shows how the DAT uses the configuration information with bit file number 51 DAT 0 TBF 51 e Data Address Protection Bit iia Data Address Protection Bit 0 B51 0 B51 48 24 B51 24 B51 72 1 B51 1 B51 49 25 B51 25 B51 73 2 B51 2 B51
253. e RR gt 288 eleg Ge Ela S 2 5 1655 65 e foo 1 t 5 IGE 18 0 ST File zm mm oie ole Control 1 Length Source m 1 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters BSR Bit Shift Right Instruction Type output Table 19 8 Execution Time for the BSR Instruction File Instructions When Rung Is True False 29 1 14 us word 0 00 us Unload Bit R6 15 10 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 ee INVALID 69 68 67 66 65 64 gt Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 69 to bit 32 Source Bit 1 23 06 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions 19 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 19 8 The BSR instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted right through the array then unloaded one bit at a time This instruction uses the following operands File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated e Control The
254. e 650 mA 670 mA 1320 mA at 5V de 120 mA 250 mA 370 mA at 24V dc System Loading System Loading 150 mA x 24V 1320 mA x 5V 370 mA x 24V 3600 mW 6600 mW 8880 mW 19 080 mW 22 Watts 19 1 Watts 1 No current is consumed from the controller when the AIC is powered by an external source E 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual System Loading Worksheet The tables below are provided for system loading validation See System Loading Example Calculations on page E 2 for an illustration of system loading validation Current Loading Table 25 9 Calculating the Current for MicroLogix Accessories Device Current Requirements Calculated Current Catalog Number at 5V de mA at 24V de mA at 5V dc mA at 24V de mA 1764 LSP 300 0 1764 DAT 350 0 1761 NET AIC when powered by the base unit communications port selector switch in the up position 0 120 Subtotal 1 1 These are optional accessories Current is consumed only if the accessory is installed Table 25 10 Calculating the Current for Expansion I O 1 Ra B nxA nxB Device Current Requirements Calculated Current Catalog Number Number of Modules at 5V dc mA at 24V dc mA at 5V dc mA at 24V dc mA 1769 6 15 Q0 1769 IM12 100 0 1769 1016 1 115 0 1769 8 145 0 1769 16 1 200 0 1769 OV16 200 0
255. e batteries shipped together within the United States are specified by the Department of Transportation DOT in the Code of Federal Regulations CFR49 Transportation An exemption to these regulations DOT E7052 covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids This exemption authorizes transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle rail freight cargo vessel and cargo only aircraft providing certain conditions are met Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted A special provision of DOT E7052 11th Rev October 21 1982 par 8 a provides that Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173 22a in any of these packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received The Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR 173 22a relates to the use of packaging authorized under exemptions In part it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries such as the IATA Articles Regulations of the International Air Transport Association Geneva Switzerland Important Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically revised
256. e memory module CORRUPT 0004 MEMORY While the controller was powered up ROM Cycle power on your unit Then INTEGRITY or RAM became corrupt re download your program and ERROR start up your system Referto proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1 Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0006 MEMORY The memory module hardware faulted or Upgrade the OS to be compatible MODULE the memory module is incompatible with with memory module Es OS Obtain a new memory module C 6 Troubleshooting Your System Error Code Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0007 MEMORY Failure during memory module transfer Re attempt the transfer If the error MODULE persists replace the memory module TRANSFER ERROR 0008 FATAL INTERNAL An unexpected software error occurred Cycle power on your unit Then SOFTWARE re download your program and re ERROR initialize any necessary data Start up your system Referto proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using surge suppressors in chapter 1 Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0009 FATAL INTERNAL An unexpected hardware error occurred Cycle power on your unit Then HARDWARE re download your program and re ERROR initialize any necessary data Start up your system Referto proper grounding guidelines in chapter 2 and using
257. e where you route it and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed When the communication cable is installed you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future The following sections will help you understand and plan the network Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m 4000 ft This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node on the network Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference Keep the communication cable at least 1 52 m 5 ft from any electric motors transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces or sources of microwave radiation If you must run the cable across power feed lines run the cable at right angles to the lines D 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 15 m 6 in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 30 m 1 ft from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 60 m 2 ft from lines of 100k VA or more If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 08 m 3 in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 15 m 6 in
258. e Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation 2 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Safety Considerations Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others as well as the condition of your equipment is of primary importance We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations Hazardous Location Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only The following ATTENTION statement applies to use in hazardous locations ATTENTION EXPLOSION HAZARD e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2 e Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous This product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means Use only the following communication cables in Class I Division 2 hazardous locations Environment Classification Communication Cables Class I Division 2 Hazardous E
259. e Don t Care Don t Care Run w Fault 1 Run w Fault is a fault condition just as if the controller were in the Program w Fault mode outputs are reset and the controller program is not being executed However the controller will enter Run mode as soon as the Major Error Halted flag is cleared See also Mode Behavior on page 8 8 G 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Major Error Halted Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 113 binary 0 or 1 status read write The controller sets 1 this bit when a major error is encountered The controller enters a fault condition and word S 6 contains the Fault Code that can be used to diagnose the condition Any time bit S 1 13 is set the controller turns all outputs off and flashes the FAULT LED or enters the User Fault Routine allowing the control program to attempt recovery from the fault condition If the User Fault Routine is able to clear S 1 13 and the fault condition the controller continues to execute the control program If the fault cannot be cleared the outputs are cleared and the controller exits its executing mode and the FAULT LED flashes ATTENTION If you clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 when the controller mode switch is in the RUN position the controller immediately enters the RUN mode Future Access OEM Lock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access
260. e HSC function and also contains sections on the HSL and RAC instructions as follows High Speed Counter HSC Function File on page 9 2 HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 9 29 e RAC Reset Accumulated Value on page 9 31 9 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual High Speed Counter HSC Function File 9 2 Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a HSC Function File with two elements HSCO and HSCI These elements provide access to HSC configuration data and also allows the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the High Speed Counters Note NOTE If the controller mode is run the data within sub element fields may be changing 3 Function Files HSC Pwm sm el PFN Program File Number r ER Error Code HUX User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable HUIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending FE Function Enabled HAS Auto Start ED Error Detected CE Counting Enabled SP Set Parameters LPM Low Preset Mask HPM High Preset Mask UFM Underflow Mask OFM Overflow Mask LPI Low Preset Interrupt HPI High Preset Interrupt UFI Underflow Interrupt OFI Overflow Interrupt LPR Low Preset Reached HPR High Preset Reached DIR Count Direction UF Underflow OF Overflow MD Mode Done CD Count Down CU Count Up MOD HSC Mode HACC Accumulator HIP High Preset 2147483647
261. e POWER and RUN LEDs are on If a force condition is active the FORCE LED turns on and remains on When an Error Exists If an error exists within the controller the controller LEDs operate as described in the following tables If the LEDS The Following Probable Recommended Action indicate Error Exists Cause All LEDS No input No Line Verify proper line voltage and off power or Power connections to the controller power supply Power This problem can occur intermittently error Supply if power supply is overloaded when Overloaded output loading and temperature varies If the LEDS The Following Probable Recommended Actlon indicate Error Exists Cause Power and Hardware faulted Processor Cycle power Contact your local Allen FAULT LEDs on Hardware Bradley representative if the error solid Error persists Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller If the LEDS The Following Probable Recommended Action indicate Error Exists Cause Power LED on Application fault Hardware 1 Monitor Status File Word 5 6 for and FAULT LED Software major error code See page C 6 for flashing Major Fault more information Detected 2 Remove hardware software condition causing fault 3 Clear Major Error Halted flag bit S2 1 13 4 Attempt a controller Run mode entry If unsuccessful repeat recommended action steps above or contact your local Allen Bradley distributor C 3 MicroLogix 1500 Prog
262. e base unit The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup 9 27 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual High Preset Output HPO Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HPO High Preset Output HSC 0 HPO 16 bit binary control read write The HPO High Preset Output defines the state 1 ON or 0 OFF of the outputs on the MicroLogix 1500 base when the high preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 9 27 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the high preset being reached The high output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Low Preset Output LPO 9 28 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0 LPO word 16 bit binary control read write The LPO Low Preset Output defines the state 1 0 off of the outputs on the MicroLogix 1500 base when the low preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 9 27 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the low preset being reached The low output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL in
263. e for each instruction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time Table F 1 on page F 2 lists the execution times and memory usage for the programming instructions These values depend on whether you are using word or long word as the data format 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Table F 1 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Word Long Word Execution Time inus Memory Execution Time in us Memory Instruction Usage in Usage in Programming Instruction Mnemonic False True Words False True Words Add ADD 0 00 2 12 3 25 0 00 10 82 3 50 And AND 0 00 2 00 2 75 0 00 8 20 3 00 Bit Shift Left BSL 0 00 29 1 08 word 3 75 Lari Won adden level doce n t apply Bit Shift Right BSR 0 00 29 1 14 word 3 75 Clear CLR 0 00 1 18 1 00 0 00 5 49 1 00 File Copy COP 0 00 16 0 7 word 2 00 Count Down CTD 8 30 8 30 2 38 Count Up CTU 840 780 238 Long Word addressing level does not apply Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 0 00 1 68 1 88 Divide DIV 0 00 9 95 2 00 0 00 32 92 3 50 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 0 00 6 90 1 50 Word addressing level does not apply Equal EQU 0 94 1 30 1 25 1 41 2 27 2 63 FIFO Load FFL 9 50 20 00 3 38 9 50 23 00 3 88 FIFO Unload FFU 9 50 18 0 727
264. e modem Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi drop Link D 6 When communication is between either your programming software and a MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers via a slave to slave connection on a larger multi drop link the devices depend on a DF1 Master to give each of them polling permission to transmit in a timely manner As the number of slaves increases on the link up to 254 the time between when your programming software or the MicroLogix 1500 Controller is polled also increases This increase in time may become larger if you are using low baud rates As these time periods grow the following values may need to be changed to avoid loss of communication programming software increase poll timeout and reply timeout values e MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controller increase poll timeout Understanding the Communication Protocols Ownership Timeout When a program download sequence is started by a software package to download a ladder logic program to a MicroLogix 1500 controller the software takes program ownership of the processor Program ownership prevents other devices from reading from or writing to the processor while the download is in process Once the download is completed the programming software returns the program ownership to the controller so other devices can communicate with it again The controller clears the program o
265. e see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level T Parameter z E ols S e 5 1515 S ESSE t SS EIS 2 S Counter Number Source eoo MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 9 32 Using High Speed Outputs 1 0 Using High Speed Outputs The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans Instruction Used To Page PTO Pulse Train Output Generate stepper pulses 10 1 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Generate PWM output 10 20 PTO Pulse Train Output Instruction Instruction Type output Table 10 1 Execution Time for the PTO Instruction When Rung Is True 75 11 us False 214 us Pulse Train Output Function A controller utilizing a 1764 28BXB Base Unit supports two high speed outputs These outputs can be used as standard outputs not high speed or individually configured for PTO or PWM operation The PTO functionality allows a simple motion profile or pulse profile to be generated directly from the controller The pulse profile has three primary components Total number of pulses to be generated e Accelerate decelerate intervals Runinterval 10 1 MicroLogi
266. ead write 10 25 OFS PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM 0 OFS INT 20 000 status read only 10 25 DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM 0 DC word INT 1101000 control read write 10 25 DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS INT 1 to 1000 status read only 10 26 ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2105 status read only 10 26 PWM Output OUT Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OUT PWM Output PWM 0 OUT word INT 20r3 status read only The PWM OUT Output variable defines the physical output O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 that the PWM instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program PWM modulates output 2 O0 0 0 2 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB PWM modulates output 3 O0 0 0 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB 10 22 PWM Run Status RS Using High Speed Outputs Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program Set 1 Whenever the PWM instruction is within the run phase of the output profile e Cleared 0 Whenever the PWM instruction is not within the run
267. ed 0 PWM has completed or the rung preceding the PWM is false PWM Output Frequency OF Using High Speed Outputs Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 OF word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write The PWM OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PWM function This frequency can be changed at any time PWM Operating Frequency Status OFS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OFS PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM 0 0FS word INT 0 to 20 000 status read only The PWM OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PWM sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency produced by the PWM sub system PWM Duty Cycle DC Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM 0 DC word INT 1 to 1000 control read write The PWM DC Duty Cycle variable controls the output signal produced by the PWM sub system Changing this variable in the control program changes the output waveform Typical values and output waveform e 1000 100 Output ON constant no waveform 750 75 Output ON 25 output OFF e DC 500 50 Output ON 50 output
268. ed the data in N50 100 is used define the data file to be used for the COP instruction If the value of location N50 100 27 this instruction will copy 15 elements of data from N27 10 N27 10 N27 24 to N7 0 N7 0 N7 14 Note Ifanumber larger than 255 is placed in N50 100 in this example a controller fault will occur This is because the controller has a maximum of 255 data files In addition the file defined by the indirection should match the file type defined by the instruction in this example an integer file Note This example also illustrates how to perform a limit check on the indirect address The limit instruction at the beginning of the rung is monitoring the indirect element If the data at N50 100 is less than 10 or greater than 25 the copy instruction will not be processed This procedure can be used to make sure an indirect address does not access data an unintended location 11 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 11 6 Indirect Addressing of Bit B3 0 B3 0 4 C2 I B25 0 10 e Address B3 B25 0 e Description In this example the element to be used for the indirection is B25 0 The data in B25 0 defines the bit within file B3 If the value of location B25 0 1017 the XIC instruction will be processed using B3 1017 Note If a number larger than 4096 or the number of elements in the data file is placed in B25 0 in this example data integrity cannot be guarant
269. ed Forward Bias PD10 0 FF word INT 16 383 to 416 383 contro read write 24 18 SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only 24 14 AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit 0 or 1 contro read write 24 14 CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit 0 or 1 contro read write 24 14 DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 24 15 RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit 0 or 1 contro read write 24 15 SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 contro read write 24 16 TF Loop Update Too Fast PD10 0 TF binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 24 16 DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit 0 or 1 contro read write 24 16 UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 24 16 LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 24 17 SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 24 17 PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 24 17 DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 24 17 EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 24 18 IS Integral Sum PD10 0 IS Lword 32 2 147 483 648 to status read write 24 18 bit INT 2 147 483 647 AD Altered Derivative Term PD10 0 AD Lword 32 2 147 483 648 to status read only 24 18 bit INT 2 147 483 647 24 10 Process Control Instruction Controller Gain K Tuning Parameter Descript
270. ed to compensate for disturbances that may affect the CV output 24 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Scaled Error SE Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 32 767 status read only Scaled error is the difference between the process variable and the setpoint The format of the difference E SP PV or E PV SP is determined by the control mode CM bit See Control Mode CM on page 24 14 Automatic Manual AM Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write The auto manual bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When off 0 it specifies automatic operation When on 1 it specifies manual operation In automatic operation the instruction controls the control variable CV In manual operation the user control program controls the CV During tuning set this bit to manual Note Control Mode CM 24 14 Output limiting is also applied when in manual Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write Control mode or forward reverse acting toggles the values E SP PV and
271. eed Exceeding the number of elements in the data file would cause the file boundary to be crossed These are only some of the examples that can be used others include File and Element Indirection N N10 N25 0 Input Slot Indirection I N7 0 0 Each group of instructions may or may not allow indirection Please review the compatibility table for each instruction to determine which elements within an instruction support indirection Important You must exercise extreme care when using indirect addressing Always be aware of the possibility of crossing file boundaries or pointing to data that was not intended to be used Relay Type Bit Instructions 1 2 Relay Type Bit Instructions Use relay type bit instructions to monitor and or control bits in a data file or function file such as input bits or timer control word bits The following instructions are described in this chapter Instruction Used To Page XIC Examine if Closed Examine a bit for an ON condition 12 2 XIO Examine if Open Examine a bit for an OFF condition 12 2 OTE Output Enable Turn ON or OFF a bit non retentive 12 4 OTL Output Latch Latch a bit ON retentive 12 5 OTU Output Unlatch Unlatch a bit OFF retentive 12 5 ONS One Shot Detect an OFF to ON transition 12 7 OSR One Shot Rising Detect an OFF to ON transition 12 8 OSF One Shot Falling Detect an ON to OFF transition 12 8 These instructions operate on a sing
272. el Identifies the physical channel used for the message communication Always channel 0 Target Message Defines the length of the message timer in seconds A timeout of 0 seconds means that there is no Device Timeout timer and the message will wait indefinitely for a reply Valid range is 0 255 seconds Data Table For a Read Source this is the address in the target processor which is to send data Address For a Write Destination this is the address in the target processor which is to receive data Valid file types are S B T I and L See Valid File Type Combinations below Local Node Specifies the node number of the processor that is receiving the message Valid range is 0 31 for Address DH485 protocol or 0 254 for DF1 Half and Full Duplex protocols Local Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote Valid File Type Combinations For 500CPU messages the only valid combinations of local file types and target file types are Local Data Types Target Data Types Ol I B N L O S N L T T R R 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages Mixing file types of different size elements is not allowed except for one word elements I S B and two word elements L 25 29 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example 2 Local Read from a 485CIF i MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 General This Controlle
273. em or Master Password to go on line with the controller To do so 1 Enter 65257636 the telephone keypad equivalent of MLCLRMEM MicroLogix Clear Memory 2 When the Programming Software detects this number has been entered it asks if you want to clear the memory in the controller 3 If you reply yes to this prompt the programming software requests the control ler to clear its User Program memory Controller Memory and File Types Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock The controller supports a feature which allows you to select if future access to the User Program should be allowed or disallowed after it has been transferred to the controller The Allow Future Access setting is shown in the Controller Properties window This setting corresponds to bit S 1 14 in the Status File where 0 means future access is allowed Allow Future Access selected and 1 means future access is disallowed Allow Future Access deselected Controller Properties Ea General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications Allow Indexing Acre Enable Single Step test Enable Force Protectan When deselected the controller requires that the User Program in the controller is the same as the one in a programming device If the programming device does not have a matching copy of the User Program access to the User Program in the controller is denied Note Functions such as change mode clear memory restore program and tra
274. emiconductor devices inside the base unit Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas 2 14 Installing Your Controller Note If additional I O modules are required for the application remove the ESD barrier to install expansion I O modules A maximum of 8 I O modules may be connected to the base The I O module s current requirements and power consumption may further limit the number of modules connected to the base See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page E 1 An end cap terminator catalog number 1769 ECR is required at the end of the group of I O modules attached to the base Using a DIN Rail The base unit and expansion I O DIN rail latches lock in the open position so that an entire system can be easily attached to or removed from the DIN rail The maximum extension of the latch is 15 mm 0 67 in in the open position A flat blade screw driver is required for removal of the base unit The base can be mounted to EN50022 35x 7 5 or EN50022 35x15 DIN rails DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown below DIN Rail Latch Dimension A Height DIN latch open 138 mm 5 43 in DIN latch closed 118 mm 4 65 in B 47 6 mm 1 875 in C 47 6 mm 1 875 in DIN latch closed 54 7 mm 2 16 in DIN latch open 2 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual To install your base unit on the DIN rail 1 Mount your DIN
275. ent Battery 3 Input LEDs 9 Battery 4 Output LEDs 10 Terminal Doors and Label 5 Communication Port 11 Data Access Tool 6 Status LEDs 12 Mode Switch Trim Pots 1 Optional MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Component Descriptions A controller is composed of a standard processor 1764 LSP and one of the base units listed below The FET transistor and relay outputs are available on the 1764 28BXB base only Base Units Catalog Number Base Unit I O and Power Supply 1764 24AWA Twelve 120V ac inputs twelve relay outputs and 120 240V ac power supply 1764 24BWA Twelve 24V dc inputs twelve relay outputs and 120 240V ac power supply 1764 28BXB Sixteen 24V dc inputs six FET and six relay outputs and 24V dc power supply Hardware Overview Processor Catalog Number 1764 LSP Data Access Tool Catalog Number 1764 DAT Shown mounted on a Processor Unit MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Memory Modules Real Time Clock Catalog Number 1764 MM1RTC 1764 MM1 1764 RTC Shown mounted in a Processor Unit Expansion I O Compact expansion I O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1500 Controller A maximum of eight I O modules may be connected to the base See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page E 1 for more information on system configurations End Cap An end cap terminator catalog number 1769 ECR must be used at the end of the group of I O
276. eout control is in effect whenever the message timeout is nonzero It defaults to 5 seconds so unless you change it the internal timeout control is automatically enabled When the internal timeout is used and communications are interrupted the MSG instruction will timeout and error after the set period of time expires This allows the control program to retry the same message or take other action if desired To disable the internal timeout control enter zero for the MSG instruction timeout parameter If communications are interrupted the processor will wait forever for a reply If an acknowledge ACK is received indicated by the ST bit being set but the reply is not received the MSG instruction will appear to be locked up although it is actually waiting for a reply from the target device Enable EN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EN Binary On Off Control Read Write The Enable Bit EN is set when rung conditions go true and the MSG is enabled The MSG is enabled when the command packet is built and put into one of the MSG buffers or the request is put in the MSG queue It remains set until the message transmission is completed and the rung goes false You may clear this bit when either the ER or DN bit is set in order to re trigger a MSG instruction with true rung conditions on the next scan Important Do not set this bit from the control program Communications Instruction
277. er operation This instruction uses the following operands File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents are received on an element by element basis from the source e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position sequencer file The address level of the source must match the sequencer file If file is a word type then source must be a word type If file is a long word type then source must be a long word type The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word e Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 REIR ELEC EN pN 2 FD not used Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN 2 DN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false 3 ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value
278. er value is stored in S 22 Resolution of the maximum observed scan time value is 100 us to 0 us For example the value 9 indicates that 800 to 900 us was observed as the longest program cycle Interrogate this value if you need to determine the longest scan time of your program G 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual User Fault File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 20 word 0 to 255 status read only This register is used to control which subroutine executes when a User Fault is generated STI Setpoint Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 30 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 SPM See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 for more information STI File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 81 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 PEN See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 for more information G 18 Channel 0 Communications
279. es Input Terminals Function 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 4 HSC1 Count 10 07 ASCO 11 0 0 5 HSC1 Not Used 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 6 HSC1 Not Used 11 0 0 3 HSCO 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Not Used CE Bit Comments Example 1 I on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 1 gt off 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value Blank cells don t care gt rising edge falling edge 9 18 Note Inputs 11 0 0 0 through I1 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 1 Up Counter with External Reset and Hold Table 9 5 HSC Mode 1 Examples Using the High Speed Counter Note functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 2 Counter with External Direction Table 9 6 HSC Mode 2 Examples Input Input 11 0 0 0 HSC0 11 0 01 HSC0 11 0 0 2 5 0 111 0 0 3 5 0 CE Comments Terminals 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 5 1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 5 1 Function Count Not Used Reset Hold Example 1 gt on off off Jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 0 Example 2 on 3 gt off on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example3 d off 0 Hold accumulator value Example 4 on off on off Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0
280. es For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Addr Addri Data Files Function Files due ddress o Mode Level E o B Parameter 5 ols P Sk amp a bi Fiels 9 2 9 gle liS lel 8 25 1555 _ la e le 4 S IE 5 la a IS EB 0 52 8 FIFO mm mm AER EE Destination IE mm mm Control 1 Length Position 1 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters 19 14 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Instruction Type output Table 19 14 Execution Time for the LFL Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False word 20 00 us 9 50 us long word 24 00 us 9 50 us File Instructions On a false to true rung transition the LFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a LIFO stack This instruction s counterpart LIFO unload LFU is paired with a given LFL instruction to remove elements from the LIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below LEL LIFO LOAD Source N7 10 LIFO N7 12 Control R6 0 EM Length 34 Position 9 LEU LIFO UNLOAD EU LIFO N7 12 Dest N7 11 Control R6 0 40M Length 34 Position 9 Destination N7 11
281. es the physical channel used for the message communication Always channel 0 25 32 Communications Instruction Target Message Defines the length of the message timer in seconds A timeout of 0 seconds means that there is no Device Timeout timer and the message will wait indefinitely for a reply Valid range is 0 255 seconds Data Table For a Read Source this is the address in the target processor which is to send data Address Valid file types are S B T and L See Valid File Type Combinations below For a Write Destination this is the address in the target processor which is to receive data Valid file types are S B T C R N I O and L See Valid File Type Combinations below Local Node Specifies the node number of the processor that is receiving the message Valid range is 0 31 for Address DH485 protocol or 0 254 for DF1 protocol Local Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote Valid File Type Combinations For PLC 5 messages the only valid combinations of local file types and target file types are Local File Types Target File Types Ol I B N L 0 1 5 N L T T C C R R 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages Mixing file types of different size elements is not allowed except for one word elements I S B and and two word elements L 25 33 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers
282. ess of the stack Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the LIFO stack The LFU instruction unloads this value from the last location on the LIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a word size file destination must be a word size file If LIFO is a long word size file destination must be a long word size file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words TEETH ER RU Word 0 pN EM2 not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or double words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates LIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the LIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word Position This is the next location in the LIFO stack where data will be unloaded Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 128 word or 0 to 64 long word The position
283. essage instruction was in the queue the data that is actually sent out of the controller may be different than what was present when the message instruction was first processed The buffer and queue mechanisms are completely automatic Buffers are allocated and released as the need arises and message queuing occurs if buffers are full Communications Instructions The MicroLogix 1500 controller initiates read and write messages through channel 0 when configured for the following protocols e DFI Full Duplex and DF1 Half Duplex Slave DH485 For a description of valid communication protocols see Understanding the Communication Protocols on page D 1 The Message Instruction The message instruction is an output instruction Any preceding logic on the message rung must be solved true before the message instruction can be processed The example below shows a Micrologix 1500 message instruction B3 0 MSG 0000 JE Read Write Message gt MSG File MG11 0 CDN Setup Screen CER gt If B3 0 is on 1 the MSG rung is true and MG11 0 will be processed If one of the four buffers is available the message and its associated data will be processed immediately Note How quickly the message is actually sent to the destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channel s communication protocol the baud rate of the communications port the number of retries needed if any and the desti
284. et from by the same amount This proves the linearity of your process The following example shows an offset pro gression of fifteen CO 20 PV 3596 CO 4096 PV 5596 CO 6096 PV 7596 CO 80 PV 9596 If the values you recorded are not offset by the same amount e Either your scaling is incorrect or the process is not linear or your equipment is not properly connected and or configured Make the necessary corrections and repeat steps 2 10 24 29 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Determining the Initial Loop Update Time To determine the approximate loop update time that should be used for your process perform the following 1 Place the normal application values in MinS and 2 Type 50 in 3 Type 60 in and immediately start your stopwatch 4 Watch the PV When the PV starts to change stop your stopwatch Record this value Itis the deadtime 5 Multiply the deadtime by 4 This value approximates the natural period For example if deadtime 3 seconds then 4 x 3 12 seconds s natural period 6 Divide the value obtained in step 5 by 10 Use this value as the loop updated time For example if natural period 12 seconds then 12 10 1 2 seconds Therefore the value 120 would be entered as the loop update time 120 x 10 ms 1 2 seconds 7 Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Tq of 0 a gain K of 1 a
285. et or accumulator the accumulated or preset word of OR a timer make certain these values ACCUMULATOR are not negative Reload the program and enter the Run mode C 10 Troubleshooting Your System Error Code uon Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0035 ILLEGAL The program contains a Temporary End Correct the program INSTRUCTION IN TND Refresh REF or Service Re ile reload th INTERRUPT FILE Communication instruction in an interrupt meg omble reload the program subroutine STI Ell HSC or user fault routine 0036 INVALID PID An invalid value is being used for a PID See page 24 1 Process Control PARAMETER instruction parameter Instruction for more information about the PID instruction 0037 HSC ERROR An error occurred in the HSC configuration See the Error Code in the HSC Function File for the specific error 003B PTO ERROR An error occurred in the PTO instruction See the Error Code in the PTO configuration Function File for the specific error 003C PWM ERROR An error occurred in the PWM instruction See the Error Code in the PWM configuration Function File for the specific error 003D INVALID A sequencer instruction SQO SQC SQL Correct the user program then re SEQUENCER length position parameter is greater than compile reload the program and LENGTH 255 enter the Run mode POSITION 003E INVALID BIT ABSR or BSL instruction length parameter
286. event input interrupt is a feature that allows the user to scan a specific program file subroutine when an input condition is detected from a field device Within the function file section of RSLogix 500 the user sees an folder Within the folder are four elements Each of these elements EII 0 EII 1 EII 2 and EII 3 are identical this explanation uses 0 Each EII can be configured to monitor any one of the first eight inputs I1 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 Each can be configured to detect rising edge or falling edge input signals When the configured input signal is detected at the input terminal the controller immediately scans the configured subroutine 23 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File Sub Elements Summary Table 23 12 Event Input Interrupt Function File Ell 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number EII 0 PFN word INT contro read only 23 21 ER Error Code EII 0 ER word INT status read only 23 21 UIX User Interrupt Executing ElI 0 UIX binary bit status read only 23 22 User Interrupt Enable ElI 0 UIE binary bit contro read write 23 22 UIL User Interrupt Lost EII 0 UIL binary bit status read write 23 22 UIP User Interrupt Pending ElI 0 UIP binary bit status read only 23 23 EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EII O EIE bin
287. examples illustrate how to use indirect addressing Indirect Addressing of a Word B3 0 ADD 0000 JE Add 0 Source N7 N10 1 0 lt Source B 1234 1234 lt Dest N11 33 0 lt e Address N7 N10 1 e In this example the element number to be used for source ADD instruction is defined by the number located in N10 1 If the value of location N10 1 15 the ADD instruction will operate as N7 15 Source B When the ADD instruction is scanned N10 1 specifies the element to be used in the ADD instruction e Inthis example integer file 7 is the source A file The element specified by N10 1 must be between 0 and 255 because all MicroLogix 1500 data files have a maximum size of 256 elements Note If a number larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in N10 1 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed because a file boundary will be crossed Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing of File LIM B3 0 COP 0001 Limit Test JE Copy File Low Lim 10 0 Source N N50 100 10 10 lt Dest N7 0 Test N50 100 Length 15 10 High Lim 25 25 e Address N N50 100 10 e Description In this example the element to be used for the indirection is N50 100 The data in N50 100 will define the data file number to be used in the instruction In this example the copy instruction source A is defined by N N50 100 10 When the instruction is scann
288. f sequencer instructions is to conserve program memory These instructions monitor and control 16 word or 32 long word discrete outputs at a time in a single rung You can use bit integer or double integer files with sequencer instructions 20 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual SQC Sequencer Compare 20 2 Instruction Type output Table 20 1 Execution Time for the SQC Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 21 30 us 6 80 us long word 22 80 us 6 80 us On a false to true rung transition the SQC instruction is used to compare masked source words or long words with the masked value at a reference address the sequencer file for the control of sequential machine operations When the status of all non masked bits in the source word match those of the corresponding reference word the instruction sets the found bit FD in the control word Otherwise the found bit FD is cleared The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set The mask can be fixed or variable If you enter a hexadecimal code it is fixed If you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step it is variable When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality While the rung remains true the source is compared against
289. fault routine was executed at Either reset bit S 1 9 if this is PROTECTION power up prior to the main ladder program consistent with the application FAULT Bit 1 13 Major Error Halted was not requirements and change the cleared at the end of the User Fault mode back to RUN or Routine The User Fault Routine ran clear S401 the Major Error it 5 1 Go Becalse SH Halted bit before the end of the User Fault Routine 0017 NVRAM MEMORY Bit S 2 9 is set in the controller and the Transfer the memory module program MODULE ERROR memory module user program does not to the controller and then change to match the controller user program Run mode C 8 Troubleshooting Your System Error Code Advisory Description Recommended Action Message Hex 0018 MEMORY The user program in the memory module is Upgrade the OS using MODULE USER incompatible with the OS ControlFlash to be compatible with PROGRAM the memory module de es Obtain a new memory module Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for more information about available operating systems for the MicroLogix 1500 controller 001A USER PROGRAM The user program in the controller is Upgrade the OS using INCOMPATIBLE incompatible with the OS ControlFlash to be compatible with WITH OS AT the user program in the controller Re compile and reload the program 0020 MINOR ERROR AT A minor faul
290. follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction has completed its operation successfully e Cleared 0 When the rung the PTO is on is false If the rung is false when the PTO instruction completes the Done bit is set until the next scan of the PTO instruction 10 8 PTO Decelerating Status DS Using High Speed Outputs Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DS Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS 0 or 1 status read only The PTO DS Decel bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the deceleration phase of the output profile e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile PTO Run Status RS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access RS Run Status PTO 0 RS 0 or 1 status read only The PTO RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The RS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the run phase of the output profile e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile 10
291. g sequence of a PWM instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PWM instruction is on is solved true the PWM is started 2 A waveform at the specified frequency is produced 3 The RUN phase is active A waveform at the specified frequency with the speci fied duty cycle is output 4 The rung that the PWM is on is solved false 5 The PWM instruction is IDLE Using High Speed Outputs While the PWM instruction is being executed status bits and data are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PWM instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system the status bits and other information are updated each time the PWM instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PWM status while it is running Note PWM status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized a by placing a PWM instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PWM instructions to your program to increase how often a PWM instruction is scanned Pulse Width Modulated PWM Function File a Function Files HSC Pro PwM Jem jen par MMI csi Value PWM 0 H OUT Output H DS Decelerating Status HRS Run Status LAS Accelerating Status LIS Idle Status ED Error Detected Status H NS Normal Operation Status LEH Enable Hard Stop
292. ge Enabled EN 0 Local Node Addr dec octal Local Remote Local Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors In the display above the MicroLogix 1500 processor reads 10 elements from Local Node 2 s 7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in your integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the instruction timed out The device at node 2 understands the PLC 5 processor protocol Function Key Description This Controller Communication Specifies the type of message Valid types are 500CPU Read 500CPU Write 485CIF Read Command 485CIF Write PLC5 Read PLC5 Write Data Table For a Read Destination this is the address in the initiating processor which is to receive data Address Valid file types are B T C R N and L See Valid File Type Combinations below For a Write Source this is the address in the initiating processor which is to send data Valid file types are B T C N I and L See Valid File Type Combinations below Size in Defines the length of the message in elements One word elements are limited to a maximum length Elements of 1 103 Two word elements are limited to a maximum length of 1 51 Counter and control elements are limited to a maximum length of 1 34 Timer elements are limited to a maximum length of 1 20 Channel Identifi
293. gram file When the STI file scan is completed the controller returns to where it was prior to the interrupt and continues normal operation 23 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Selectable Time Interrupt STI Function File Sub Elements Summary Table 23 10 Selectable Timed Interrupt Function File STI 0 Sub Element Description Address DataFormat UserProgram ForMore Access Information ER Error Code STI 0 ER word INT status read only 23 15 UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only 23 16 User Interrupt Enable STI 0 UIE binary bit contro read write 23 16 UIL User Interrupt Lost STI 0 UIL binary bit status read write 23 16 UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only 23 17 TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STI 0 TIE binary bit contro read write 23 17 AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit contro read only 23 17 ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only 23 18 SPM Set Point Msec STI 0 SPM word INT contro read write 23 18 23 14 Using Interrupts STI Function File Sub Elements STI Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number STI 0 PFN word INT control read only The PFN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called executed when
294. gure the expansion I O MODULES modules allowed was exceeded system so that it has an allowable EXCEEDED number of modules Cycle power xx86 EXPANSION I O An expansion I O module could not Change the baud rate in the user MODULE BAUD communicate at the baud rate specified in program I O configuration and RATE ERROR the user program I O configuration re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode or replace the module Cycle power xx87 The expansion I O configuration in the Either correct the user program CONFIGURATION user program did not match the actual I O configuration to match the MISMATCH configuration or actual configuration or The expansion I O configuration in the With power off correct the actual user program specified a module but I O configuration to match the user one was not found or program configuration The expansion I O module configuration data size for a module was greater than what the module is capable of holding xx88 EXPANSION 1 0 The number of input or output image words Correct the user program I O MODULE configured in the user program exceeds the configuration to reduce the CONFIGURATION image size in the expansion I O module number of input or output Words re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode xx89 EXPANSION I O An expansion I O module generated an e Refer to the I O status file MODULE ERROR error Consult 1769 publications for specific
295. hat the message is not intended for it but for another slave so the master immediately forwards the message to the intended slave This slave to slave transfer is a function of the master device and is also used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1 Half Duplex link The MicroLogix 1500 can only act as a slave device A device that can act as a master is required Several Allen Bradley products support DF1 Half Duplex master protocol They include the SLC 5 03 and higher and enhanced PLC 5 processors Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX and RSLinx version 2 x and higher also support DF1 Half Duplex master protocol DF1 Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices address 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts The MicroLogix 1500 supports broadcast reception but cannot initiate a broadcast command The MicroLogix 1500 supports Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking D 4 Understanding the Communication Protocols When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Slave the following parameters can be changed Table 25 2 DF1 Half Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Default Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 1200 Parity none even none Source ID Node 0 to 254 decimal 1 Address Control Line no handshaking Half Duplex modem handshaking no handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC EOT Suppression enabled di
296. he MicroLogix 1500 controller for DF1 Full Duplex protocol In a multi drop line driver topology configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol If the line drivers that are used require RTS CTS handshaking configure the Control Line parameter to Half Duplex Modem D 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual DH485 Communication Protocol The information in this section describes the DH485 network functions network architecture and performance characteristics It will also help you plan and operate the MicroLogix 1500 on a 485 network DH485 Network Description The DH485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires DH485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH485 network offers interconnection of 32 devices e multi master capability token passing access control theability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 ft The DH4835 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token pas
297. he RUN phase completes A P Decelerate DECEL is entered and pulses are produced based on the accel decel parameters which defines the number of DECEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid 7 The DECEL phase completes 8 The PTO instruction is DONE While the PTO instruction is being executed processed status bits and information are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PTO instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system the status bits and other information are updated each time the PTO instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PTO status while it is running Using High Speed Outputs Note status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency will be the same as the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PTO instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PTO instructions to your program to increase how often a PTO instruction is scanned The charts in the following examples illustrate the typical timing sequence behavior of a PTO instruction The stages listed in each chart have nothing to do with controller scan time They simply illustrate a sequence of events In actuality the controller may have hundreds or thousands of scans within each of the stages illustrated in the examples Conditions Required to Start the PTO The foll
298. he TIF location identifies the integer file with which the DAT will interface Valid integer files are N3 through N255 When the DAT reads a valid integer file number it can access the first 48 elements 0 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits words 48 50 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the 48 elements Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT The only integer file that DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TIF location The TIF location can only be changed by a program download Important The example table below shows a DAT configured to use integer file number 50 elements exist in the MicroLogix 1500 user program DAT 0 TIF 50 Element Element Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify in the TIF location as well as the appropriate number of Number Data Address Protection Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit 0 N50 0 N50 48 0 24 N50 24 N50 49 8 1 N50 1 N50 48 1 25 N50 25 N50 49 9 2 N50 2 N50 48 2 26 N50 26 N50 49 10 3 N50 3 N50 48 3 27 N50 27 N50 49 11 4 N50 4 N50 48 4 28 N50 28 N50 49 12 5 N50 5 N50 48 5 29 N50 29 N50 49 13 6 N50 6 N50 48 6 30 N50 30 N50 49 14 7 N50 7 N50 48 7 31 N50 31 N50 49 15 8 N50 8 N50 48 8 32 N50 32 N50 50 0 9 N50 9 N50 48 9 33 N50 33 N50 50 1 10 N50 10 N50 48 10 34 N50 34 N50 50 2 11 N50 1
299. he other devices must be configured for DF1 Half Duplex master protocol Important Never attempt to use DH485 protocol through modems under circumstance Note MicroLogix 1500 controllers support RTS CTS modem handshaking when configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with the control line parameter set to Full Duplex Modem Handshaking or DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem No other modem handshaking lines i e Data Set Ready Carrier Detect and Data Terminal Ready are supported by any MicroLogix 1500 controllers Dial Up Phone Modems D 8 Dial up phone line modems support point to point Full Duplex communications Normally a MicroLogix 1500 controller on the receiving end of the dial up connection will be configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with the control line parameter set for Full Duplex modem The modem connected to the MicroLogix 1500 controller must support auto answer The MicroLogix 1500 has no means to cause its modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call so this must be done from the site of the remote modem Understanding the Communication Protocols Leased Line Modems Radio Modems Line Drivers Leased line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically leased from the local phone company The dedicated lines may be in a point to point topology supporting Full Duplex communications between two modems or in a multi drop topology sup
300. he timer and counter instructions control operations based on time or the number of events 13 1 TOF CTD RES The compare instructions compare values by using a specific compare operation 14 1 EQU NEQ LES LEQ GRT GEQ MEQ LIM Math The math instructions perform arithmetic operations 15 1 ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR SQR SCL SCP Conversion The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform conversions between 16 1 binary and decimal values DCD ENC TOD FRD Logical The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on words 17 1 AND OR XOR NOT Move The move instructions modify and move words 18 1 MOV MVM File The file instructions perform operations on file data 19 1 COP FLL BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL LFU Sequencer Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines that have consistent and 20 1 repeatable operations SQC SQO SQL Program Control The program flow instructions change the flow of ladder program execution 21 1 JMP LBL JSR SBR RET SUS TND MCR END Input and Output The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input 22 1 and output scans IOM REF User Interrupt The user interrupt instructions allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events 23 1 STS INT UID UIE UIF Process Control The process control instruction provides closed loop control 2
301. hen an application needs to be updated but the data that is relevant to the installation needs to remain intact This can be considered a form of file protection The protection feature takes effect when downloading a User Program via communications to the controller transferring a User Program from a Memory Module to the controller Setting Download File Protection 6 6 Download File Protection can be applied to the following data file types Output O Input D Binary B Timer T Counter C e Control nteger N e Proportional Integral Derivative PD Message MG e Long L Note The data in the Status File cannot be protected Controller Memory and File Types You can access the Download File Protect feature using your programming software For each file you want protected check the Memory Module Download protection box in the Data File Properties screen as shown below When a data file is Download File Protected the values contained in it are preserved during a download transfer to the controller if certain requirements are met 6 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual User Program Transfer Requirements 6 8 Download File Protection is in effect when the following conditions are met during a User Program download or Memory Module transfer to the controller The controller contains protected data files The number of data files and executable files
302. hod e PLC 5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix 1500 controllers e MicroLogix 1500 controllers can respond to MSG instructions received The MicroLogix 1500 controllers can initiate MSG instructions to devices on the DH network e PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix 1500 controllers e PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix 1500 controllers PLC 5 _ DH Network SLC 5 04 SLC 5 03 MicroLogix 1500 MicroLogix 1500 amp l MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1000 D 19 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual D 20 System Loading and Heat Dissipation System Loading and Heat Dissipation System Loading Limitations When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion 1 an electrical load is placed on the base unit power supply This section shows how to calculate the load and validate that the system will not exceed the capacity of the base unit power supply The following example is provided to illustrate system loading validation The system validation procedure accounts for the amount of SV de and 24V de current consumed by controller expansion I O and user supplied equipment Use the System Loading Worksheet on page E 4 to validate your specific configuration Current consumed by
303. ia Pacific Headquarters 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Automation Publication 1764 6 1 February 1999 1999 Rockwell International Corporation Printed in the U S A
304. icroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Understanding the Controller LED Status The controller status LEDs provide a mechanism to determine the current status of the controller if a programming device is not present or available C E C LED Color Indicates D C INPUTS POWER off no input power green power on RUN off controller is not in Run mode or REM 24V SINK SOURCE green controller is in Run mode or REM Run POWER DC RELAY OUT RUN green system is not in Run mode memory FAULT flashing module transfer is in progress FORCE OO oOo oO FAULT off no fault detected BAT LO C UNIS 24V SOURCE red flashing faulted user program DCOMM LJ red processor hardware fault or critical CI fault FORCE off no forces installed amber forces installed BATTERY off battery OK HUN red battery needs replacement COMMO off flashes when communications are active green DCOMM off user configured communications Mode 15 active green default communications Mode 15 active INPUTS off input is not energized amber input is energized logic status OUTPUTS off output is not energized amber output is energized logic status C 2 When Operating Normally Troubleshooting Your System Th
305. in the stack to be masked and moved to the destination Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Position is incremented on each false to true transition Sequencer Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 20 4 SQO Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files EUN Address a Mode Level Parameter 2 B amp Ses st E ojojo e 1512 3 2 B o EE 3 0 5165 15 Ja la z Ja S fee 2 amp S E 8 9 E l 22 S File mm mm m mm Mask SEP mm Destination od mE m mm Control 1 Length Position 1 Control file only Note If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words 20 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual SOL Sequencer Load Instruction Type output Table 20 5 Execution Time for the SQL Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 19 20 us 6 80 us long word 21 10 us 6 80 us On a false to true rung transition the SQL instruction loads words or long words into a sequencer file at each step of a sequenc
306. inductive dc load devices a diode is suitable A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications surge suppressor can also be used See the table on page 3 6 for recommended suppressors As shown in the illustration below these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device Surge Suppression for Inductive dc Load Devices Output Device Diode A surge suppressor can also be used 3 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Recommended Surge Suppressors We recommend the Allen Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with Allen Bradley relays contactors and starters Device Coil Voltage iL cid Catalog umber Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 120V ac 599 K04 Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 240V ac 599 KA04 Bulletin 100 Contactor 120V ac 199 FSMA1 Bulletin 100 Contactor 240V ac 199 FSMA2 Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V ac 1401 N10 Bulletin 700 Type R RM Relays ac coil None Required Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 12V de 700 N22 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 12V dc 700 N28 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 24V de 700 N10 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 24V dc 700 N13 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 48V dc 700 N16 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 48V dc 700 N17 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 115 125V dc 700 N11 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 115 125V dc 700 N14 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 230 250V dc 700 N12 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 230 250V dc 700 N15 Bulletin 700 Type P o
307. ing can cause overheating 3 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Wiring Recommendation 3 2 ATTENTION Before you install and wire any device disconnect power to the controller system ATTENTION Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and common wire Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can cause damage ATTENTION United States Only If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 4 b Allow for at least 50 mm 2 in between I O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular Note Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths Separate wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together Separate input wiring from output wiring Label wiring to all devices in the system Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example y
308. ion Depending on the state of the CSS and MSS bits you can have up to four MSG instructions active at any given time Ifthe target node successfully receives the message it sends back an acknowledge ACK The ACK causes the processor to clear 0 the EW bit and set 1 the ST bit The target node has not yet examined the packet to see if it understands your request Once the ST bit is set 1 the controller waits for a reply from the target node The target node is not required to respond within any give time frame Note If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the message transaction you will never receive a reply This is why you should use a Message Timeout value in your MSG instruction Communications Instructions 4 Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram If you do not receive ACK step 3 does not occur Instead either no response or a no acknowledge NAK is received When this happens the ST bit remains clear 0 No response may be caused by the target node is not there the message became corrupted in transmission theresponse was corrupted in response transmission A NAK may be caused by target node is busy target node received a corrupt message the message is too large When a NAK occurs the EW bit is cleared 0 and the ER bit is set 1 indicating that the MSG instruction failed 5 Following the successful receipt of the packet the target node sends a reply packet The reply p
309. ion from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 TIE See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 23 13 for more information G 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual STI Executing Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 2 2 binary 0 or 1 control read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIX See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 for more information Memory Module Program Compare G 10 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 2 9 binary 0 or 1 control read only When this bit is set 1 in the controller its user program and the memory module user program must match for controller to enter an executing mode If the user program does not match the memory module program or if the memory module is not present the controller faults with error code 0017H on any attempt to enter an executing mode An RTC module does not support program compare If program compare is enabled and an RTC only module is installed the controller does not enter an executing mode See also Load Program Compare on page 8 8 Math Overflow Selection System Status File Address Data Format Range Type
310. ions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access KC Controller Gain PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Gain K word 3 is the proportional gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 0 to 327 67 when RG 1 Set this gain to one half the value needed to cause the output to oscillate when the reset and rate terms below are set to zero Note Controller gain is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 24 15 Reset Term Tj Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access TI Reset Term PD10 0 TI word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Reset T word 4 is the Integral gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 327 67 when RG 1 minutes per repeat Set the reset time equal to the natural period measured in the above gain calibration A value of 1 will add the minimum integral term into the PID equation Note Reset term is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 24 15 24 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rate Term Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access TD Rate Term Tq PD10 0 TD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Rate Tq word 5 is the Derivati
311. ious examples demonstrated rising edge behavior Falling edge behavior operates exactly the same way with these exceptions The detection is on the falling edge of the external input input image will normally be 1 and changes to off 0 for one scan Falling Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X2 Scan Number X3 Input Ladder Scan Scan Output Scan Input Ladder Scan Scan Output Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Output Scan Scan External Input I Latched Status Input File Value Falling Edge Behavior Example 2 External Input Latched Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Status Input File Value Note The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay Important The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for falling edge behavior the input file value will normally be off for 1 scan when a falling edge pulse is detected Controller Memory and File Types
312. is variable is the final destination address of the message instruction In this example integer file 50 elements 0 4 of the SLC 5 04 on DH at node 63 octal sends data to the MicroLogix 1500 controller at node 12 on DH485 25 16 Communications Instructions Remote Bridge Link ID This variable is a user assigned value that identifies the remote network as a number This number must be used by any device initiating remote messaging from the DH485 side of the network Any controller on the local DH485 network sending data to a device on the DH network should use the same value for the remote bridge link ID Set the Link ID in the General tab on the Channel Configuration screen The Link ID value is a user defined number between 1 and 65 535 All devices that can initiate remote messages and are connected to the local must have the same number for this variable General Chan 0 System System Driver DH495 User Driver Shutdown Memory Module Over Write Protected Passthru Link ID dec 1 Edit Resource Owner Timeout 1sec 60 Comms Servicing Selection IV Message Servicing Selection DK Cancel Apply Help 25 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual MSG Instruction Error Codes 25 18 When the processor detects an error during the transfer of message data the processor sets the ER bit and enters an error code that you can monitor from your programming software
313. it periodic tests 2 6 Math Instructions 15 1 MCR 21 6 memory module data file protection 8 4 program compare 8 4 program data backup 8 4 removal installation under power 8 1 8 5 Memory Module Information File 8 5 fault override 8 7 functionality type 8 6 load always 8 8 load on error 8 8 mode behavior 8 8 module present 8 7 program compare 8 8 write protect 8 7 memory module real time clock installing 2 23 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time F 1 G 1 MEG 6 mnemonic glossary 4 modem glossary 4 modem cable constructing your own 4 5 modems dialup phone D 8 leasedline D 9 line drivers D 9 radio D 9 using with MicroLogix controllers D 8 Index modes glossary 4 monitoring controller operation fault recovery procedure C 5 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 3 6 motor starters bulletin 709 surge suppressors 3 6 mounting the controller 2 14 using DIN rail 2 15 MOV 18 2 Move Instructions 18 1 MUL 15 5 MVM 18 4 N NEG 15 6 negative logic glossary 4 NEQ 3 network glossary 4 nominal input current glossary 4 normally closed glossary 4 normally open glossary 4 NOT 17 6 null modem cable 4 6 offline glossary 4 offset glossary 4 off state leakage current glossary 5 one shot glossary 5 online glossary 5 ONS 12 7 operating voltage glossary 5 OR 17 4 OSF 12 8 OSR 12 8 OTE 12 4 OTL 12 5 OTU 12 5 Index 5 MicroL
314. ite Data File Overwrite Protection Lost This register indicates the elapsed time for the last program cycle of the controller in 100 us increments Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 36 10 binary Oor 1 status read write RTC Year When clear 0 this bit indicates that at the time of the last program transfer to the controller protected data files in the controller were not overwritten or there were no protected data files in the program being downloaded When set 1 this bit indicates that the default data has been loaded See User Program Transfer Requirements on page 6 8 for more information See Setting Download File Protection on page 6 6 for more information Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 37 word 1998 to 2097 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device See Real Time Clock Function File on page 8 2 for more information G 21 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual RTC Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 38 word 11012 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from an
315. ix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual IOM Immediate Output with Mask Instruction Type output Output w Mask jes Mask N70 Note This instruction is used for the MicroLogix 1500 on board I O only It is not Length 1 designed to be used with expansion I O Table 22 3 Execution Time for the IOM Instruction When Rung Is True False 19 44 us 0 00 us The IOM instruction allows you to selectively update output data without waiting for the automatic output scan This instruction uses the following operands Slot The slot is the physical location that will be updated with data from the output file Important Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IOM cannot be used with expansion I O e Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data is passed to the physical outputs A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data from being passed to the outputs The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFF Bit 15 t4 13 122 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Output Data Output Word Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Real Outputs Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Output Word Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the outputs 22 4 Input and Output Instr
316. key status bit is pressed or Indicator Light latched the F2 indicator LED is lit ESC Key Cancels an edit in progress BIT Key and Pressing the BIT key puts the DAT in bit monitoring mode The bit indicator light is Indicator Light on when the DAT is in bit monitoring mode INT Key and Pressing the INT key puts the DAT in integer monitoring mode The integer Indicator Light indicator light is on when the DAT is in integer monitoring mode ENTER Key Press to select the flashing element number or data value PROTECTED Indicates protected data that cannot be changed using the DAT Indicator Light Note The F1 F2 ESC BIT INT and ENTER keys do not repeat when held Holding down any one of these keys results in only one key press The Up Down arrow key is the only key that repeats when held Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT Power Up Operation The DAT receives power when it is plugged into the controller Upon power up the DAT performs a self test If the test fails the DAT displays an error code All indicator lights are deactivated and the DAT does not respond to any key presses See DAT Error Codes on page 7 16 Allen Bradley PROTECTED Chd ds Bir INT Center After a successful self test the DAT reads the DAT function file to determine its configuration Following a successful power up sequence the DAT enters the bit monitoring mo
317. la lh lo JE 3 55 Jor foo 1 S 2 5 6 6 9 10 8 o Using Interrupts UID User Interrupt Disable Instruction Type output UID eral me P Table 23 4 Execution Time for UID Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 59 us 0 00 us The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits Table 23 5 Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Value Corresponding Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSC0 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero To disable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to disable Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 2 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 Event 1 32 Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value 23 9 MicroLogix 1500 Progr
318. ld not complete function due to hardware fault 45H MSG reply cannot be processed Either Insufficient data in MSG read reply or bad network address parameter 50H Target node is out of memory 60H Target node cannot respond because file is protected Communications Instructions Description of Error Condition 70H PCCC Description Processor is in Program Mode 80H PCCC Description Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem 90H PCCC Description Remote station cannot buffer command BOH PCCC Description Remote station problem due to download COH PCCC Description Cannot execute command due to active IPBs DOH No IP address configured for the network or Bad command unsolicited message error or Bad address unsolicited message error or No privilege unsolicited message error D1H Maximum connections used no connections available D2H Invalid internet address or host name D3H No such host Cannot communicate with the name server D4H Connection not completed before user specified timeout D5H Connection timed out by the network D7H Connection refused by destination host D8H Connection was broken D9H Reply not received before user specified timeout DAH No network buffer space available E1H PCCC Description Illegal Address Format a field has an illegal value E2H PCCC Description Illeg
319. le 21 2 Execution Time for the LBL Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 16 us 0 16 us The LBL instruction is used in conjunction with a jump JMP instruction to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file Program Control Instructions JSR Jump to Subroutine Instruction Type output Table 21 3 Execution Time for the JSR Instruction When Rung Is True False 6 43 us 0 00 us The JSR instruction causes the controller to start executing a separate subroutine file within a ladder program JSR moves program execution to the designated subroutine SBR file number After executing the SBR control proceeds to the instruction following the JSR instruction The immediate data range for the JSR file is from 3 to 255 SBR Subroutine Label SBR Subroutine Instruction Type input Table 21 4 Execution Time for the SBR Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 16 us n a The SBR instruction is a label which is not used by the processor It is for user subroutine identification purposes as the first rung for that subroutine This instruction is the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true 21 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual RET Return from Subroutine RET Return
320. le bit of data During operation the processor may set or reset the bit based on logical continuity of ladder rungs You can address a bit as many times as your program requires 12 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual XIC Examine if Closed XIO Examine if Open Instruction Type input 7 Table 12 1 Execution Time for the XIC and XIO Instructions E XIC Instruction Data Size When Instruction Is True False XIC and word 0 51 us 0 63 us 9 Use the XIC instruction to determine if the addressed bit is on Use the XIO instruction to determine if the addressed bit is off XIO When used on a rung the bit address being examined can correspond to the status of real world input devices connected to the base unit or expansion I O or internal addresses data or function files Examples of devices that turn on or off e apush button wired to an input addressed as 11 0 4 anoutput wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 2 atimer controlling a light addressed as T4 3 DN e abit in the bit file addressed as B3 16 The instructions operate as follows Table 12 2 XIO and XIC Instruction Operation Rung State Addressed Bit XIC Instruction XIO Instruction True Off Returns a False Returns a True True On Returns a True Returns a False False instruction is not evaluated instruction is not evaluated 12 2 Relay Type Bit Instructions Addressing
321. le location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates that LIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load Position This is the current location pointed to in the LIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 128 word or 0 to 64 long word File Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 19 15 LFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Addr Addri Data Files Function Files ddress Level E Parameter z E 2 B a z o s Sle m n a 1 79 5 9 oo 2 gle liS lel Sle 25 1555 _ e le 4 S IE 5 la a IS 218 0 52 ST mm LIFO
322. lean operators glossary 1 branch glossary 1 Index BSL 19 5 BSR 19 7 C cables hardware overview 1 5 planning routes for DH485 connections D 13 selection guide for the AIC 4 13 selection guide for the DeviceNet network 4 20 calling Allen Bradley for assistance C 14 CE mark 2 2 channel configuration DF1 full duplex D 2 CIF table footnote 25 8 clearing faults C 5 CLR 15 6 Common Techniques Used in this Manual P 3 communication DeviceNet 4 20 Communication Instructions 25 1 communication protocols DF1 fullduplex D 2 DF1 halfduplex D 4 DH485 D 10 communication scan glossary 1 compact I O attach and lock module 2 25 installing 2 25 Compare Instructions 1 component descriptions 1 2 accessories cables 1 5 programming 1 5 base units 1 2 Index 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual data access tool 1 3 end cap 1 4 expansion I O 1 4 memory modules real time clock 1 3 processor 1 3 components installing 2 18 Connecting the DF1 Protocol 4 3 connecting the system 4 1 AIC 4 12 DeviceNet network 4 20 DF1 fullduplex protocol 4 3 DH485 network 4 8 Connecting to a DH 485 Network 4 8 contacting AllenBradley for assistance P 3 contactors bulletin 100 surge suppressors for 3 6 control profile glossary 1 controller glossary 1 determining faults C 2 fault messages C 6 features 1 1 grounding 3 7 installation 2 1 mounting 2 14 preve
323. leared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes e Underflow Interrupt executes e Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode High Using the High Speed Counter Preset Reached HPR Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access High Preset Reached HSC 0 HPR 2 0107 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode on page 9 18 The HPR High Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC is greater than or equal to the high preset variable HSC 0 HIP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Underflow UF Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit 0107 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The UF Underflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the underflow variable HSC 0 UNF This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the underflow condition Underflow conditions will not generate a controller fault
324. ley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location wordl bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter a device that provides a communication link between various networked devices Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes backup data Data downloaded with the program baud rate The speed of communication between devices All devices must communicate at the same baud rate on a network bit The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 ON or a0 OFF block diagrams A schematic drawing Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response be true or false branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program communication scan A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with other devices such as software running on a personal computer takes place controller A device such as a programmable controller used to monitor input devices and control output devices controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set up purposes
325. ller Memory and File Types Input Output Status File The input output status file is a read only file in the controller that contains information on the status of the embedded and local expansion 1 0 The data file is structured as Table 6 9 1 0 Status File Word Description 0 Embedded Module Error Code Always zero 1 8 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the I O module s documentation for more information 6 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 6 18 Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT Trim Pot Operation The processor has two trimming potentiometers trim pots which allow modification of data within the controller Adjustments to the trim pots change the value in the corresponding Trim Pot Information TPI register The data value of each trim pot can be used throughout the control program as timer counter or analog presets depending upon the requirements of the application The trim pots are located below the mode switch under the left access door of the processor Hofi H AB a Trim Pot 0 P os a Hom A Oooa Trim Pot 1 WA a ea wD e d
326. ller can access the trim pot hardware the error code is cleared The error codes are described in the table below Error Code Description 0 Trim pot data is valid 1 Trim pot subsystem detected but data is invalid 2 Trim pot subsystem did not initialize 3 Trim pot subsystem failure 7 2 Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT Data Access Tool DAT The DAT is a convenient and simple tool that provides an interface for editing and monitoring data The DAT has five primary features Direct access to 48 bit elements Direct access to 48 integer elements Two function keys Display of controller faults Removal Insertion under power DAT Keypad and Indicator Light Functions The DAT has a digital display 6 keys an up down key and indicator lights Their functions are described in the table on page 7 4 Allen Bradley PROTECTED Gah ad ds C BIT INT Center 1 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 7 4 Feature Function Digital Display Displays address elements and data values faults and errors Up Down Key Scroll to select element numbers and change data values The up down key repeats when held F1 Key and Controls the F1 function key status bit When the F1 key status bit is pressed or Indicator Light latched the F1 indicator LED is lit F2 Key and Controls the F2 function key status bit When the F2
327. ller without the use of a personal computer and programming software During transfers of a program to or from a memory module the controller s RUN LED flashes Program Compare The memory module also provides program security allowing you to specify that if the program stored in the memory module does not match the program in the controller the controller will not be able to enter an executing run or test mode To enable this feature set the S 2 9 bit in the system status file See Memory Module Program Compare on page G 10 for more information Data File Protection 84 The memory module features the capability to specify which data files in the controller are protected from the download procedure Note File protection is only functional if the processor does not have a memory fault and if the data file structure of the memory module matches the data file structure within the controller See Protecting Data Files During Download on page 6 6 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Memory Module Write Protection The memory module supports write once read many behavior Write protection is enabled using your programming software Important Once set write protection cannot be removed If a change needs to be made to the control program stored in the memory module the same memory module cannot be re used Removal Insertion Under Power The memory module can be installed or removed at any time without risk of da
328. long word is used internally to track the change in the process variable within the loop update time 24 18 Runtime Errors Process Control Instruction Error code 0036 appears in the status file when a PID instruction runtime error occurs Code 0036 covers the following PID error conditions each of which has been assigned a unique single byte code value that appears in the MSbyte of the second word of the control block Description of Error Condition or Error Code Conditions Corrective Action 11 1 Loop update time Change loop update time 0 lt D lt 1024 D 1024 2 Loop update time D 0 12H Proportional gain Change proportional gain Kc to 0 lt Ke lt 0 13H Integral gain reset Change integral gain reset to 0 lt T i lt 14H Derivative gain rate Change derivative gain rate Tg to 0 lt Tg Ta lt 0 23H Scaled setpoint min Change scaled setpoint min MinS to MinS gt Scaled setpoint max MaxS 32768 lt MinS lt MaxS lt 32767 If you are using setpoint scaling and If you are using setpoint scaling then change MinS gt setpoint SP gt MaxS or the setpoint SP to MinS lt SP lt MaxS or If you are not using setpoint scaling and If you are not using setpoint scaling then change 0 gt setpoint SP gt 16383 the setpoint SP to 0 lt SP lt 16383 31H then during the initial execution of the PID loop this error occurs and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is
329. lossary 6 sourcing wiring diagram 1764 24BWA 3 11 1764 28BXB 3 13 spade lug wiring 3 3 specifications A 1 general A 2 input A 2 output 4 relay contact rating table A 4 response times for high speed dc inputs A 3 response times for normal dc inputs 4 working voltage 1764 24AWA A 6 working voltage 1764 24BWA A 7 working voltage 1764 28BXB 8 SQC 20 2 SOL 20 10 SQO 20 6 SQR 15 10 status glossary 6 status file overview G 1 STS 23 8 SUB 15 4 surge suppressors for contactor 3 6 for motor starters 3 6 for relays 3 6 Index 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Index 8 recommended 3 6 using 3 4 SUS 21 4 system configuration DH485 connection examples D 16 system connection 4 1 T Target Bit File 7 6 7 8 Target Integer File 7 6 terminal glossary 6 throughput glossary 7 Timer and Counter Instructions 13 1 TND 21 5 TOD 16 10 TOD Destination Operand 16 11 TOF 13 5 TON 13 4 Transient Pulse Function 3 15 Trim Pot Information Function File 7 2 trim pots 7 1 7 2 adjustment 7 2 error conditions 7 2 location 7 1 trim pots mode switch cover door B 7 troubleshooting automatically clearing faults C 5 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance C 14 contacting AllenBradley for assistance P 3 controller error recovery model C 4 determining controller faults C 2 identifying controller faults C 5 manually clearing faults C 5 understanding
330. lternate Mode G 9 S 3H Watchdog Scan Time G 11 5 4 Free Running Clock G 12 5 5 Minor Error Bits G 12 5 6 Major Error G 15 S7 Suspend Code 9 15 5 8 File 9 15 5 9 Active Nodes Channel 0 Nodes 0 to 15 G 16 5 10 Active Channel 0 Nodes 16 to 31 G 16 S 13 5 14 Math Register G 16 5 151 Node Address G 17 15H Baud Rate G 17 22 Maximum Scan Time G 17 29 User Fault File G 18 30 STI Setpoint G 18 5 31 STI File Number G 18 5 33 Channel 0 Communications G 19 G 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual G 2 Address Function Page S 35 Last 100 uSec Scan Time G 21 5 36 10 Data File Overwrite Protection Lost G 21 5 37 G 21 5 38 Month 9 22 5 39 Day of Month G 22 5 40 Hours G 22 5 41 Minutes G 22 S 42 RTC Seconds G 23 5 53 Day of Week G 23 5 57 OS Catalog Number G 23 5 58 OS Series G 24 5 59 OS FRN G 24 5 60 Controller Catalog Number G 24 5 61 Controller Series G 24 5 62 Controller Revision G 24 5 63 User Program Functionality G 25 S 64L Compiler Revision Build Number G 25 64H Compiler Revision Release G 25 System Status File Status File Details Arithmetic Flags Carry Flag The arithmetic flags are assessed by the processor following the execution of any math logical or move instruction The state of these bits remains in effect until the next math logic
331. lthough the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to lithium batteries the material contained may be considered toxic reactive or corrosive The person disposing of the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so State and local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials For a lithium battery product safety data sheet contact the manufacturer Sanyo Energy Corporation 2001 Sanyo Avenue San Diego CA 92173 619 661 4801 Tadiran Electronic Industries 2 Seaview Blvd Port Washington NY 11050 516 621 4980 B 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Replacement Doors The following figures illustrate the procedure for installing the MicroLogix 1500 replacement doors Base Terminal Door i a o o LJ o o 6 Replacement Parts Base Comms Door Trim Pots Mode Switch Cover Door B 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Replacement Terminal Blocks The figure below illustrates how to replace the MicroLogix 1500 terminal blocks SS B 8 Troubleshooting Your System C Troubleshooting Your System This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include understanding the controller LED status controller error recovery model identifying controller faults calling Allen Bradley for assistance C 1 M
332. mable Controllers User Manual High Preset Mask HPM Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access HPM High Preset Mask HSC 0 HPM bit 0107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The HPM High Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a high preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a High Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt will not be executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit High Preset Interrupt HPI Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access HPI High Preset Interrupt HSC 0 HPI bit 0107 status read write 1 9 12 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The HPI High Preset Interrupt status bit will be set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the high preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the high preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the high preset this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and will also be c
333. mage to either the memory module or the controller If a memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1500 is executing the memory module will not be recognized until either a power cycle occurs or until the controller is placed in a non executing mode program mode or fault condition Removal of the memory module is detected within one program scan Memory Module Information File The controller has a Memory Module Information MMI File which is updated with data from the attached memory module At power up or on detection of a memory module being inserted the catalog number series revision and type memory module and or real time clock are identified and written to the MMI file in the user program If a memory module and or real time clock is not attached zeros are written to the MMI file The memory module function file programming screen is shown below 8 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Function Files Hsc PTO PwM el DAT TP Address NOTE MMI Data values are a reflection of what is the memory module not your program E MMI 0 ej CN 4 Catalog Number Integer 0 SRS Series REV Revision FT Functionality Type MP Module Present WP Write Protect Indicator FO Fault Override LPC Load Program Compare LE Load On Error HLA Load Always L MB Mode Behavior The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below
334. mend using an AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as your optical isolator D 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual DF1 Half Duplex Protocol DF1 Half Duplex protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network DF1 Half Duplex protocol supports data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 In contrast to DF1 Full Duplex communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 port on the MicroLogix 1500 as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Half Duplex peer to peer messaging port DF1 Half Duplex Operation The master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master It is the master s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate During a polling sequence the master polls a slave either repeatedly until the slave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit or just one time per polling sequence depending on how the master is configured An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to from another slave When the initiating slave is polled the MSG instruction is sent to the master The master recognizes t
335. ment or decrement Holding down the up down key causes the integer value to increment or decrement quickly Note If the data is protected or undefined pressing the up down key scrolls to the next element in the list 5 Press ENTER to accept the new data Press ESC or INT BIT to discard the new data Using Trim Pots and the Data Access Tool DAT F1 and F2 Functions The function keys F1 and F2 correspond to bits and can be used throughout the control program as desired They have no effect on bit or integer monitoring Each key has two corresponding bits in the DAT function file The bits within the DAT function file are shown in the table below Key Bits Address Data Format Type User Program Access F1 Key Pressed DAT 0 F1P Binary Status Read Write Latched DAT 0 F1L Binary Status Read Write F2 Key Pressed DAT 0 F2P Binary Status Read Write Latched DAT 0 F2L Binary Status Read Write F1 or F2 Key Pressed The pressed bits DAT 0 F1P and DAT 0 F2P function as push buttons and provide current state of either the F1 or F2 key on the keypad When the 1 or F2 key is pressed the DAT sets 1 the corresponding pressed key bit When the F1 or F2 key is not pressed the DAT clears 0 the corresponding pressed key bit F1 or F2 Key Latched The latched bits DAT 0 F1L and DAT 0 F2L function as latched push buttons and provide latched toggle key functionality When the F1 or F2 key is pressed the DA
336. message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected When the system driver is DF1 Full Duplex the following parameters can be changed Table 25 1 DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Default Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Source ID Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 1 Control Line no handshaking Full Duplex modem handshaking no handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Embedded Responses auto detect enabled auto detect Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled enabled ACK Timeout 1 to 65535 counts 20 ms increments 50 counts NAK retries 0 to 255 3 retries ENQ retries 0 to 255 3 retries Stop Bits not a setting always 1 1 D 2 Understanding the Communication Protocols Example DF1 Full Duplex Connections For information about required network connecting equipment see chapter 3 Connecting the System Optical Isolator recommended illl 1761 2 Personal Computer Tv go 9 P Modem cable Personal Computer Modem WW Micro Controller Optical Isolator recommended C Je Modem 1761 CBL PM02 z UV We recom
337. mm mm m Control 1 Length Position 1 Control file only Not valid for Timers Counters 19 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Last In First Out LIFO Unload Instruction Type output Table 19 16 Execution Time for the LFU Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 20 80 us 9 50 us long word 24 00 us 9 50 us On a false to true rung transition the LFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user created file called a LIFO stack The data is unloaded using last in first out order Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below T Destination Position LIFO LOAD EN N7 11 N7 12 0 Source N7 10 DN LIFO N7 12 L EM N7 13 1 ien zs LFU instruction unloads N7 14 2 Position 9 data from stack N7 12 at 3 position 8 4 LEU 5 34 words are allocated LIFO UNLOAD EU 6 for FIFO stack starting at N7 12 N7 12 ending at N7 45 est N7 11 L EM 7 Control R6 0 Li h 34 Position 9 Source 8 N7 10 p 9 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 33 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 19 18 File Instructions The LFU instruction uses the following operands LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting addr
338. mmable Controllers User Manual RTO Retentive Timer On Instruction Type output Table 13 9 Execution Time for the RTO Instructions Instruction When Rung ls True False RTO 15 73 us 1 85 us Use the instruction to delay turning an output The begins to count timebase intervals when the rung conditions become true As long as the rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached The RTO retains the accumulated value when the following occur rung conditions become false you change the processor mode from run or test to program the processor loses power afault occurs When you return the processor to the RUN or TEST mode and or the rung conditions go true timing continues from the retained accumulated value RTO timers are retained through power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following status bits Table 13 10 Counter Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done accumulated value gt preset value the appropriate RES instruction is enabled bit 14 4 07 TT timer timing rung state is true and rung state goes false or accumulated value lt preset value DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false
339. mple 1 off off Jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 0 Example 2 off off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 0 0 Example3 gt off off on Reset accumulator to zero 0 0 1 Example 4 on Hold accumulator value 1 Example 5 on Hold accumulator value 1 Example 6 off on Hold accumulator value 0 1 Example 7 off off 0 Hold accumulator value 0 1 Count input A leads count input B 2 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care gt rising edge falling edge Note Inputs 11 0 0 0 through I1 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Accumulator ACC Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT control read write 9 24 The ACC Accumulator contains the number of counts detected by the HSC sub system If either mode 0 or mode 1 is configured the value of the software accumulator will be cleared 0 when a high preset is reached or when an overflow condition is detected Using the High Speed Counter High Preset HIP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT control read write The HIP High Preset is the upper setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system will generate an interrupt To load data
340. mportant note about indirect addressing 2 Source B does not apply to the NOT instruction The NOT instruction only has one source value Important You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI BHI MMI DAT TPI CSO and IOS files Updates to Math Status Bits 17 2 After a logical instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Table 17 2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow always resets 0 2 7 Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets Logical Instructions AND Bit Wise AND AND Bitwise AND Source Source B Dest Jo 50 50 0 Instruction output Table 17 3 Execution Time for the AND Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 2 00 us 0 00 us long word 8 20 us 0 00 us The AND instruction performs a bit wise logical AND of two sources and places the result in the destination Table 17 4 Truth Table for the AND Instruction Destination A AND B Source A 1111111114011 11 1010 Source 1 1 0 01 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Destination 11110 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
341. n Category Identifier Code always 1 1 Length always 8 2 Format Code always 0 3 Communications Configuration Error Code 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller Once the request has been satisfied the bit is cleared 0 1 MRP Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this controller When the appropriate MSG instruction is serviced during end of scan SVC or REF this bit is cleared 0 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller has one or more MSG instructions enabled and in the communication queue This bit is cleared 0 when the queue is empty 3 SSB Selection Status Bit This bit indicates that the controller is in the System Mode It is always set 4 CAB Communications Active Bit This bit is set 1 when at least one other device is on the DH485 network If no other devices are on the network this bit is cleared 0 51013 Reserved 14 Reserved for MLB Modem Lost Bit 15 Reserved 5 0107 Node Address This byte value contains the node address of your controller on the network 81015 Baud Rate This byte value contains the baud rate of the controller on the network Controller Memory and File Types Table 6 5
342. n the Destination Instruction Type output Table 15 6 Execution Time for the CLR Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 1 18 us 0 00 us long word 5 49 us 0 00 us Use the CLR instruction to set the Destination to a value of zero SCL Scale Math Instructions Instruction Type output Table 15 7 Execution Time for the SCL Instruction When Rung Is True False 9 30 us 0 00 us The SCL instruction causes the value at the Source address to be multiplied by the Rate slope value The resulting value is added to the Offset and the rounded result is placed in the Destination The scaled value rate x source 10000 offset Rate and Offset can both be immediate values The data range for rate and offset is 32768 to 32767 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 15 8 SCL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 gt Address Address Data Files Function Files o Mode Level P E e E arameter Sos S c Q a 515 5 T lolo lS b lek 2 82 EE Gro aoo 2 5 1615 9 _ fee f S 2 E 5 5 5 IS 6 85 0 5 25 S S 5 Source ele ele le ele Rate ole ole le ole le Offset o ole le ole Destination ol ejeje o
343. nation device s readiness to receive the message 25 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The Message File The MSG instruction built into the MicroLogix 1500 controller uses a MG data file to process the message instruction The MG data file shown below is accessed using the MG prefix Each message instruction utilizes an element within a MG data file For example MG11 0 is the first element in message data file 11 21 23 Data Files Cross Reference OUTPUT E n INPUT E s2 STATUS E B2 BINARY E T4 TIMER E cs COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER D man Local Messages 25 4 The MicroLogix 1500 is capable of communicating using local or remote messages With a local message all devices are accessible without a separate device acting as a bridge Different types of electrical interfaces may be required to connect to the network but the network is still classified as a local network Remote messages use a remote network where devices are accessible only by passing or routing through a device Remote networks are discussed on page 25 14 The following four examples represent different types of local networks Example 1 Local DH485 Network with AIC 1761 NET AIC Interface DH485 Network AIC AIC J JAC AIC g MicroLogix 1000 HEE Node 12 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 03 Nod 10 SLC 5 04 PanelVie
344. nd the loop update time determined in step 17 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feedforward 8 Return to page 24 27 and complete the tuning procedure starting with step 4 24 30 Communications Instructions 25 Communications Instructions This chapter contains information about the Message MSG and Service Communications SVC communication instructions This chapter provides information on how messaging works e what the instructions look like how to configure and use the instructions examples and timing diagrams The communication instructions read or write data to another station Instruction Used To Page MSG Transfer data from one device to another 25 2 SVC Interrupt the program scan to execute the service communications part of the operating cycle The scan then resumes 25 24 at the instruction following the SVC instruction 25 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual MicroLogix 1500 Messaging Overview 25 2 The MicroLogix 1500 s communication architecture is comprised of three primary components Ladder Scan Communications Buffers Communication Queue These three components determine when a message is transmitted by the controller For a message to transmit it mu
345. nd will also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes e Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Using the High Speed Counter Overflow OF Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access OF Overflow HSC 0 OF bit 0107 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode on page 9 18 The OF Overflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACC has counted through the overflow variable HSC 0 OF This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the overflow condition Overflow conditions will not generate a controller fault Overflow Mask OFM Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes User Program Access OFM Overflow Mask HSC 0 OFM bit 0107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The OFM Overflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow an overflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and an overflow reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt will not be executed This bit is controlled by the user program and re
346. nded by an MCR instruction pair The start of an MCR zone is defined to be the rung that contains an MCR instruction preceded by conditional logic The end of an MCR zone is defined to be the first rung containing just an MCR instruction following a start MCR zone rung While the rung state of the first MCR instruction is true execution shall proceed as if the zone were not present When the rung state of the first MCR instruction is false the ladder logic within the MCR zone is executed as if the rung is false All non retentive outputs within the MCR zone shall be reset MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program such as for recipe applications Program Control Instructions When you program MCR instructions note that e You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction e You cannot nest one MCR zone within another e Do not jump into an MCR zone If the zone is false jumping into it activates the zone Note The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability You still must install a hard wired master control relay to provide emergency I O power shutdown ATTENTION If you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled Re program critical operations outside the zone if necessary 21 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 21 8 Input and Outpu
347. ng lastinstruction on last branch Itisrecommended this be the only output instruction on the rung 23 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual UIF User Interrupt Flush Instruction Type output UIF User Interrupt Flush Interrupt Types 1 Table 23 8 Execution Time for the UIF Instruction When Rung Is True False 9 79 us 0 00 us The UIF instruction is used to flush remove pending interrupts from the system selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding flush bits Table 23 9 Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Value Corresponding Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSC0 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSC1 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero To flush interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to flush Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt S cow gn Enter the sum into the UIF instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 Event 1 32 Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value 2
348. ng the startup protection fault routine S 6 major error fault code contains the value 0016H G 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access binary 0 or 1 control read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program when the control program is corrupt or a default program exists in the controller Note If you clear the controller memory the controller will load the default program The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also Load on Error on page 8 8 Load Memory Module Always G 6 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access binary 0 or 1 control read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1
349. nge Type User Program Format Access LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1 to 1024 control read write The loop update time word 13 is the time interval between PID calculations The entry is in 0 01 second intervals Enter a loop update time five to ten times faster than the natural period of the load The natural period of the load is determined by setting the reset and rate parameters to zero and then increasing the gain until the output begins to oscillate When in STI mode this value must equal the STI time interval value loaded in STI 0 SPM The valid range is 0 01 to 10 24 seconds Zero Crossing Deadband ZCD Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access ZCD Zero Crossing Deadband PD10 0 ZCD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value entered The deadband is entered at the zero crossing of the process variable and the setpoint This means that the deadband is in effect only after the process variable enters the deadband and passes through the setpoint The valid range is 0 to the scaled maximum or 0 to 16 383 when no scaling exists Feed Forward Bias FF Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access FF Feed Forward Bias PD10 0 FF word INT 16 383 to 16 383 control read write The feed forward bias is us
350. nly valid choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop _ This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected This Detected error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed 2 No No Yes Pup Forced The configured PTO output 2 or 3 is currently forced The rror forced condition must be removed for the PTO to operate This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 10 18 Table 10 5 Pulse Train Output Error Codes Using High Speed Outputs Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Name Description Code Fault Fault Errors 3 No Yes No Frequency The operating frequency value OFS is less than 0 or greater Error than 20 000 This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 4 No Yes No Accel Decel The accel decel parameters ADP are Error less than zero than half the total output pulses to be generated Accel Decel exceeds limit See page 10 15 This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 5 No No Yes Jog Error PTO is in the idle state and two or more of the following are set Enable EN bit set Jog Pulse JP bit set Jog Continuous
351. nsfer memory module are allowed regardless of this selection This type of protection is particularly useful to an OEM original equipment manufacturer who develops an application and then distributes the application via a memory module or within a dedicated controller with the application installed in it 6 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Function Files Function Files are one of the three primary file structures within the MicroLogix 1500 controller Program Files and Data Files are the others Function Files were created to provide an efficient and logical interface to controller resources Controller resources are resident permanent features such as the Real Time Clock and High Speed Counter The features are available to the control program through either instructions that are dedicated to a specific function file or via standard instructions such as MOV and ADD The Function File types are Table 6 1 Function Files File Name File Identifier File Description High Speed HSC This file type is associated with the High Speed Counter Interrupt function See page Using Counter the High Speed Counter on page 9 1 for more information Pulse Train PTO This file type is associated with the Pulse Train Output Instruction See PTO Pulse Train Output Output Instruction on page 10 1 for more information Pulse Width PWM This file type is associated with the Pulse Width Modul
352. nsmitting ST 0 Data Table Address N50 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Bridge Addr dec 17 octal Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr 19 m Remote Station Address 51 Remote Bridge Link ID 100 E Error Description No errors 25 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual DH485 Network Link ID 1 AIC Node 17 AIC H gi HHH MicroLogix 1500 BS MicroLogix 1000 Node 12 SLC 5 03 Node 10 SLC 5 04 PanelView 550 Node 5 Node 23 Node 22 Link ID 100 Node 63 octal Node 40 octal 51 dec 32 dec PLC 5 SLC 5 04 Local Bridge Address This variable defines the bridge address on the local network In the example node 12 is writing data to node 51 on DH The SLC 5 04 on DH485 is node 17 This variable sends the message to node 17 Remote Bridge Address This variable defines the remote node address of the bridge device In this example the remote bridge address is set to zero because the target device SLC 5 04 at node 63 octal is a remote capable device If the target device is remote capable the remote bridge address is not required If the target device is not remote capable SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and MicroLogix 1000 Series A B and C the remote bridge address is required Remote Station Address Th
353. nting excessive heat 2 8 status file G 1 troubleshooting C 2 controller error recovery model C 4 controller faults C 2 controller LED status C 2 controller operation normal C 3 controller overhead glossary 1 Conversion Instructions 16 1 Convert from BCD FRD example 16 8 Convert to BCD TOD changes to the math register 16 11 example 16 12 COP 19 2 counter glossary 2 CPU Central Processing Unit glossary 2 CTD 13 10 CTU 13 10 D DAT Communication Errors 7 15 configuration 7 6 Controller Faults Displayed 7 14 display 7 11 Error Conditions 7 15 Internal Errors 7 15 keypad 7 4 power up operation 7 5 DAT Feature Function Table 7 4 DAT Function File 7 6 data access tool hardware overview 1 3 installing 2 21 data table glossary 2 DCD 16 3 DeviceNet Communications 4 20 DeviceNet network connecting 4 20 selecting cable 4 20 DF1 fullduplex protocol configuration parameters D 2 connecting 4 3 description D 2 example system configuration D 3 using a modem 4 4 D 8 DF1 Half Duplex protocol configuration parameters D 5 DF1 halfduplex protocol description D 4 DH485 communication protocol configuration parameters D 11 DH485 network Index 2 configuration parameters D 15 connecting 4 8 description D 10 devices that use the network D 11 example system configuration D 16 installation 4 8 planning considerations D 13 protocol D 10 token rotation D 10 DIN rail
354. ntrol the control variable CV output with your ladder program 24 25 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PID Rungstate If the PID rung is false the integral sum IS is cleared and CV remains in its last state Feed Forward or Bias PID Tuning Applications involving transport lags may require that a bias be added to the CV output in anticipation of a disturbance This bias can be accomplished using the processor by writing a value to the Feed Forward Bias element word FF See page 24 13 The value you write is added to the output allowing a feed forward action to take place You may add a bias by writing a value between 16383 and 16383 to word 6 with your programming terminal or ladder program PID tuning requires a knowledge of process control If you are inexperienced it will be helpful if you obtain training on the process control theory and methods used by your company There are a number of techniques that can be used to tune a PID loop The following PID tuning method is general and is limited in terms of handling load disturbances When tuning we recommend that changes be made in the MANUAL mode followed by a return to AUTO Output limiting is applied in the MANUAL mode Note This method requires that the PID instruction controls a non critical application in terms of personal safety and equipment damage The PID tuning procedure may not work for all cases It is strongly recommended to
355. nvironment 1761 CBL PMO02 Series C or later 1761 CBL HM02 Series C or later 1761 CBL AMOO Series or later 1761 CBL AP00 Series C or later 2707 NC8 Series B or later 2707 NC9 Series B or later 2707 NC10 Series B or later 2707 NC11 Series B or later 24 Installing Your Controller Disconnecting Main Power Safety Circuits ATTENTION Explosion Hazard Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off and the area is known to be non hazardous The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it In addition to disconnecting electrical power all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic should be de energized before working on a machine or process controlled by a controller ATTENTION Explosion Hazard Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Power Distribution There are some poin
356. occurs while a lower priority interrupt is being serviced executed the currently executing interrupt routine will be suspended and the higher priority interrupt will be serviced Then the lower priority interrupt will be allowed to complete before returning to normal processing If an interrupt occurs while a higher priority interrupt is being serviced executed and the pending bit has been set for the lower priority interrupt the currently executing interrupt routine will continue to completion Then the lower priority interrupt will run before returning to normal processing The priorities from highest to lowest are User Fault Routine highest priority Event Interrupt O Event Interrupt 1 High Speed Counter Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 2 Event Interrupt 3 High Speed Counter Interrupt 1 Selectable Timed Interrupt lowest priority 23 4 Using Interrupts Interrupt Latency Interrupt Latency is defined as the worst case amount of time elapsed from when an interrupt occurs to when the interrupt subroutine starts to execute The tables below show the interaction between an interrupt and the processor operating cycle Program Scan Activity When an Interrupt can occur in MicroLogix 1500 Input Scan Between word updates Ladder Scan Start of Rung Output Scan Between word updates Communications Service Anytime Housekeeping Anytime To determine the interrupt latency 1
357. ock F3H PCCC Description Address reference exists to deleted area F4H PCCC Description Command execution failure for unknown reason PLC 3 histogram overflow F5H PCCC Description Data conversion error F6H PCCC Description The scanner is not able to communicate with a 1771 rack adapter This could be due to the scanner not scanning the selected adapter not being scanned the adapter not responding or an invalid request of a DCM BT block transfer F7H PCCC Description The adapter is not able to communicate with a module F8H PCCC Description The 1771 module response was not valid size checksum etc F9H PCCC Description Duplicated Label FAH Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access FBH Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files FCH PCCC Description Disk file is write protected or otherwise inaccessible off line only FDH PCCC Description Disk file is being used by another application update not performed off line only FFH Local communication channel is shut down Note For 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual users The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your MSG instruction e Codes EO EF represent EXT STS codes 0 e Codes FO FC represent EXT STS codes 10 Communications Instructions Timing Diagram for MicroLogix 1500 MSG Instruction The following
358. ock into the RS 485 port on the AIC you are put ting on the network Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug 3 Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires Powering the In normal operation with the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controller connected to port 2 of the AIC the controller powers the AIC Any AIC not connected to a controller requires a 24V dc power supply The AIC requires 120 mA at 24V dc If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V dc Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wrong power source 4 18 Connecting the System Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting the power supply to the AIC Bottom View 24VDC x veur NEUT CHS C9 NENNEN ATTENTION Always connect the CHS GND chassis ground terminal to the nearest earth ground This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V dc supply is used Power Options Below are two options for powering the AIC Use the 24V dc user power supply built into the MicroLogix 1500 controller The AIC is powered through a hard wired connection using a communication cable 1761 CBL HM0O2
359. ogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Index 6 output device glossary 5 output specifications A 4 1764 28BXB FET A 5 ownership timeout D 7 P panel mounting base unit 2 17 planning considerations for a network D 13 power considerations input states on power down 2 7 isolation transformers 2 6 loss of power source 2 7 other line conditions 2 7 overview 2 6 power supply inrush 2 6 power distribution 2 5 Power Save Timeout 7 6 7 10 power source loss of 2 7 Power Supply Inrush 2 6 power supply inrush power considerations 2 6 preventing excessive heat 2 8 proceessor hardware overview 1 3 Process Control Instruction 24 1 processor glossary 5 installing 2 18 Processor Access Door B 6 processor access door B 6 Processor Comms Door B 7 processor file glossary 5 Program Control Instructions 21 1 program faults determining C 2 program file glossary 5 program mode glossary 5 program scan glossary 5 programming device glossary 5 programming the controller overview 1 5 Proportional Integral Derivative instruction PID application notes 24 22 PID tuning 24 26 runtime errors 24 19 the PID concept 24 1 the PID equation 24 2 PROTECTED indicator light 7 4 7 11 protocol glossary 5 PTO 10 1 publications related P 2 Purpose of this Manual P 1 PWM 10 20 Q quadrature encoder 9 22 R RAC 9 31 read glossary 5 real time clock battery low indicator bit
360. ok at the specific error code in parameter HSC 0 ER This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 system and will be set and cleared automatically Counting Enabled CE Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access CE Counting Enabled HSC 0 CE bit 0107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the High Speed Counter When set 1 counting is enabled when clear 0 default counting is disabled If this bit is disabled while the counter is running the accumulated value is held if the bit is then set counting will resume This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle 9 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Set Parameters SP Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access SP Set Parameters HSC 0 SP bi t 0107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The SP Set Parameters control bit is used to load new variables to the HSC sub system When an OTE instruction with the address of HSC 0 SP is solved true off to on rung transition all configuration variables currently stored in the HSC function will be checked and loaded into the HSC sub system The HSC sub system will
361. oller overrides the status of the control program and sets the output to the user defined state Discrete outputs can be forced or off The value in the output file is unaffected by the force It maintains the state determined by the logic in the control program However the state of the physical output will be set to the forced state Note If you force an output controlled by an executing PTO or PWM function an instruction error is generated Using Inputs and Outputs Input Filtering The MicroLogix 1500 controller allows users to configure groups of inputs for high speed or normal operation Users can configure each input group s filter response time The filter response determines how long after the external input voltage reaches a valid or off state to when the controller recognizes that change of state The higher the value the longer it takes for the input state to be recognized by the controller Higher values provide more filtering and are used in electrically noisy environments Lower values provide less filtering and are used to detect fast or narrow pulses You typically set the filters to a lower value when using high speed counters and latching inputs Input filtering is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software To configure the filters using RSLogix 500 1 Open the Controller folder Open the I O Configuration folder Open slot 0 MicroLogix 1500 Sou od Select the
362. om an STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine Note Using an REF instruction may result in input data changing in the middle of a program scan This condition needs to be evaluated when using the REF instruction ATTENTION The watchdog and scan timers are reset when executing the REF instruction You must insure that the REF instruction is not placed inside a non terminating program loop Do not place the REF instruction inside a program loop unless the program is thoroughly analyzed 22 6 Using Interrupts 23 Using Interrupts Interrupts allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events This chapter contains information about using interrupts the interrupt instructions and the interrupt function files The chapter is arranged as follows Information About Using Interrupts on page 23 1 e User Interrupt Instructions on page 23 7 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 23 13 Using the Event Input Interrupt Function File on page 23 19 See also Using the High Speed Counter on page 9 1 Information About Using Interrupts The purpose of this section is to explain some fundamental properties of the Micrologix 1500 User Interrupts including e What is an interrupt When can the Micrologix 1500 operation be interrupted e Priority of User Interrupts Interrupt Latency e User Fault Routine 23 1 MicroLogix 1500 P
363. omputer and Interchange 1747 PT1 Hand Held Terminal NA Provides hand held programming monitoring 1747 NP002 configuring and troubleshooting capabilities for SLC 500 processors 1747 DTAM DTAM Plus Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 1747 ND013 2707 L8P1 L8P2 and Micro processors 2707 800 L40P1 L40P2 Operator Interfaces 2707 803 V40P1 V40P2 V40P2N M232P3 and M485P3 2711 K5A2 B5A2 PanelView 550 and Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 2711 802 K5A5 B5A5 PanelView 900 processors 2711 816 K5A1 B5A1 Operator Terminals K9A2 T9A2 K9A5 T9A5 K9A1 and T9A1 D 12 NA Not Applicable Understanding the Communication Protocols Important DH485 Network Planning Considerations Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system performance amount of electrical noise temperature and humidity in the network environment number of devices on the network connection and grounding quality in installation e amount of communication traffic on the network type of process being controlled network configuration The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Hardware Considerations You need to decide the length of the communication cabl
364. on of the processor Non Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and cannot be recovered from The user fault routine executes when this type of fault occurs However the fault cannot be cleared Note You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device to identify the fault condition of the controller Non User Faults are caused by various conditions that cease ladder program execution The user fault routine does not execute when this type of fault occurs Status File Data Saved The Arithmetic Flags Status File word S 0 are saved on entry to the user fault subroutine and re written upon exiting the subroutine Creating a User Fault Subroutine To use the user fault subroutine 1 Create a subroutine file Program Files 3 to 255 can be used 2 Enter the file number in word S 29 of the status file MicroLogix 1500 Processor Operation The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable faults causes the processor to read 8 29 and execute the subroutine number identified by S 29 If the fault is recoverable the routine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The processor then continues in its current executing mode The routine does not execute for non user faults 23 6 User Interrupt Instructions Using Interrupts Instruction Used To Page INT Interrupt Subroutine Use this instruction to identify a program file as an 23 7 interrupt subroutine INT label ve
365. only This bit is set 1 by the controller to indicate that forces are enabled Forces Installed Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 1 6 binary 0 or 1 status read only This bit is set 1 by the controller to indicate that 1 or more inputs or outputs are forced When this bit is clear a force condition is not present within the controller Fault Override At Power Up Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 8 binary Oor 1 control read only When set 1 causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 at power up The power up mode is determined by the controller mode switch and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also Fault Override on page 8 7 Startup Protection Fault Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 9 binary Oor 1 control read only When set 1 and the controller powers up in the RUN or REM RUN mode the controller executes the User Fault Routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 to resume operation If the User Fault Routine does not clear bit S 1 13 the controller faults and does not enter an executing mode Program the User Fault Routine logic accordingly Note When executi
366. ontact your local Allen Bradley representative for sales and order support e product technical training e warranty support Support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you need to contact Allen Bradley for technical assistance please review the information in the Troubleshooting appendix first Then call your local Allen Bradley representative P 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Your Questions or Comments on this Manual P 4 If you find a problem with this manual or you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful to you please contact us at the address below Allen Bradley Company Inc Control and Information Group Technical Communication Dept A602V P O Box 2086 Milwaukee WI 53201 2086 or visit our internet page at http www ab com micrologix Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Hardware Overview Hardware QVetvIe Wi iss ERU a U Meta ey SA IGN ee ee ea ES 1 1 CoOmp nent DEsCIptlOMS 13 52 Iskall ee SER I e 1 2 Communication Options ossos ss 1 5 2 Installing Your Controller Agency Certifications lt ss svs breed d rede ee 2 1 Compliance to European Union 2 2 General Considerations usuusu eee reser eee eens 2 3 Safety Considerations pe ee eR e RE ER ee te eS 2 4 Power Considerations serron Snine Ee a emm h
367. ontroller program may contain two passwords the Password and the Master Password Passwords restrict access to controllers A Master Password essentially overrides the Password The idea is that all the controllers in a project would have different Passwords but the same Master Password allowing access to all controllers for supervisory or maintenance purposes You can establish change or delete a password by using the Controller Properties dialog box It is not necessary to use passwords but if used a master password is ignored unless a password is also used Controller Properties x General Compiler Controller Communications r Password New Remove Master Password 1 New Cancel Atal Help If the Memory Module User Program has the Load Always functionality enabled and the controller User Program has a password specified the controller will compare the passwords before transferring the User Program from the Memory Module to the controller If the passwords do not match the User Program is not transferred and the program mismatch bit is set 5 5 9 6 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Clearing the Controller Memory 6 10 If you are locked out because you do not have the password for the controller you can clear the controller memory and download a new User Program You can clear the memory when the programming software prompts you for a Syst
368. ontroller then continues in the Run or test mode The subroutine does not execute for non user faults See User Fault Routine on page 23 6 for information on creating a user fault subroutine C 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Fault Messages This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the MicroLogix 1500 programmable controllers Each table lists the error code description the probable cause and the recommended corrective action Error Advisor Code M y Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0001 NVRAM ERROR The default program is loaded to the Re download or transfer the controller memory This occurs program ifa power down occurred during Verify battery is connected program download or transfer from the Contact your local Allen Bradley memory module representative if the error persists RAM integrity test failed 0002 UNEXPECTED The controller was unexpectedly reset due Refer to proper grounding RESET to a noisy environment or internal hardware guidelines in chapter 2 and using failure The default program is loaded surge suppressors in chapter 1 Verify battery is connected Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0003 MEMORY Memory module memory error This error Re program the memory module If MODULE USER can also occur when going to the Run the error persists replace the PROGRAM IS mod
369. or DIN rail The module can be detached and replaced while the system is mounted to a panel or DIN rail ATTENTION Remove power before removing or inserting an I O module When you remove or insert a module with power applied an electrical arc may occur An electrical arc can cause personal injury or property damage by sending an erroneous signal to your system s field devices causing the controller to fault causing an explosion in a hazardous environment Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance reducing product reliability ATTENTION When attaching I O modules it is very important that they are securely locked together to ensure proper electrical connection 2 25 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual To attach and lock modules Note Remove ESD barrier when attaching I O modules to a MicroLogix 1500 base unit 1 Disconnect power 2 Check that the bus lever of the module to be installed is in the unlocked fully right position 3 Use the upper and lower tongue and groove slots 1 to secure the modules together or to a controller 4 Move the module back along the tongue and groove slots until the bus connectors 2 line up with each other 5 Push the bus lever back slightly to clear the positioning tab 3 Use your fingers or a small screw driver 6 Toallow communication between
370. or additional information on connecting the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 6 4 4 12 Cable Selection Guide Cable 1747 CP3 1761 CBL AC00 Connecting the System Z M t1 s fel _ 1761 cBL Acoo H Length Connections from to External Power AIC Power Selection Supply Switch Setting Required 3m 9 8 ft SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor channel 0 porti yes external Tom Uc PC COM port porti yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem port1 yes external adapter DTAM Plus DTAM Micro porti yes external Port 1 on another AIC porti yes external 1 External power supply required unless the AlC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 2 Series B or hi Cable 1761 CBL AS03 1761 CBL AS09 gher cables are required for hardware handshaking 976 1 CBL ASOT o o o 1 1761 CBL AS03 Length Connections from to External Power AIC Power Selection Supply Switch Setting Required 3m 9 8 ft SLC 500 Fixed port3 yes external 9 5m 31 17 ft SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processors PanelView 550 RJ45 port port3 yes external 1 External power supply required unless the
371. ord or 0 to OXFFFFFFFF long word Note If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file Destination The destination operand is the sequencer location or file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words RR ERU RR RE Word 0 pN FD not used Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false 3 ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 255 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types It determines the next location
372. ore Format Access Information CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 16 383 contro read write 24 7 CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT 0 100 contro read write 24 8 OL Output Limit PD10 0 OL binary 1 enabled contro read write 24 8 0 disabled CVH Control Variable High Limit PD10 0 CVH word INT 0 10096 contro read write 24 9 CVL Control Variable Low Limit PD10 0 CVL word INT 0 10096 contro read write 24 9 Control Variable CV Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 16 383 control read write The CV Control Variable is user defined See the ladder rung below 24 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Control Variable Percent CVP Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT 0 100 control read write CVP Control Variable Percent displays the control variable as a percentage The range is 0 to 100 If the PD10 0 AM bit is off automatic mode this value tracks the control variable CV output Any value written by the programming software will be overwritten If the PD10 0 AM bit is on manual mode this value can be set by the programming software and the control variable output tracks the control variable percent value Out
373. ost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The MicroLogix 1500 can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions This bit is set by the MicroLogix 1500 It is up to the control program to utilize track and clear the lost condition Ell User Interrupt Pending UIP Using Interrupts Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP User Interrupt Pending EII 0 UIP binary bit status read only UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 and is set and cleared automatically Ell Event Interrupt Enable EIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access EIE Event Interrupt Enabled ElI 0 EIE binary bit control read write EIE Event Interrupt Enabled allows the event interrupt function to be enabled or disabled from the control program When set 1 the function is enabled when cleared 0 default the function is disabled This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle Ell Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto St
374. ot used because communication is from one remote capable device to another remote capable device Remote Station Address is set to 2 since this is the DH485 address the destination device resides at on the destination link Link ID 8 Remote Bridge Link ID is set to 8 since this is the destination link that the destination device resides on Note The Communication Command can be 500CPU Read or Write or PLCS Read or Write Note Data Table Addresses the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user specified Important You must set the Link ID to 6 in the Channel Configuration screen 25 41 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 25 42 Specifications Specifications Table 1 General Specifications Description 1764 24BWA 1764 24AWA 1764 28BXB Number of I O 12 inputs 12 inputs 16 inputs 12 outputs 12 outputs 12 outputs Line Power 85 to 265V ac 85 to 265V ac 20 4 to 30V de Power Supply Inrush 120V ac 25A 120V ac 25A 24V dc 4 for 8 ms for 8 ms for 150 ms 240V ac 40A 240V ac 40A for 4 ms for 4 ms User Power Output 24V dc at 400 mA none none 400 uF max Input Circuit Type 24V dc sink source 120V ac 24V dc sink source Output Circuit Type relay relay 6 relay 6 FET transistor 24V dc source Operating Temp 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 ambient Storage Temp 40 C to 85 C 40 to 185 ambient Operating Humidity 5 to 95 relative humidity
375. other device See Real Time Clock Function File on page 8 2 for more information RTC Day of Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 39 word 11031 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device See Real Time Clock Function File on page 8 2 for more information RTC Hours Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 40 word 01023 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device See Real Time Clock Function File on page 8 2 for more information RTC Minutes Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 41 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device See Real Time Clock Function File on page 8 2 for more information G 22 System Status File RTC Seconds Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 42 word 0 to 59 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device See Real Time Clock
376. ou may use blue for dc wiring and red for ac wiring Wiring Your Controller When wiring without spade lugs it is recommended to keep the finger safe covers in place Loosen the terminal screw and route the wires through the opening in the finger safe cover Tighten the terminal screw making sure the pressure plate secures the wire Finger Safe Cover Spade Lug Wiring The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5 5 mm 0 220 in The input and output terminals of the MicroLogix 1500 base unit are designed to accept a 6 35mm 0 25 in wide spade standard for 6 screw for up to 14 AWG or a 4 mm metric 4 fork terminal When using spade lugs use a small flat blade screwdriver to pry the finger safe cover from the terminal blocks then loosen the terminal screw Finger Safe Cover 3 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Surge Suppressors 3 4 Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output contacts Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life expectancy of relay contacts By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you will prolong the life of the output or relay contacts You will also reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to that inductive device and will reduce electrical noise from ra
377. ould result Installing Your Controller Note If you are using an external de power supply interrupt the de output side rather than the ac line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn off The ac line of the de output power supply should be fused Connect a set of master control relays in series with the de power supplying the input and output circuits Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices should be removed When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits power continues to be provided to the controller s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize I O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing output fuses or working on equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system Note Do not control the master control relay with the controller Pro
378. output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVL Control Value Low you enter is the minimum output in percent that the Control Variable attains If the calculated CV is below the minimum value the CV is set overridden to the CVL value you entered and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVL value you enter determines when the lower limit alarm bit LL is set If CV is below the minimum value the output is not overridden and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set 24 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Tuning Parameters The table below shows the tuning parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program For Format Access Information KC Controller Gain PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 contro read write 24 11 TI Reset Term PD10 0 TI word INT 0 to 32 767 contro read write 24 11 TD Rate Term Ty PD 10 0 TD word INT 0 to 32 767 contro read write 24 12 TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary 0 or 1 contro read write 24 12 LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1to 1024 contro read write 24 18 ZCD Zero Crossing Deadband PD10 0 ZCD word INT 0 to 32 767 contro read write 24 13 FF Fe
379. ovided for a controller looking for an pulse When an external signal is detected the controller latches this event In general at the next input scan following this event the input image point is turned on and remains for the next controller scan It is then set to off at the next input scan The following figures help demonstrate this Using Inputs and Outputs Rising Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status Input File Value Rising Edge Behavior Example 2 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status Input File Value Note The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay Important The input file value does not represent the external input when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for rising edge behavior the input file value will normally be off on for 1 scan when a rising edge pulse is detected 5 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The prev
380. owing conditions must exist to start the PTO The PTO instruction must be in an idle state For idle state behavior all of the following conditions must be met Jog Pulse JP bit must be off Jog Continuous JC bit must be off Enable Hardstop EH bit must be off Normal Operation NS bit must be off The output cannot be forced e The rung it is on must transition from a False state 0 to a True state 1 10 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Momentary Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a momentary or transitional type of input This means that the false to true rung transition enables the PTO instruction and then returns to a false state prior to the PTO instruction completing its operation If a transitional input to the PTO instruction is used the Done DN bit turns on when the instruction completes but will only remain on until the next time the PTO instruction is scanned in the user program The structure of the control program determines when the DN bit goes off So to detect when the PTO instruction completes its output you can monitor the Done DN Idle ID or Normal Operation NO status bits Table 10 2 Chart 1 Momentary rung Logic Enable Stage Rung State Sub Elements Normal Operation INO Pax EET Relative Timing Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS
381. owing operands File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated e Control The control operand is the address of the BSL s control element The control element consists of 3 words 8 ea Word 0 pN 2 ER3 UL used Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The valid data range for length is from 0 to 2048 e Source The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the first lowest bit position Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 19 7 BSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level E Parameter z 2 B aramete x Slols Sj
382. per limit of 100 corresponds to a Control Variable limit of 16383 24 22 Process Control Instruction Scaling to Engineering Units Scaling lets you enter the setpoint and zero crossing deadband values in engineering units and display the process variable and error values in the same engineering units Remember the process variable PV must still be within the range 0 16383 The PV is displayed in engineering units however Select scaling as follows 1 Enter the maximum and minimum scaling values MaxS and MinS in the PID control block The value corresponds to an analog value of zero for the lowest reading of the process variable and corresponds to an analog value of 16383 for the highest reading These values reflect the process limits Setpoint scaling is selected by entering a non zero value for one or both parameters If you enter the same value for both parameters setpoint scaling is disabled For example if measuring a full scale temperature range of 73 C PV 0 to 1156 PV 16383 enter a value of 73 for and 1156 for Remember that inputs to the PID instruction must be 0 to 16383 Signal conversions could be as follows Process limits 73 to 1156 C Transmitter output if used 4 to 20 mA Output of analog input module 0 to 16383 PID instruction MinS to MaxS 73 to 41156 C 2 Enter the setpoint word 2 and deadband word 9 in the same scaled engineering units Read the
383. porting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems In the point to point topology configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Full Duplex protocol In the multi drop topology configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem Radio modems may be implemented in a point to point topology supporting either Half Duplex or Full Duplex communications or in a multi drop topology supporting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems In the point to point topology using Full Duplex radio modems configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Full Duplex protocol In the point to point topology using Half Duplex radio modems or multi drop topology using Half Duplex radio modems configure the MicroLogix 1500 controllers for DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol If these radio modems require RTS CTS handshaking configure the control line parameter to Half Duplex Modem Line drivers also called short haul modems do not actually modulate the serial data but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances up to several miles Allen Bradley s AIC Advanced Interface Converter is a line driver that converts an RS 232 electrical signal into an RS485 electrical signal increasing the signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet In a point to point line driver topology configure t
384. preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value 9 25 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Overflow OVF Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OVF Overflow HSC 0 OVF long word 32 bit INT control read write The OVF Overflow defines the upper count limit for the counter If the counters accumulated value increments past the value specified in this variable an overflow interrupt is generated and the HSC sub system rolls the accumulator over to the underflow value the counter continues counting from the underflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the overflow position provided it is greater than the underflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the overflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Note Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error will be generated Underflow UNF Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF long word 32 bit control read write 9 26 The UNF Underflow defines the lower co
385. provement This connection must be made for safety purposes ATTENTION Remove the protective debris strips before applying power to the controller Failure to remove the strips may cause the controller to overheat 3 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Wiring Diagrams The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers Controllers with de inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing configuration Sinking and sourcing does not apply to ac inputs Note This amp symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immunity improvement This connection must be made for safety purposes Sinking and Sourcing Circuits Any of the MicroLogix 1500 DC embedded input groups can be configured as sinking or so urcing depending on how the DC COM is wired on the group See pages 3 10 through 3 13 for sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams Type Definition Sinking Input The input energizes when high level voltage is applied to the input terminal active high Connect the power supply VDC to the DC COM terminal Sourcing Input The input energizes when low level voltage is applied to the input terminal active low Connect the power supply VDC to the DC COM terminal 3 8 ATTENTION The 24V dc user power source should not be use
386. pt of RTS Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master device For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to no handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to DF1 Half Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion D 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX RSLinx 2 0 or higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 or PLC 5 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master RS 232 DF1 Protocol d MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 03 Processor MicroLogix 1500 SLC 500 Fixed I O Programmable Modular Controller Programmable Controllers Controller with 1747 KE Controller Interface Module Note Itis recommended that isolation 1761 NET AIC be provided between the MicroLogix 1500 and th
387. pts The STI instruction has one operand Time This is the amount of time in milliseconds which must expire prior to executing the selectable timed user interrupt A value of zero disables the STI function The time range is from 0 to 65 535 milliseconds The STS instruction applies the specified set point to the STI function as follows e Ifa zero set point is specified the STI is disabled and STI O TIE is cleared 0 Ifthe STI is disabled not timing and a value greater than 0 is entered into the set point the STI starts timing to the new set point and STI 0 TIE is set 1 e Ifthe STI is currently timing and the set point is changed the new setting takes effect immediately and the STI continues to time until it reaches the new set point Note that if the new setting is less than the current accumulated time the STI times out immediately For example if the STI has been timing for 15 microseconds and the STI set point is changed from 20 microseconds to 10 microseconds an STI user interrupt occurs at the next start of rung Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 23 3 STS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Level o B Parameter E 2 M S OP a a 51110 e geggor
388. put Limit OL 24 8 Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OL Output Limit PD10 0 OL binary 1 enabled control read write 0 disabled An enabled 1 value enables output limiting to the values defined in PD10 0 CVH Control Variable High and PD10 0 CVL Control Variable Low A disabled 0 value disables OL Output Limiting Control Variable High Limit CVH Process Control Instruction Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access CVH Control Variable High Limit PD10 0 CVH word INT 0 100 control read write When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVH Control Value High you enter is the maximum output in percent that the control variable attains If the calculated CV exceeds the CVH the CV is set overridden to the value you entered and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is disabled 0 the CVH value you enter determines when the upper limit alarm bit UL is set If CV exceeds the maximum value the output is not overridden and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set Control Variable Low Limit CVL Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access CVL Control Variable Low Limit PD10 0 CVL word INT 0 10096 control read write When the
389. r Control Bits Communication Command 485CIF Read Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address 47 0 Size in Elements E Awaiting Execution EW 0 Chanel 0 5 Error ER o Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 15 Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Offset 20 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Node Addr dec octal Local Remote Local Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors In the display above the MicroLogix 1500 processor reads five elements words from Local Node 2 s CIF file starting at word 20 or byte 20 for non SLC 500 devices The five elements are placed in your integer file starting at word N7 0 If 15 seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the instruction timed out The device at node 2 understands the 485CIF PLC 2 emulation protocol 25 30 Communications Instruction Function Key Description This Communication Specifies the type of message Valid types are 500CPU Read 500CPU Write 485CIF Read Controller Command 485CIF Write PLC5 Read PLC5 Write Data Table For a Read Destination this is the address in the initiating processor which is to receive data Address Valid file types are B T C R N and L For a Write Source this is the address in the initiating processor which is to send data Valid file types are B T C R N I O and L
390. r 2 6 Preventing Excessive Heat eer et e Re 2 8 Master Control Relay cesse Re RR Re D ege deg 2 8 Base Unit Mounting Dimensions 0 0 cece eh 2 13 Controller Spacing lese eee UR KLO ee ee HR SE 2 13 Mounting the Controller 2 14 Installing Controller 2 18 3 Wiring Your Controller Wire Requirements oropa e eg a cede elas Foie he ee ale CRI EN 3 1 Using Surge Suppressors 1 0 eee rr rer rst rr rss rea 3 4 Grounding the Controller see 3 7 Wiring Diagrams ele eR lee lI EIN Hp RA DER RN eere 3 8 Sinking and Sourcing Circuits lees 3 8 Controller VO Wiring iur Ree AEST EN OREN Co bw ee a Eee E 3 14 4 Connecting the System Default Communication Configuration 0 0 0 cece eee 4 1 Using the Communications Toggle Push Button 4 2 Connecting to the RS 232 Port sssesssressererrrrrsrerser e 4 3 Connecting to a DH485 Network 888 4 8 Connecting the ATC E c eee du ceed rd ed ben Nr e b Res 4 12 DeviceNet Communications 0 cece hmm 4 20 toc i MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 5 toc ii Using Inputs and Outputs Embedded OE OR MED RO deut 5 2 Expansion VO e cue tel ed reta eva addetti pe a due todas 5 2
391. r PK Relay 150V max ac or DC 700 N24 Miscellaneous electromagnetic 150V max ac or DC 700 N24 devices limited to 35 sealed VA 3 6 Wiring Your Controller Grounding the Controller In solid state control systems grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the base unit to the electrical panel s ground bus prior to connecting any devices Use AWG 14 wire This connection must be made for safety purposes This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional information Additional grounding connections from the mounting tabs or DIN rail if used are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded You must also provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your application Note For panel mounting installation Be sure to use screws in the mounting positions where there are grounding stampings O l4 Grounding Stamping 000000000 Grounding Stamping NG Note This symbol denotes a protective earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immunity im
392. r Source if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 255 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to receive the current comparison data Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 for words and 0 to 127 for long words The position is incremented on each false to true transition Note If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file 20 4 Sequencer Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 20 2 SQC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Data Files Function Files E Address Level Parameter E 2 B Q amp Ses 8 a n o lols 51512 siz polg glo 15 l S IS 5 la 5 5618 2 5 ST File mm mm ole ole Mask ele ole Source gio mm Control 1 Length Position 1 Control file only Note If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words 20 5
393. ram file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the HSC See also Interrupt Latency on page 23 5 9 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT 0107 status read only 1 ForMode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The ERs Error Codes detected by the HSC sub system will be displayed in this word Errors include Table 9 2 HSC Error Codes Error Code Name Mode Description 1 Invalid File Number n a Interrupt program file identified in HSC 0 PFN is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not exist Invalid Mode n a Invalid Mode Invalid High Preset 0 1 High preset is less than or equal to zero 0 2107 High preset is less than or equal to low preset 4 Invalid Overflow 0107 High preset is greater than overflow For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 Function Enabled FE Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access FE Function Enabled HSC 0 FE bit 0107 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The FE Function Enabled is a status control bit that defines when the HSC interrupt is enabled
394. rammable Controllers User Manual Controller Error Recovery Model Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and hardware problems in the micro controller The model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system Refer to the recommended pages within the model for further help Is the error hardware related Identify the error code and description Refer to page C 3 for Are the wire No probable cause and connections recommended action tight Yes Clear fault Is the Power No LED on Yes Correct the condition Is the RUN LED No causing the fault on Yes on Return controller to RUN or any of the REM test modes Tighten wire connections Does the controller have power supplied Check power Yes Refer to page C 3 for probable cause and recommended action Is the Fault LED No Is an input LED No accurately showing status Yes Test and verify system operation C4 Refer to page C 3 for probable cause and recommended action Refer to page C 3 for probable cause and recommended action Troubleshooting Your System Identifying Controller Faults While a program is executing a fault may occur within the operating system or your program When a fault occurs you have various options to determine
395. range The LIM instruction is evaluated based on the Low Limit Test and High Limit values as shown in the following table Table 14 11 LIM Instruction Operation Based on Low Limit Test and High Limit Values When And Rung State Low Limit lt High Limit Low Limit lt Test lt High Limit true Low Limit lt High Limit Test lt Low Limit or Test gt High Limit false High Limit lt Low Limit High Limit lt Test lt Low Limit false High Limit lt Low Limit Test gt High Limit or Test lt Low Limit true The Low Limit Test and High Limit values can be word addresses or constants restricted to the following combinations Ifthe Test parameter is a constant both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word or long word addresses If the Test parameter is a word or long word address the Low Limit and High Limit parameters can be either a constant a word or a long word address But the Low Limit and High Limit parameters cannot both be constants When mixed sized parameters are used all parameters are put into the format of the largest parameter For instance if a word and a long word are used the word is converted to a long word The data ranges are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Compare Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 12 LIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For
396. ration 174 XOR Exclusive OR Perform an Exclusive Or operation 17 5 NOT Logical NOT Perform a NOT operation 17 6 Using Logical Instructions When using logical instructions observe the following Source and Destination must be of the same data size i e all words or all long words Source and Source B can be a constant or an address but both cannot be constants e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 long word 17 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 17 1 Logical Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 m Mode Level 2 Q S 23 5 2 ce ln 2 eo o 5 o o 1 B 5 5 IGE 1G 0 5 21910 Source ele Source p ele Destination ele ele 1 See I
397. red If the integer monitoring mode was not previously invoked the DAT displays the first element of the list However there may be a brief delay while the DAT requests information from the controller If there is a delay the working screen is displayed See Working Screen Operation on page 7 14 Entering Bit Monitoring Mode Bit monitoring allows you to view and modify bit locations in the controller The DAT enters the bit monitoring mode automatically following a successful power up The bit monitoring mode can also be selected by pressing the BIT key If the bit monitoring mode was previously invoked the DAT displays the last bit element monitored If the bit monitoring mode was not previously invoked the DAT displays the first element of the list However there may be a brief delay while the DAT requests information from the controller During the delay the working screen will display See Working Screen Operation on page 7 14 Monitoring and Editing 7 12 1 Press the INT or BIT key to enter the desired mode The element number flashes if not protected 2 Use the up down key to scroll through the list of elements 3 Press ENTER to select the element you want to edit The element number becomes steady and the data flashes if it is not protected Note If the element is protected the enter key is ignored 4 Use the up down key to change the data Bit values toggle between and OFF Integer values incre
398. red automatically STI Timed Interrupt Enabled TIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STI O TIE binary bit control read write The TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the timed interrupt mechanism When set 1 timing is enabled when clear 0 timing is disabled If this bit is cleared disabled while the timer is running the accumulated value is cleared 0 If the bit is then set 1 timing will start This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle STI Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only The AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the STI function automatically starts whenever the MicroLogix 1500 controller enters any executing mode 23 17 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual STI Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detec
399. ress used by the 1785 K A5 communication interface module Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 not used because communication is from one remote capable device to another remote capable device Remote Station Address is the SLC 5 04 processor at node address 1 Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH network with the 1785 KA5 and the SLC 5 04 processor Link ID 2 Note Data Table Addresses the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user specified Important Set the MicroLogix 1500 s Link ID in the channel configuration screen 25 35 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual MicroLogix 1500 Processor Device C to a PLC 5 Device B via 1785 KA5 293 MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 General This Controller Control Bits Communication Command PLC5 write Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements 2 Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Channel 0 Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN o Message Timeout b jJ Message Transmitting ST p Data Table Address p Message Enabled 0 Local Bridge Addr p octal Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr oo ds Remote Station Address dec 3 Remote Bridge Link ID Error code Error Description No errors Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by a MicroLogix processor on the DH485 Link ID 1 Local Bridge Node A
400. ritten permission of Allen Bradley Company Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to identify a hazard avoid a hazard recognize the consequences Note Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product MicroLogix Compact SLC DTAM Micro PanelView are trademarks of Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 is a trademark of Rockwell Software Inc Windows is a trademark of MicroSoft Corporation Belden is a trademark of Belden Inc Preface Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual the purpose of this manual related documentation conventions used in this manual e Allen Bradley support Who Should Use this Manual Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1500 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product Purpose of this Manual This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1500 controllers It describes
401. rogrammable Controllers User Manual What is an Interrupt 23 2 An interrupt is an event that causes the processor to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspended task at the point where it suspended The Micrologix 1500 supports the following User Interrupts e User Fault Routine Event Interrupts 4 High Speed Counter Interrupts 2 e Selectable Timed Interrupt An interrupt must be configured and enabled to execute When any one of the interrupts is configured and enabled and subsequently occurs the user program will 1 suspend its execution 2 perform a defined task based upon which interrupt occurred 3 return to the suspended operation Program File 2 Interrupt Operation Example nung Program File 10 Program File 2 is the main control program Program File 10 is the interrupt routine An Interrupt Event occurs at rung 123 rung 123 K Program File 10 is executed Program File 2 execution resumes ed immediately after rung 123 rung 275 Specifically if the controller program is executing normally and an interrupt event OCCUIS 1 the processor will stop its normal execution determine which interrupt occurred go immediately to rung 0 of the subroutine specified for that User Interrupt BS begin executing until the end of that User Interrupt subroutine or set of subroutines if the specified subroutine
402. rs User Manual High Speed Counter Function File Sub Elements Summary Each HSC is comprised of 36 sub elements These sub elements are either bit word or long word structures that are used to provide control over the HSC function or provide HSC status information for use within the control program Each of the sub elements and their respective functions are described in this chapter A summary of the sub elements is provided in the following table All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical Table 9 1 High Speed Counter Function File HSC 0 or HSC 1 Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Type UserProgram For More Modes Access Information PFN Program File Number HSC 0 PFN INT 0107 contro read only 9 5 ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT 0107 status read only 9 6 UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC 0 UIX bit 0107 status read only 9 9 UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC 0 UIE bit 0107 contro read write 9 8 UIL User Interrupt Lost HSC 0 UIL bit 0107 status read write 9 10 UIP User Interrupt Pending HSC 0 UIP bit 0107 status read only 9 9 FE Function Enabled HSC 0 FE bit 0107 contro read write 9 6 AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bit 0107 contro read only 9 7 ED Error Detected HSC 0 ED bit 0107 status read only 9 7 CE Counting Enabled HSC 0 CE bit 0107 contro read write 9 7 SP Set Parameters HSC 0 SP bit
403. rsus regular subroutine SBR label This should be the first instruction in your interrupt subroutine STS Selectable Timed Start Use the STS Selectable Timed Interrupt Start 23 8 instruction to the start the STI timer from the control program rather than starting automatically UID User Interrupt Disable Use the User Interrupt Disable UID and the User 23 9 Interrupt Enable UIE instructions to create zones in User Interrupt Enable which I O interrupts cannot occur 23 10 UIF User Interrupt Flush Use the instruction to remove selected pending 23 12 interrupts from the system INT Interrupt Subroutine Instruction Type input INT O Interrupt F When Rung Is Table 23 1 Execution Time for the INT Instruction True 0 16 us False n a The INT instruction is used as a label to identify a user interrupt service routine ISR This instruction is placed as the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Use of the INT instruction is optional 23 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual STS Selectable Timed Start STS Selectable Timed Start Time 1 23 8 Instruction Type output Table 23 2 Execution Time for the STS Instruction When Rung Is True False 62 73 us 0 00 ps The STS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interru
404. s Input I and Output Bit B Integer N Timer T Counter C and Control R Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted Table F 2 MicroLogix 1500 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Form Operand Time us O 1 5 15 O1 0 13 24 13 71 5 15 B 1 21 58 BPLE 22 04 Le 5 18 L 1 21 18 21 26 TAT 6 04 1 21 82 21 74 T4 ACC 6 02 T 1 ACC 21 49 T 7 ACC 22 20 O 1 2 4 98 O 0 2 12 83 F 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Table F 2 MicroLogix 1500 Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Form Operand Time us O V2 13 38 0 1 0 6 29 O1 Y 7 23 O 0 15 24 OT VP 15 10 B3T y2 4 98 B 1 2 21 21 2 21 85 B3 1 6 29 B3TYT 7 23 Bl HUP 23 73 Bi VIN7 3 23 58 L8 2 4 87 L 1 2 20 98 L V2 21 85 L8 1 6 29 Ley p 7 38 23 73 LIE 23 41 T4 J DN 5 14 T 1 DN 20 99 TFT DN 21 45 T4T ACC 2 5 89 T 1 ACC 2
405. s Enabled and Waiting EW Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EW Binary On Off Status Read Only The Enabled and Waiting Bit EW is set after the enable bit is set and the message is in the buffer and waiting to be sent Important Do not set or clear this bit It is informational only Error ER Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ER Binary On Off Status Read Only The Error Bit ER is set when message transmission has failed An error code is written to the MSG File The ER bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Important Do not set or clear this bit It is informational only Done DN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 DN Binary On Off Status Read Only The Done Bit DN is set when the message is transmitted successfully The DN bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Important Do not set or clear this bit It is informational only Start ST Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ST Binary On Off Status Read Only The Start Bit ST is set when the processor receives acknowledgment ACK from the target device The ST bit is cleared when the DN ER or TO bit is set Important Do not set or clear this bit It is informational only 25 13 MicroLogix 1500
406. s Bit The Controller 0 0 always resets 0 1 Overflow always resets 0 2 7 Bit sets if destination is zero otherwise S 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the MSB of the destination is set otherwise resets File Instructions 1 9 File Instructions The file instructions perform operations on file data Instruction Used To Page COP Copy File Copy a range of data from one file 19 2 location to another FLL Fill File Load a file with a program constant or a 19 3 value from an element address BSL Bit Shift Left Load and unload data into a bit array one 19 5 BSR Bit Shift Right me 197 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 19 9 the same order first in first out FFU First In First Out FIFO 19 12 Unload LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 19 15 LFU Last In First Out LIFO reverse order last in first out 19 18 Unload 19 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual COP Copy File Instruction Type output COP sve Table 19 1 Execution Time for the COP Instruction Lum i When Rung Is True False d6us 07yuswod 0 00ps The COP instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another Table 19 2 COP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this
407. s used and so on Important Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IIM cannot be used with expansion I O Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied to the slot If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data from slot is passed to the input data file A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data in slot from being passed to the input data file The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFF Bit 15 14 13 1211109 8716 5 4131211 0 Real Input Input Word Mask 010101010101010111111111111 11011 Input Data File Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Input Word Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the input data file Input and Output Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 22 2 IIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files d Mode Level E E o B Parameter Sol T S a amp 5115 5 5 Z lolo o zel lelo 2 85 225 o 215 1 16 lola elz Ju ISS E18 lo EE EES ia Slot Mask ele elele Length 22 3 MicroLog
408. sabled disabled When EOT Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Message Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are not set to 0 Poll Timeout x20 ms 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 50 Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladder program needs to requeue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero RTS Off Delay x20 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay x20 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon recei
409. sage is used the destination file is the data file in the local or originating processor Note Input or output data file types are not valid for read messages For Write Messages When a write message is used the destination file is the data file in the target processor 25 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual The maximum number of elements that can be transmitted or received are shown in the table below You cannot cross file types when sending messages For example you cannot read a timer into an integer file and you cannot write counters to a timer file The only exception to this rule is that long integer data can be read written to bit or integer files Note The table below is not intended to illustrate file compatibility only the maximum number of elements that can be exchanged in each case Input S Status R Control Output T Timer N Integer 16 bit Bit C Counter L Long Integer 32 bit This Controller Message Target Device Maximum Number of Elements in Message Type Format MicroLogix 1500 File Type This Controller MicroLogix 1500 File Type sic B N S B N 103 or PLC L L 51 Read or Write C R C R 34 SLC T T 34 PLC T T 20 sic B N 1 0 103 or Read PLC B N L 103 L I O S B N 51 stc 1 0 S B N 103 or Write PLC I O B N L 103 L S B N 51 B N E teri 103 Read CIF L C Common
410. second 265V Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation A 6 Table 9 Working Voltage 1764 24BWA Specification Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Specifications 1764 24BWA Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 265V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Power Supply User 24V Output to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 600V ac for 1 second or 848V dc for 1 second 50V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Input Group to Input Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second 75V dc Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 265V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Output Group Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second 265V Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual A 8 Table 10 Working Voltage 1764 28BXB Specification
411. section describes the timing diagram for a MicroLogix 1500 MSG instruction Target node Target node processes packet Rung goes true receives packet successfully and returns data read or writes data success 0 9 pH EN 0 1 rv gt M s S ST 0 1 i DN 0 1 0 TO 0 _ 1 If is room in any of the four active message buffers when the MSG rung becomes true and the MSG is scanned the EN and EW bits are set If this were a MSG write instruction the source data would be transferred to the message buffer at this time Not shown in the diagram If there is no room in the four message buffers the message request is put in the MSG queue only the EN bit is set The MSG queue works on a first in first out basis that allows the MicroLogix 1500 controller to remember the order in which the MSG instructions were enabled When a buffer becomes available the first message in the queue is placed into the buffer and the EW bit is set 1 Note The control program does not have access to the MicroLogix 1500 communications queue Once the EN bit is set 1 it remains set until the entire message process is complete and either the DN ER or TO bit is set 1 The MSG Timeout period begins timing when the EN bit is set 1 If the timeout period expires before the 25 21 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 25 22 MSG
412. ser Interrupt Enable UIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable STI O UIE binary bit control read write The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable STI subroutine processing This bit must be set if the user wants the controller to process the STI subroutine at the configured time interval STI User Interrupt Lost UIL 23 16 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost STI 0 UIL binary bit status read write The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The MicroLogix 1500 can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions This bit is set by the MicroLogix 1500 It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition STI User Interrupt Pending UIP Using Interrupts Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP User Interrupt Pending STI O UIP binary bit status read only The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 and is set and clea
413. sing algorithm is used The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH485 network DH485 Token Rotation D 10 A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses 0 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix 1000 or 1500 controller or an SLC 5 02 or higher processor Understanding the Communication Protocols DH485 Configuration Parameters When the MicroLogix 1500 communications are configured for DH485 the following parameters can be changed Table 25 3 DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Default BaudRae 9600 192K MK Node Address 1 to 31 decimal 1 Token Hold Factor 104 2 Node Address 11031 31 See Software Considerations on page D 15 for tips on setting the parameters listed above Devices that use the DH485 Network In addition to the MicroLogix 1500 controllers the devices shown in the following table also support the DH485 network Table 25 4 Allen Bradley Devices that Support DH485 Communication Catalog Number Description Installation Function Publication Bulletin 1761 MicroLogix 1000 Series Cor controllers support
414. st be scanned on a true rung of logic When scanned the message and the data defined within the message if it is a write message are placed in a communication buffer The controller continues to scan the remaining user program The message is processed and sent out the controller through the communications port If a second message instruction is processed before the first message completes the second message and its data are placed in one of the three remaining communication buffers This process repeats whenever a message instruction is processed until all four buffers are in use When a buffer is available the message and its associated data are placed in the buffer immediately If all four buffers are full when the next fifth message is processed the message request not the data is placed in a communications queue The queue is a message storage area that keeps track of messages that have not been allocated a buffer The queue operates as a first in first out FIFO storage area The first message request stored in the queue is the message that will be allocated a buffer as soon as a buffer becomes available The queue can accommodate all MSG instructions in a ladder program When a message request in a buffer is completed the buffer is released back to the system If a message is in the queue that message is then allocated a buffer At that time the data associated with the message is read from within the controller Note If a m
415. struction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Using the High Speed Counter HSL High Speed Counter Load HSC Number High Preset Low Preset Output High Output Low Sourct 8 High Speed Counter Load HSCO N7 0 N7 1 N7 2 N7 3 Instruction Type output Table 9 13 Execution Time for the HSL Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False word 41 85 us 0 00 us long word 42 95us 0 00 us The HSL High Speed Load instruction allows the high and low presets and high and low output source to be applied to a high speed counter These parameters are described below Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used 0 HSCO and 1 High Preset Specifies the value in the high preset register The data ranges for the high preset are 32786 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Low Preset Specifies the value in the low preset register The data ranges for the low preset are 32786 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Output High Source Specifies the value in the output high register The data range for the output high source is from 0 to FFFF Output Low Source Specifies the value in the output low register The data range for the output low source is from 0 to FFFF 9 29 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Valid Addressing Modes
416. structions to change the order in which the processor scans a ladder program Typically these instructions are used to minimize scan time create a more efficient program and to troubleshoot a ladder program Instruction Used To Page JMP Jump to Label Jump forward backward to a 21 2 LBL Label corresponding label instruction 212 JSR Jump to Subroutine Jump to a designated subroutine and 21 3 SBR Subroutine Label ed 21 3 RET Return from Subroutine 21 4 SUS Suspend Debug or diagnose your user program 21 4 TND Temporary End Abort current ladder scan 21 5 END Program End End a program or subroutine 21 5 Master Control Reset Enable or inhibit a master control zone in 21 6 your ladder program 21 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual JMP Jump to Label NPS LBL Label 21 2 Instruction output Table 21 1 Execution Time for the JMP Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 39 us 0 00 us The JMP instruction causes the controller to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number Jumps can be forward or backward in ladder logic within the same program file Multiple JMP instructions may cause execution to proceed to the same label The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file Instruction Type input Tab
417. t This is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan e Output Bit This is the bit address which is set based on a false to true OSR or true to false OSF rung transition The Output Bit is set for one program scan To re activate the OSR the rung must become false To re activate the OSF the rung must become true Table 12 12 OSR Storage and Output Bit Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit false to true one scan bit is set bit is set true to true bit is set bit is reset true to false and false to false bit is reset bit is reset Table 12 13 OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit true to false one scan bit is reset bit is set false to false bit is reset bit is reset Relay Type Bit Instructions Table 12 13 OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation Storage Bit bit is set Rung State Transition false to true and true to true Output Bit bit is reset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 12 14 OSR and OSF Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files o Mode Level S Parameter z 18 S Q a O zms e9 zie S 1 151121815 2 25 amp o 51
418. t Instructions Input and Output Instructions The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans Instruction Used To Page IIM Immediate Input with Mask Update data prior to the normal input 22 2 scan IOM Immediate Output with Mask Update outputs prior to the normal output 22 4 scan REF I O Refresh Interrupt the program scan to execute the 22 6 I O scan write outputs service communications read inputs 22 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual IIM Immediate Input with Mask Instruction Type output IIM Immediate Input w Mask um nae Note This instruction is used for the MicroLogix 1500 on board I O only It is not Length 1 designed to be used with expansion T O Table 22 1 Execution Time for the IIM Instruction When Rung Is True False 22 06 us 0 00 us The IIM instruction allows you to selectively update input data without waiting for the automatic input scan This instruction uses the following operands 22 2 Slot This operand defines the location where data is obtained for updating the input file The location specifies the slot number and but the word where data is to be obtained For example if slot I 0 input data from slot O starting at word 0 is masked and placed in input data file I 0 starting at word 0 for the specified length If slot 2 I0 1 word 1 of slot O i
419. t bit bits 0 7 in 5 5 was set at Correct the instruction logic END OF SCAN the end of scan causing the error DETECTED Enter the status file display in your programming software and clear the fault Enterthe Run mode 0022 WATCHDOG The program scan time exceeded the Determine if the program is caught TIMER EXPIRED watchdog timeout value S 3H in a loop and correct the problem SEE 5 3 Increase the watchdog timeout value in the status file 0023 STI ERROR An error occurred in the STI configuration See the Error Code in the STI Function File for the specific error 0028 INVALID OR A fault routine number was entered in Either clear the fault routine file NCCE EAI the status file number S 29 but either number S 29 in the status file or the fault routine was not physicall j j ROUTINE VALUE physically create a fault routine for the file created or the fault routine number was less than 3 or greater than 255 number reference in the status file 5 29 The file number must be greater than 2 and less than 256 C 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Error Code Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0029 INSTRUCTION An indirect address reference in the ladder Correct the program to ensure that INDIRECTION program is outside of the entire data file there are no indirect references OUTSIDE OF space outside data file space DAT
420. t if an error is present in the STI sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set the user should look at the error code in parameter STI 0 ER This bit is controlled by the MicroLogix 1500 and is set and cleared automatically STI Set Point Milliseconds Between Interrupts SPM 23 18 Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access SPM Set Point Msec STEO SPM INT 0 to 65 535 control read write When the controller transitions to an executing mode the SPM set point in milliseconds value is loaded into the STI If the STI is configured correctly and enabled the program file identified in the STI variable PFN is scanned at this interval This value can be changed from the control program by using the STS instruction Note The minimum value cannot be less than the time required to scan the STI program file STI 0 PFN plus the Interrupt Latency Using Interrupts Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File 75 Function Files Hsc Pro Pwm sm Ell joar gt SU ef H PFN Program File Number HER Error Code User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending EIE Event Interrupt Enabled AS Auto Start ED Error Detected ES Edge Select 1 rising 0 falling 15 Input Select The EII
421. tains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit 9 15 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Overflow Interrupt OFI Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access OFI Overflow Interrupt HSC 0 OFI bit 0107 status read write 1 ForMode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The OFI Overflow Interrupt status bit will be set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the overflow value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the overflow variable caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the overflow this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and will also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes e Underflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Count Direction DIR 9 16 Sub Element Description Address Data Format HSC Modes UserProgram Access DIR Count Direction HSC 0 DIR bit 0107 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 9 18 The DIR Count Direction status flag is controlled by the HSC sub system When the HSC
422. tatus Bits 15 3 ADD Add SUB SUDtr Ct 5 dvs ere sr e ee 15 4 MUL Multiply DIV Divide 0 00 0 0 eee eee 15 5 NEG Ne Sate lens Deen sae eg Dee DE ie ae pe ee erg eh 15 6 CER 15 6 Scalet see acer ped USER RWER MES 15 7 SCP Scale with Parameters 2 re 15 8 S R Square Root D RANT MEN OR RI EA ded 15 10 Conversion Instructions Using Decode and Encode Instructions 0 0 0 eee rr rr rer eee 16 2 DCD Decode 4 to 1 0f 16 ke RAR BR Rye teen nee 16 3 ENC Encode 1 o0f 16 to 4 0 ccc cence 16 4 FRD Convert from Binary Coded 1 16 6 TOD Convert to Binary Coded 1 16 10 Logical Instructions Using Logical II 17 1 Updates to Math Status 17 2 AND Bit Wise AND era CS ate OR EN eee aA 17 3 OR Eogicab OR a Sa ees aN Saracens M a 17 4 XOR Exclusive OR ES Me bg Bl kr de Been 17 5 NOT Eogical NOT tb nes Se SES eh Sh ed SS 17 6 Move Instructions MOV MOVE eee eee ente ele A tala lend Rc rime Rt belt alt 18 2 MVM Masked Move 0 cece eee eee tenet nent AN 18 4 File Instructions
423. ters the controller and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load The power rating is expressed in volt amperes VA Power Supply Inrush 2 6 During power up the MicroLogix 1500 power supply allows a brief inrush current to charge internal capacitors Many power lines and control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief time If the power source cannot supply this inrush current the source voltage may sag momentarily The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the MicroLogix 1500 is that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly However the effect of a voltage sag on other equipment should be considered For example a deep voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source The following considerations determine whether the power source must be required to supply high inrush current The power up sequence of devices in a system The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush current cannot be supplied The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system If the entire system is powered up at the same time a brief sag in the power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment Installing Your Controller Loss of Power Source The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The
424. the procedures you use to install wire program and troubleshoot your controller This manual explains how to install and wire your controllers gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1500 controller system e provides the instruction set for the MicroLogix 1500 controllers contains application examples to show the instruction set in use Refer to your programming software user documentation for more information on programming your MicroLogix 1500 controller P 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Allen Bradley products To obtain a copy contact your local Allen Bradley office or distributor For Read this Document Pocument Number Information on understanding and applying micro MicroMentor 1761 MMB controllers Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1500 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Base Units including a mounting template for easy 1764 5 1 Controllers Installation Instructions installation A description on how to install and connect an AIC This Advanced Interface Converter HE 1761 6 4 manual also contains information network wiring AIC User Manual EN on how to install configure and commission a DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 65 Information on DF1 open protocol DF1 Protocol and Command Set 1770 6 5 16 Reference Manual In depth information on grounding and
425. the Base Units Memory Modules Real Time Clock Modules and the Right End Cap Terminator for systems utilizing Compact I O expansion has already been factored into the calculations A system is valid if the current and power requirements are satisfied Note A Right End Cap Terminator catalog number 1769 ECR is needed for any system using Compact expansion I O E 1 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual System Loading Example Calculations Current Loading Table 25 5 Calculating the Current for MicroLogix Accessories Device Current Requirements Calculated Current Catalog Number at 5V de mA at 24V de mA at 5V dc mA at 24V dc mA 7618 30 0 320 0 1764 DAT 350 0 350 0 1761 NET AIC when powered by the base unit communications port selector switch in the up position 0 120 0 120 Subtotal 1 650 120 1 These are optional accessories Current is consumed only if the accessory is installed Table 25 6 Calculating the Current for Expansion I O T1 n B nxA nxB Device Current Requirements Calculated Current Catalog Number Number of Modules at 5V de mA at 24V de mA at 5V de mA at 24V de mA T WR o d oz 1769 IM12 100 0 1769 1016 1 115 0 115 0 1769 8 145 0 1769 16 1 200 0 200 0 1769 OV16 200 0 1769 OW8 2 125 100 250 200 1769 lQ6XOW4 1 105 50 105 50 1769 IF4 100 100 1769 OF2 100 150 Tot
426. the controller and module move the bus lever fully to the left 4 until it clicks Ensure it is locked firmly in place ATTENTION When attaching I O modules it is very important that the bus connectors are securely locked together to ensure proper electrical connection 7 Attach an end cap terminator 5 to the last module in the system by using the tongue and groove slots as before 8 Lock the end cap bus terminator 6 IMPORTANT 1769 ECR right end cap must be used to terminate the end of the serial communication bus See Controller Dimensions on page A 9 for mounting dimensions 2 26 Wiring Your Controller Wi ring Your Controller This chapter describes how to wire your controller Topics include wire requirements using surge suppressors grounding guidelines sinking and sourcing circuits wiring diagrams input voltage ranges and output voltage ranges minimizing noise Wire Requirements Wire Type Wire Size 2 wire maximum per Wiring Torque terminal screw Solid Cu 90 C 14 to 22 AWG 1 13 Nm 10 in Ib rated 194 F 1 3 Nm 12 in Ib maximum Stranded Cu 90 C 14 to 22 AWG 194 F ATTENTION Be careful when stripping wires Wire fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage Once wiring is complete be sure the base unit is free of all metal fragments before removing protective debris strips and installing the processor unit Failure to remove strips before operat
427. the reference data for every scan If equal the FD bit is set in the SQCs control counter Sequencer Instructions Applications of the SQC instruction include machine diagnostics The following figure explains how the SQC instruction works SQC Sequencer Compare CEN gt File B11 10 Mask FFFO CDN gt Source 1 3 0 Control R6 21 CFD gt Length 4 Position 2 Input Word 1 3 0 0010 0100 1001 1101 wv Mask Value 0 1111 1111 1111 0000 Sequencer Ret File 2B10 11 Word Step B10 11 0 12 1 13 0010 0100 1001 0000 2 14 3 15 4 SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matches through mask its corresponding reference word The FD bit R6 21 FD is set in the example since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value 20 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual This instruction uses the following operands File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and compared to the masked value stored in source e Mask The mask operand contains the mask constant word or file which is applied to both file and source When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through for comparison When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to for comparison
428. the rest of the program file In addition this instruction performs the output scan input scan and housekeeping aspects of the processor scan cycle prior to resuming scanning at rung 0 of the main program file 2 If this instruction is executed in a nested subroutine it terminates execution of all nested subroutines END Program End CEND Instruction Type output Table 21 7 Execution Time for the END Instruction When Rung Is True False 0 33 us 0 00 us The END instruction must appear at the end of every ladder program For the main program file file 2 this instruction ends the program scan For a subroutine interrupt or user fault file the END instruction causes a return from subroutine 21 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual MCR Master Control Reset MCR 21 6 Instruction Type output Table 21 8 Execution Time for the MCR Instructions Instruction When Rung Is True False MCR Start 0 66 us 0 66 us MCR End 0 87 us 0 87 us The MCR instruction works in pairs to control the ladder logic found between those pairs Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non retentive outputs Non retentive outputs are reset when the rung goes false 1 1 I MCR 0 Ladder Logic MCR This instruction defines the boundaries of an MCR Zone An MCR Zone is the set of ladder logic instructions bou
429. the words of a file with a source value It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program a parallel output that uses a storage address Destination Source Word to File 19 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 19 4 This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is the address of the value or constant used to fill the destination The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Note constant cannot be used as the source in a timer T counter C or control R file Destination The starting destination address where the data is written e Length The length operand contains the number of elements The length can range from 1 to 128 word 1 to 64 long word or 1 to 42 3 word element such as counter Note The source and destination operands must be of the same file type unless they are bit B and integer N Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 19 5 FLL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Level 2 a
430. this publication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 Automation Systems Catalog publication B111 Installing Your Controller General Considerations Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure Pollution Degree 2 to reduce the effects of electrical interference Over Voltage Category II and environmental exposure Locate your controller as far as possible from power lines load lines and other sources of electrical noise such as hard contact switches relays and AC motor drives For more information on proper grounding guidelines see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 ATTENTION Vertical mounting is not recommended due to heat build up considerations ATTENTION Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel Drilled fragments that fall into the base or processor unit could cause damage Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris strips have been removed or the processor has been installed 1 Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected 2 Overvoltag
431. thru using Channel 0 DH485 3 MSG Rung 2 1 MG11 0 General This Controller Control Bits Communication Command PLCS write Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address Size in Elements R Awaiting Execution EW 0 Channel 0 Eror ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address 7 Message Enabled 0 Local Bridge Addr dec n octal 1 Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr dec 0 ss Remote Station Address dec 3 Remote Bridge Link ID 2 Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors Channel is set to 0 since the originating command is initiated by an MicroLogix 1500 processor on the DH485 network Local Bridge Node Address is set to since this is the DH485 node address used by the passthru SLC 5 04 processor Remote Bridge Node Address is set to 0 not used because communication is from one Internet capable device to another remote capable device Remote Station Address is the PLC 5 processor at node address 3 Remote Bridge Link ID is the link ID of the remote DH network with the SLC 5 04 processor Channel 1 Link ID 2 and PLC 5 processor Channel 1A Link ID 2 Note Data Table Addresses the Size in Elements and Message Timeout are all user specified Important Set the MicroLogix 1500 s Link ID in the channel configuration Screen 25 39 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable
432. time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on the type and state of the I O but is typically between 10 milliseconds and 3 seconds When the duration of power loss reaches this limit the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate dc power to the system This is referred to as a power supply shutdown The processor then performs an orderly shutdown of the controller Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the inputs Because of this the input state change from to that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system Understanding this concept is important The user program should be written to take this effect into account Other Types of Line Conditions Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system 2 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Preventing Excessive Heat For most applications normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range
433. ting Minimum ON Maximum ON Minimum Maximum High Speed ms Delay ms Delay ms OFF Delay OFF Delay Counter ms ms Frequency Q 5090 Duty Cycle KHz 20 000 0 025 0 005 0 025 0 005 0 025 6 700 0 075 0 040 0 075 0 045 0 075 5 000 0 100 0 050 0 100 0 060 0 100 2 000 0 250 0 170 0 250 0 210 0 250 1 000 0 500 0 370 0 500 0 330 0 500 0 500 1 000 0 700 1 000 0 800 1 000 0 200 2 000 1 700 2 000 1 600 2 000 0 125 4 000 3 400 4 000 3 600 4 000 0 063 8 000 6 700 8 000 7 300 8 000 0 031 16 000 14 000 16 000 14 000 16 000 1 This is the default setting A 3 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Table 4 Response Times for Normal de Inputs 8 Through 11 1764 24BWA and 8 Through 15 1764 28BXB Maximum Filter Setting Minimum ON Maximum ON Minimum Maximum Frequency Q ms Delay ms Delay ms OFF Delay OFF Delay 5090 Duty ms ms Cycle kHz 1 000 0 500 0 090 0 500 0 020 0 500 0 500 1 000 0 500 1 000 0 400 1 000 0 250 2 000 1 100 2 000 1 300 2 000 0 125 4 000 2 800 4 000 2 700 4 000 0 063 8 000 5 800 8 000 5 300 8 000 0 031 16 000 11 000 16 000 10 000 16 000 1 This is the default setting Table 5 Relay Contact Rating Table 1764 24AWA 24BWA 28BXB Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Voltamperes Make Break Make Break 240V ac 7 5 0 75 2 5A 1800VA 180VA 120V ac 15A 1 5A 125V dc 0 2242 1 0A 28VA 24V de 1 2A2 2 0A 28VA
434. tion Cable The suggested DH485 communication cable is either Belden 3106 or 9842 The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on network communication The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m 4000 ft When cutting cable segments make them long enough to route them from one AIC to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable Use these instructions for wiring the Belden 3106 49842 cable If you are using standard Allen Bradley cables see the Cable Selection Guide on page 3 12 Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH485 Connector Note A daisy chained network is recommended We do not recommend the following Belden 43106A Belden 3106A Belden 3106A or 9842 or 9842 or 9842 Connector Connector Connector Incorrect 4 9 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Single Cable Connection Orange with White Stripes s E White with Orange Stripes SIT G Termination t A 2 4B P 2 3 7 a f Ch
435. ts about power distribution that you should know The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I O devices when the relay is de energized It is recommended that the controller remain powered even when the master control relay is de energized If you are using a dc power supply interrupt the load side rather than the ac line power This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn off The dc power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Power to the dc input and output circuits should be connected through a set of master control relay contacts 2 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed Power Considerations The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers Isolation Transformers You may want to use an isolation transformer in the ac line to the controller This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that en
436. tting to read data 500CPU Write The target device is compatible with and supports the SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix 1000 and 1500 controllers use this setting to send data 485CIF Read The target device is compatible with and supports the 485CIF PLC2 command set use this setting to read data 485CIF Write The target device is compatible with and supports the 485CIF PLC2 command set use this setting to send data PLC5 Read The target device is compatible with and supports the PLC5 command set use this setting to read data PLC5 Write The target device is compatible with and supports the PLC5 command set use this setting to send data 1 The Common Interface File CIF in the MicroLogix 1500 and SLC 500 processors is File 9 The CIF in the MicroLogix 1000 controller is Integer File 7 Communications Instructions Data Table Address This variable defines the starting address in the local controller A valid address is any configured data file within the controller except system status PD and MG files Size in Elements This variable defines the amount of data number of local elements to exchange with the target device The maximum amount of data that can be transferred via a MSG instruction is 103 words 206 bytes and is determined by the destination data type The destination data type is defined by the type of message read or write For Read Messages When a read mes
437. type as is physically present types match the actual configuration and Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode Or Correct the actual configuration to match the user program I O configuration Cycle power 1 xx indicates module number If xx 0 problem cannot be traced to a specific module Calling Allen Bradley for Assistance If you need to contact Allen Bradley or local distributor for assistance it is helpful to obtain the following prior to calling controller type series letter and revision letter of the base unit Series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the processor on bottom side of processor unit controller LED status controller error codes found in S2 6 of status file 1 xx indicates module number If xx 0 problem cannot be traced to a specific module C 14 Understanding the Communication Protocols D Understanding the Communication Protocols Use the information in this appendix to understand the differences in communication protocols The following protocols are supported from the RS 232 communication channel e DFI Full Duplex e DFIHalf Duplex Slave DH485 See Connecting the System on page 4 1 for information about required network devices and accessories RS 232 Communication Interface The communications port on the MicroLogix 1500 utilizes an RS 232 connector RS 232 is an Electronics Industries Association EIA
438. uator is pushed closed 5 To remove the processor from the base unit make sure base unit power is off Push the actuator to the open position until the processor is ejected slightly Once the processor has been ejected it can be removed from the base unit 2 20 Installing Your Controller Data Access Tool 1 Remove cover from processor 2 Holding Data Access Tool DAT in the proper orientation as shown place DAT onto processor Align DAT port on the processor with the plug on the DAT 2 21 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 3 Firmly seat DAT on processor make sure it seats into place 2 22 Installing Your Controller Memory Module Real Time Clock 1 Remove the cover or DAT if installed from the processor as shown below ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the base and processor units Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas 2 23 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 2 Align connector on the memory module with the connector pins on the processor 3 Firmly seat the memory module in the processor making sure the locking tabs click into place 2 24 Compact I O Installing Your Controller Attach and Lock Module Module to Controller or Module to Module A Compact I O module can be attached to the controller or an adjacent I O module before or after mounting to the panel
439. uction Type input GRT RUM ic dn Table 14 4 Execution Time for the GRT and LES Instructions ayes Instruction Data Size When Rung Is True False m GRT word 1 30 HS on HS Source A 3 long word 2 59 us 2 27 us Source B LES word 1 22 us 1 02 us long word 2 59 us 2 27 Us The GRT instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than a second value The LES instruction is used to test whether one value is less than a second value Table 14 5 GRT and LES Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State GT A gt B ue 7 A lt B false LES gt false A lt B true 14 4 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal To Instruction Type input Table 14 6 Execution Time for the GEQ and LEQ Instructions Compare Instructions Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False GEQ word 1 30 us 0 94 us long word 2 59 us 2 27 us LEQ word 1 30 us 1 02 us long word 2 59 us 2 27 us The GEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value The LEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value Table 14 7 GEQ and LEQ Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State GEQ gt true A lt B false LEQ A gt B false lt true
440. uctions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 22 4 IOM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 3 Address Address Data Files Function Files d Mode Level E E o B Parameter Sol T S a amp 5115 5 5 Z lolo o zel lelo 2 85 225 o 215 1 16 lola elz Ju S le SS E18 lo Et EES lo Slot z Mask ele elele elele Length 22 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual REF 1 O Refresh REF Instruction Type output Table 22 5 Execution Time for the REF Instruction When Rung Is True False 19 44 us 0 00 us The REF instruction is used to interrupt the program scan to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle for all communication channels This includes write outputs service communications all communication channels comms push button DAT and comms housekeeping and read inputs The REF instruction has no programming parameters When it is evaluated as true the program scan is interrupted to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the REF instruction The REF instruction cannot be executed fr
441. und in the source The length of the stack can range from to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load Position This is the current location pointed to in the FIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 128 word or 0 to 64 long word File Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 19 11 FFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 11 2 Addr Addri Data Files Function Files ddress Level E Parameter z E 2 B a z o s Sle m n a 1 79 5 9 oo 2 T 10 1916 glo E25 5 5 5 e foo 1 S B 5 5 5 IGE 18 0 ST mm FIFO mm mm m Control 1 Length Position 1 Control file only Not valid for Timers Counters 19 11 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload Instruction Type output Table 19 12 Execution Time for the FFU Instruction Data Size When Rung ls True False word 18 0 727 us word 9 50 us long word 2041 39 us
442. unt limit for the counter If the counters accumulated value decrements past the value specified in this variable an underflow interrupt is generated and the HSC sub system resets the accumulated value to the overflow value the counter then begins counting from the overflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the underflow position provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the underflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Note Data loaded into the underflow variable must be less than the data resident in the low preset HSC 0 LOP or an HSC error will be generated Using the High Speed Counter Output Mask Bits OMB Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 OMB word 16 bit binary control read only The OMB Output Mask Bits define what outputs on the MicroLogix 1500 base can be directly controlled by the high speed counter The HSC sub system has the ability to directly without control program interaction turn outputs ON or OFF based on the HSC accumulator reaching the High or Low presets The bit pattern stored in the variable
443. ve term The adjustment range is 0 to 327 67 minutes Set this value to 1 8 of the integral gain Tj Note This word is not effected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 24 15 Time Mode TM Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary 0 or 1 control read write The time mode bit specifies when the PID is in timed mode 1 or STI mode 0 This bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When set for timed mode the PID updates the CV at the rate specified in the loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT When set for STI mode the PID updates the CV every time the PID instruction is scanned in the control program When you select STI program the PID instruction in the STI interrupt subroutine The STI routine should have a time interval equal to the setting of the PID loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT Set the STI period in word STI 0 SPM For example if the loop update time contains the value 10 for 100 ms then the STI time interval must also equal 100 for 100 ms Note When using timed mode your processor scan time should be at least ten times faster than the loop update time to prevent timing inaccuracies or disturbances 24 12 Loop Update Time LUT Process Control Instruction Tuning Parameter Descriptions Address Data Ra
444. vide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Emergency Stop Switches 2 10 When using emergency stop switches adhere to the following points Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller program Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay e Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application Emergency stop switches must be easy to reach e In the following illustration input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection However in most applications only output circuits require MCR protection The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system Note In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection however if you need to remove power from all field devices you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring Installing Your Controller Schematic Using IEC Symbols 1 12 230V E Fuse MCR p si Circuits Isolation Operation of either ofthese contacts will Transformer remove power from the external O Master Control Relay MCR
445. w 550 Node 5 Node 17 Node 22 Communications Instructions Example 2 Local DeviceNet Network with DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DNI O Node 5 MicroLogix 1000 9 Master 0 oko 2 i Node 1 i L MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 03 25 5 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example 3 Local DF1 Half Duplex Network Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINX RSLinx 2 0 or higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 or PLC 5 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master L LJ 8 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 03 Processor MicroLogix 1500 en undis dn Programmable Modular Controller Programmable E m ib Controller Slave Controllers 1 e Po ace Slave Slave odule Slave Note Itis recommended that isolation 1761 NET AIC be provided between the MicroLogix 1500 and the modem Example 4 Local DF1 Full Duplex Network point to point f MicroLogix 1500 Optical Isol
446. will define which outputs are controlled by the HSC and which outputs are not controlled by the HSC The bit pattern of the OMB variable directly corresponds to the output bits on the MicroLogix 1500 base unit Bits that are set 1 are enabled and can be turned on or off by the HSC sub system bits that are clear 0 can not be turned on or off by the HSC sub system The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup The table below illustrates this relationship Table 9 12 Affect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Address 16 Bit Signed Integer Data Word 15 14 13 12 11 109 181716 151413 121110 HSC 0 HPO high preset output 0 1 1 0111010011 1 0101 HSC 0 OMB output mask 11010 010711 1 110 04 1 1 O0 0 0 MicroLogix 1500 Base Unit Outputs The outputs shown in the black boxes are the outputs under the control of the HSC sub system The mask defines which outputs can be controlled The high preset output or low preset output values HPO or LPO define if each output is either ON 1 or OFF 0 Another way to view this is that the high or low preset output is written through the output mask with the output mask acting like a filter The bits in the gray boxes are unused The first 12 bits of the mask word are used and the remaining mask bits are not functional because the do not correlate to any physical outputs on th
447. wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable programmable controllers Controller Grounding and Wiring 1770 4 1 Guidelines description of important differences between solid state alg programmable controller products and hard wired Application Considerations SGI 1 1 electromechanical devices State Controls An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA A complete listing of current documentation including ordering instructions Also indicates whether the documents Allen Bradley Publication Index 50499 are available on CD ROM or in multi languages glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Allen Bradley Industrial Automation AG 74 Glossary P 2 Preface Common Techniques Used in this Manual The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information e Italic type is used for emphasis Allen Bradley Support Allen Bradley offers support services worldwide with over 75 Sales Support Offices 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone plus Allen Bradley representatives in every major country in the world Local Product Support C
448. wnership if no supported commands are received from the owner within the timeout period If the program ownership were not cleared after a download sequence interruption the processor would not accept commands from any other device because it would assume another device still had program ownership Important If a download sequence is interrupted due to electromagnetic interference or other events discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and then restart the program download The ownership timeout period is 60 seconds After the timeout you can re establish communications with the processor and try the program download again The only other way to remove program ownership is to cycle power on the processor D 7 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Modems with MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers The types of modems that you can use with MicroLogix 1500 controllers include dial up phone modems leased line modems radio modems and line drivers For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that do not require any modem handshaking signals to operate use DF1 Full Duplex protocol For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Full Duplex protocol For multi drop modem connections or for point to point modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol In this case one and only one of t
449. word 9 50 us On a false to true rung transition the FFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user created file called a FIFO stack The data is unloaded using first in first out order After the unload completes the data in the stack is shifted one element toward the top of the stack and the last element is zeroed out Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL FIFO Load CEND inati iti FA Destination Position FIFO N7 12 CDN gt N7 11 N7 12 0 Control R6 0 N7 13 1 Length 34 Position 9 FFU instruction unloads N7 14 2 data from stack N7 12 at 3 position 0 N7 12 FFU 4 FIFO Unload FIFO N7 12 5 34 words are allocated Dest N7 11 L DN 2 6 for FIFO stack starting at Control R6 0 N7 12 ending at N7 45 Length 34 CEM D 7 Position 9 Source 8 N7 10 _ 9 FFL instruction loads data into stack 7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 33 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 19 12 File Instructions This instruction uses the following operands FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the FIFO stack The FFU instruction unloads this value from the first location on the FIFO stack
450. x 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Word Long Word Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in us Memory Instruction Usage in Usage in Programming Instruction Mnemonic False True Words False True Words Sequencer Output 500 6 80 20 20 3 88 6 80 23 40 4 38 Square Root SQR 0 00 22 51 1 50 0 00 26 58 2 50 p Timed Interrupt 575 0 00 62 73 00 Long Word addressing level does not apply Subtract SUB 0 00 3 06 3 25 0 00 11 22 3 50 Suspend SUS 0 00 0 66 1 50 Service Communications SVC 0 00 135 300 word 1 00 Temporary End TND 0 00 0 33 0 50 Convert to BCD TOD 0 00 14 64 1 75 Off Delay Timer TOF 12 32 1 85 3 88 On Delay Timer TON 2 16 15 49 3 88 Word addressing level does not apply User Interrupt Disable UID 0 00 0 59 0 88 User Interrupt Enable UIE 0 00 0 66 0 88 User Interrupt Flush UIF 0 00 9 79 0 88 Examine if Closed XIC 0 63 0 51 1 00 Examine if Open XIO 0 63 0 51 1 00 Exclusive Or XOR 0 00 2 67 2 75 0 00 8 81 3 00 F4 Indirect Addressin g Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the Micrologix 1500 processor The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file type
451. x 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 10 2 The PTO instruction along with the HSC and PWM functions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions In this implementation the user defines the total number of pulses to be generated which corresponds to distance traveled and how many pulses to use for each accel decel period The number of pulses not used in the accel decel period defines how many pulses will be generated during the run phase In this implementation the accel decel intervals are the same Within the PTO function file are two PTO elements Each element can be set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 or output 3 0 0 3 The interface to the PTO sub system is accomplished by scanning a PTO instruction in the main program file file number 2 or by scanning a PTO instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PTO instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PTO instruction is on is solved true 2 The PTO instruction is started and pulses are produced based on the accel decel ACCEL parameters which define the number of ACCEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid The ACCEL phase completes The RUN phase is entered and the number of pulses defined for RUN are output T
452. x 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual Communications Mode Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 3 binary Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 4 3 See Channel 0 General Channel Status Block on page 6 14 for more information Communications Active Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 4 binary Oor 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 4 4 See Channel 0 General Channel Status Block on page 6 14 for more information Scan Toggle Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 9 binary Oor 1 status read write The controller changes the status of this bit at the end of each scan It is reset upon entry into an executing mode G 20 Last 100 uSec Scan Time System Status File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 35 word 0 to 32 767 status read wr
453. y The PTO EN Enable Status is controlled by the PTO sub system When the rung preceding the PTO instruction is solved true the PTO instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set If the rung preceding the PTO instruction transitions to a false state before the pulse sequence completes its operation the enable status bit resets 0 The EN bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO is enabled e Cleared 0 PTO has completed or the rung preceding the PTO is false PTO Output Frequency OF Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write The PTO OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during the RUN phase of the pulse profile This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error 10 13 MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual PTO Operating Frequency Status OFS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz PTO 0 OFS word INT 0 to 20 000 status read only The PTO OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PTO sub system an

176461 User Manual.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents